JP5234628B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Game machine Download PDF

Info

Publication number
JP5234628B2
JP5234628B2 JP2008310425A JP2008310425A JP5234628B2 JP 5234628 B2 JP5234628 B2 JP 5234628B2 JP 2008310425 A JP2008310425 A JP 2008310425A JP 2008310425 A JP2008310425 A JP 2008310425A JP 5234628 B2 JP5234628 B2 JP 5234628B2
Authority
JP
Japan
Prior art keywords
traversing
game
frame
displayed
unit
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Active
Application number
JP2008310425A
Other languages
Japanese (ja)
Other versions
JP2010131220A (en
Inventor
高明 市原
明彦 成吉
Original Assignee
株式会社大一商会
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 株式会社大一商会 filed Critical 株式会社大一商会
Priority to JP2008310425A priority Critical patent/JP5234628B2/en
Publication of JP2010131220A publication Critical patent/JP2010131220A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of JP5234628B2 publication Critical patent/JP5234628B2/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lot of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a gaming area where, for example, gaming balls are driven as gaming media, and at appropriate positions in the gaming area. Is provided with a plurality of winning openings for paying out a predetermined number of game media when the game media are received. Among these winning holes, there is a start opening for lottery with the reception of game media, and it is advantageous to the player according to the lottery result drawn by receiving game media into the start opening. Those that generate an advantageous gaming state are also known. There is also known an effect display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image at a position visible to the player in the game area so that the player can enjoy the displayed effect image. .

  Also, in this type of gaming machine, it is known that a movable accessory that is movable in accordance with a gaming state or the like is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and a comparison that moves up and down in front of the effect display means. There have been proposed two large-sized movable bodies that are made to entertain the player by the movement of the movable bodies by moving the movable bodies closer to or away from each other (for example, Patent Document 1). . In addition, a plurality of door-like movable bodies that can move in the left-right direction and conceal the effect display means are provided in front of the effect display means, and the effect display means are exposed by moving the plurality of movable bodies according to the gaming state. There has also been proposed a technique in which a production image is enjoyed along with the movement of the movable body by concealing it (for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2007-143790 A JP 2007-061488 A

However, in the conventional gaming machines, there is a possibility that interest in the Yu technique decreases.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, is intended Xing attraction is that an object to provide a can suppress the gaming machine from lowering.

Mean 1: In the gaming machine,
“A game area where game media is driven by the player's operation,
A starting port arranged to be placed at a predetermined position in the game area and capable of receiving a game medium that has been driven in;
The starting port is a receiving port that is arranged at a different position in the gaming area and is capable of receiving a game medium that has been driven in;
A payout unit for paying out a predetermined number of game media in response to the reception of game media at the receiving port and the start port;
Lottery means for drawing a predetermined lottery result in response to the reception of the game medium at the start port;
Advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state advantageous to a player in accordance with the lottery result of the lottery means;
A plate-like game panel that supports at least the start port and the receiving port at a predetermined position in the game area, and can partition a rear end of the game area;
An effect display means arranged on the rear side of the game panel so as to be visible from a player at a position corresponding to the game area, and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image;
A plurality of window frames arranged between the effect display means and the game panel and capable of projecting and displaying a predetermined effect image, and at least the front face of the effect display means can be moved independently in the left-right direction. Movable body,
Movable effect control means for independently controlling movement of the movable bodies in the left-right direction according to the lottery result of the lottery means;
A previous effect image control means capable of controlling a previous effect image as an effect image projected and displayed on the window frame of the movable body, the movement of which is controlled by the movable effect control means, according to the lottery result of the lottery means; ,
It looks like it is arranged behind the previous effect image controlled by the previous effect image control means, and a plurality of symbol sequences each comprising a predetermined number of symbols are displayed according to the lottery result of the lottery means. After the variation display, the variation display of the symbol sequence is sequentially stopped, and the lottery result effect image that suggests the lottery result is suggested by the combination of the symbols of the stopped symbol sequence, and is displayed on the effect control means. A post-effect image control means capable of controlling the post-effect image;
By controlling at least the subsequent effect image control means, the previous effect image control means, and the movable effect control means, the lots of results images displayed as the subsequent effect image are displayed in a variable manner in the lottery result effect image. Two movable bodies that project and display a predetermined front effect image on the window frame are brought into contact with each other while repeating approach and separation so that the design is sandwiched from both the left and right sides when viewed from the front. After covering with the two movable bodies, the design is left as it is or changed to a different design, and the two movable bodies in contact with each other are separated from each other so that the player can visually recognize the rear design. A gaming machine comprising: an effect control means capable of controlling at least a lottery result special effect for variably displaying the symbol sequence by enabling it.

  Here, as the “starting port”, “a game medium that can be accepted at all times”, “a game medium that has passed a predetermined area in the game area (eg, gate, through chucker, warp passage, etc.) The chance that the probability of accepting game media will change when triggered by "," "Normal lottery results will be drawn when the game media passes a predetermined area (eg, gate, through chucker, warp passage, etc.) within the game area. Then, based on the result of the normal lottery, the game media can be received or cannot be received ”.

  In addition, the “reception entrance” includes “a winning opening (for example, a general winning opening) where a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out when a gaming medium can be received at all times and the gaming medium is received”, “expanding” A variable prize opening (for example, an electric tulip) that has a pair of possible movable pieces, and the probability of accepting a game medium changes by opening and closing the pair of movable pieces. Depending on the lottery result by receiving the medium, the game medium can be received by opening and closing in a predetermined pattern (for example, a big prize opening, a prize winning opening, etc.).

  Furthermore, the “game panel” may be in the form of a plate, and the materials thereof are “wooden plywood”, “acrylic resin”, “polycarbonate resin”, “ABS resin”, “polypropylene”, “polyarylate resin”, “ Methacrylic resin "," glass ", and the like. When the gaming panel is transparent, it is desirable to use an acrylic resin as the gaming panel, and this acrylic resin has higher transparency than other transparent members and is disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel. The movable body, the effect display means, etc. can be made easier to see.

  The “movable body” is preferably a size and shape that is easily visible to the player, such as “a rectangular shape in front view”, “a shape imitating a predetermined vehicle or animal”, “a predetermined shape” With a frame-like window frame capable of projecting and displaying a pre-production image at a predetermined position. Is. The number of movable bodies is preferably in the range of 2-10. Moreover, as a magnitude | size of a movable body, it is set as the width | variety in the range of 1/2 to 1/10 with respect to the width of the left-right direction of the effect display means (or visual recognition area | region) which can display a predetermined effect image. It is desirable. If the width of the movable body in the left-right direction is larger than ½ of the width of the effect display means, the effect display means is arranged at substantially the center in the left-right direction and the movable body moves to the left and right outside of the effect display means. This is because it is difficult to make the width of the effect display means larger than half the width of the game area, and the effect image cannot be enjoyed on a large screen. Also, if the width of the movable body is smaller than 1/10 of the width of the effect display means, the movable body becomes too small and it is difficult for the player to see, and the movement of the movable body may not be fully enjoyed. Because there is. In addition, it is desirable that the width in the left-right direction of the movable body is within a range of 1/3 to 1/6 of the width of the effect display means (viewable area).

  The driving means (driving device) for moving the movable body in the left-right direction includes “a driving pulley that is driven to rotate by a driving motor, a driven pulley that is disposed a predetermined distance away from the driving pulley in the left-right direction, and a driven "A belt having a belt wound around a pulley and a drive pulley and to which a movable body is fixed", "A pinion gear rotated by a drive motor, a pinion gear meshed with the pinion gear and slidable in the left-right direction, "Equipped with a fixed rack gear", "a long male screw member extending in the left-right direction that is rotated by a drive motor, and a female screw member that is screwed with the male screw member and supported non-rotatably and the movable body is fixed A movable body having a plurality of fixed electromagnets arranged linearly in the left-right direction and a magnet arranged opposite to the fixed electromagnet. "With a movable element that is fixed", "with a plunger extending in the left-right direction and a solenoid for moving the plunger back and forth in the left-right direction", "cylinder arranged to extend in the left-right direction, and in the cylinder And a piston rod that is connected to the piston and extends from the cylinder to the outside ".

  Furthermore, “projection display” of the effect image (previous effect image) in the window frame of the movable body means “what displays the effect image by providing a predetermined display device on the window frame itself”, “arranged at a predetermined position”. Projecting the effect image in the window frame using the projection device ”,“ Seeing from the player side of the effect display means to the effect display means that is transparent in the window frame and arranged on the rear side of the movable body ” The front effect image is displayed in a position within the window frame (in front view), and the previous effect image is displayed in the window frame by moving the previous effect image in accordance with the movement of the movable body. And the like ".

  In addition, as the predetermined “pre-effect image” projected and displayed on the window frame of the movable body, “the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the lottery result effect image”, “the symbol row that is variably displayed in the lottery result effect image”, “ A predetermined character or an image of an object or tool ".

  Furthermore, examples of “effect display means” include “liquid crystal display device”, “EL display device”, “plasma display device”, “CRT”, “laser display”, and the like. In addition, it is desirable to use a thin display means such as a liquid crystal display device, and the depth direction of the gaming machine can be relatively wide. For example, the depth (depth) of the back box in the back unit can be increased. Thus, a three-dimensional movable decorative body can be arranged. In addition, the display screen of the effect display means is “visible to the player through the game area”, “the game panel is made of a transparent plate and visible through the transparent game panel”, “the game panel is rendered A through-opening having a size corresponding to that of the display means is formed and made visible through the opening. ”“ A gaming panel is a transparent plate, and an opening that penetrates the gaming panel is formed and is transparent. What can be visually recognized through a game panel and an opening part "etc. are mentioned. In addition, it is desirable that the width in the left-right direction of the effect display means is substantially the same as the width in the left-right direction of the visible region.

  In addition, “lottery means”, “advantageous game state generating means”, “front effect image control means”, “rear effect image control means”, “movable effect control means”, “effect control means”, etc. As a CPU, a ROM storing a program, initial values, and the like, and a RAM for temporarily storing data during arithmetic processing in the CPU, and executing the predetermined program in the CPU "Main control board for controlling basic games of gaming machines using game media" and "peripheral control for assisting control by main control means and controlling various performance operations related to games" It is embodied as appropriate in the “substrate” and the like.

  Furthermore, the “advantageous game state” means a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and can be exemplified by the following various states.

(1) In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the opening / closing opening (winning port) that is driven to open and close is repeatedly opened and closed a predetermined number of times, or is continuously opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won. A state in which a large amount of game media (game balls) easily enter the receiving port (so-called “big hit” game state).

(2) In a gaming machine such as a pachinko, a so-called “probability variation state” in which a winning probability of a lottery for a big hit is set higher than normal and a probability that a big hit gaming state is generated is set higher than normal.

(3) In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery starting device for lottery that performs a lottery to determine whether or not a big hit gaming state is generated by accepting (winning) or passing a game medium enters the game medium more than usual. A state in which a lottery lottery is performed more frequently than usual, that is, a so-called “time reduction state”.

(4) In a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine, a state in which the reels are easily stopped in a mode of paying out medals as game media during a predetermined game, a so-called “bonus game state”.

(5) In a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine, a state in which the reels can be stopped with a bonus symbol which is a condition for making the next game state a bonus game state, a so-called “bonus establishment state”.

(6) In a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine, a state that assists the formation of a combination by guiding a reel stop order and symbols for establishing a combination for a predetermined number of games, so-called “assist game state” .

(7) In a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine, a so-called “probability fluctuation state” in which the probability that a bonus state such as a bonus game state, a bonus establishment state, or an assist game state occurs is higher than usual.
Etc.

  By the way, in the thing of patent document 1 as a conventional game machine, two movable bodies are arrange | positioned in the position of the substantially the same front-back direction, and it cannot move to the other side over another movable body. It has become. Moreover, in the thing of patent document 2, although the some movable body arrange | positioned on either side across the center of the left-right direction is arrange | positioned in the position where each differs in the front-back direction, it follows so that the frontmost movable body may be followed. Each is connected, and can move only within the connected range. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, the movable bodies arranged up and down or left and right only move toward and away from each other, so that the movement of the movable bodies is simple, and it is easy to get used to and familiar to some players. As a result, there is a risk that the interest in games will be reduced.

  According to the configuration of the means 1, a game area into which a game medium is driven by a player's operation in the gaming machine, a start port that is placed at a predetermined position in the game area and is capable of receiving the game medium, A mouth that is placed at a different position in the game area and is capable of receiving a game medium that has been struck, and a payout that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to the acceptance of the game medium at the entrance and the start opening A unit, lottery means for lottery of a predetermined lottery result in response to acceptance of a game medium at the start port, and advantageous game state generation means for generating an advantageous game state advantageous to the player in accordance with the lottery result of the lottery means; , At least the starting port and the receiving port are supported at predetermined positions in the game area, and the player can be placed at a position corresponding to the game area on the rear side of the game panel, and a rear panel of the game area. View approval from And an effect display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a window frame arranged between the effect display means and the game panel and capable of projecting and displaying the predetermined effect image, at least in front of the effect display means A plurality of movable bodies that can be independently moved in the left-right direction, and a movable effect control means for independently controlling movement of the plurality of movable bodies in the left-right direction according to the lottery result of the lottery means, A front effect image control means capable of controlling a previous effect image as an effect image projected and displayed on a window frame of a movable body, the movement of which is controlled by the movable effect control means, according to the lottery result of the lottery means, and the previous effect image control It appears that it is arranged behind the front effect image controlled by the means, and after sequentially displaying a plurality of symbol sequences consisting of a predetermined number of symbols according to the lottery result of the lottery means, Column variation table A post-effect image control means capable of controlling a post-effect image displayed on the effect control means, including a lottery result effect image that suggests a lottery result based on a combination of symbols in the stopped symbol series By controlling at least the image control means, the front effect image control means, and the movable effect control means, the symbols in the symbol sequence being variably displayed in the lottery result effect image displayed as the rear effect image can be viewed from both the left and right sides when viewed from the front. The two movable bodies projecting and displaying a predetermined front effect image on the window frame so as to be sandwiched are brought into contact with each other while repeating the approach and separation, and the design is covered with the two movable bodies, and the design is left as it is or After changing to a different design, the two movable bodies that are in contact with each other are separated from each other so that the rear design can be visually recognized by the player. Both are provided with controllable production control means.

  As a result, when the game medium that has been driven into the game area by the player operating the driving operation unit is received in the receiving port or the starting port, a predetermined number of game media are paid out from the payout unit. In addition, when the game medium is received at the start port, in addition to the game medium being paid out by the payout unit, a predetermined lottery result is drawn by the lottery means, and the effect display means includes a plurality of effect display means to indicate the lottery result. After the symbol sequence starts to be changed, a lottery result effect image suggesting a lottery result selected by a combination of symbols in the stopped symbol sequence is displayed. Then, if the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed satisfies a predetermined combination, an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) that is advantageous to the player occurs, and more game media are provided to the player. Can give an opportunity to be paid out, and can increase the interest of the game. While the lottery result effect image is displayed, the two movable bodies that project and display a predetermined previous effect image on the window frame approach or move away from each other so as to sandwich the symbol of the symbol sequence that is displayed in a variable manner. By repeating this, the player can be entertained by the two movable bodies on which the previous effect images are displayed and the symbols sandwiched between them. When the two movable bodies come into contact with each other and the symbols of the rear effect image are hidden, the rear symbols are left as they are or are changed to different symbols, and the two movable members are separated from each other. By moving in the direction, the symbols on the rear side can be visually recognized, and the symbols will fluctuate. As described above, since the predetermined effect image is displayed on the window frame of the movable body, the appearance of the three-dimensional movable body can be greatly changed by changing the previous effect image. It is possible to increase the types of collaboration effects by combining with the after-effect images displayed on the effect display means, and to realize the collaboration effects between the more various movable bodies and the effect images. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the decrease of the game.

  In addition, since the plurality of movable bodies can be independently moved in the left-right direction, compared to the conventional movable bodies that only approach or separate from each other, a plurality of movable bodies can perform complicated movements. It can be combined with various pre-production images projected and displayed on the window frame of the movable body, making the movable body more conspicuous and making various productions possible, making it difficult for players to get used to It is possible to prevent the interest of the music from deteriorating.

  In addition, the pre-effect image projected and displayed on the window frames of the two movable bodies in the special effect of the lottery result may be a stop-displayed pattern, which varies depending on the movable body on which the stopped-displayed pattern is displayed. Since the displayed symbols are fluctuated, it is possible to show the player an unprecedented fresh and fluctuating production, and to prevent the player from getting bored and reducing the interest in the player's game. In addition, it is possible to increase the appeal to the player by collaborative production of the movable body and the production image, making it easier to select this gaming machine as a gaming machine that greatly differentiates from other gaming machines. be able to.

  Furthermore, in the special effect of the lottery result, the design sandwiched between the two movable bodies is elastically deformed according to the movement of the movable body (for example, the shape of the base of the design is vertically long according to the interval between the movable bodies) In other words, the movable body and the symbol are sandwiched by the movable body when viewed from the player side even though the movable body and the symbol are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. It is possible to create an illusion as if the pattern is deformed, and to realize a collaboration effect between the movement of the movable body and the effect image (symbol) that can be more realistic and appeal to the player's sensitivity. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the symbols concealed by the two movable bodies are visible from the player side when the movable bodies are separated from each other, the symbols that are visible after the two movable bodies are temporarily displayed. You may make it display larger than usual, and this makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that the symbol has jumped out between the two movable bodies, and to surprise the player, It is possible to increase the impact on the symbol display, and to prevent the game from becoming less tired and less fun.

  Further, the movable body substantially corresponds to the front surface of the effect display means and can be viewed from the player side, and the left-right direction between the left and right sides of the viewable area and the invisible area from the player side. Thus, when the lottery result effect image is displayed on the effect display means, all the movable bodies are moved into the invisible region, thereby displaying the effect. It is possible to display the lottery result effect image using the whole means, display each symbol or the like as large as possible for easy viewing, and entertain the lottery result effect image on a large screen. Also, when starting the lottery result special effect, it is also possible to move the two movable bodies from the invisible area to the visible area and perform the lottery result special effect. The atmosphere in the game area can be greatly changed, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the expectation for the special effect of the lottery results can be enhanced to suppress the player's interest in the game from being reduced. Can do.

  Furthermore, an effect display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image on the rear side of the movable body is provided, and in a manner similar to the conventional gaming machine, after a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed, the display is stopped. Since the lottery result effect image that suggests the lottery result to the player is displayed by the combination of symbols, it is possible to prevent the player who is used to the conventional gaming machine from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, since various images can be displayed on the effect display means in accordance with the movement of the movable body, the types of collaboration effects between the movable body and the effect images can be increased, making it difficult to get tired of the collaboration effects. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest in the game from being reduced. Further, the window frame of the movable body is configured so that the rear side can be visually recognized, and an image corresponding to the window frame of the movable body (front effect image) is displayed on the effect display means, as if the image is displayed on the window frame. It is possible to make an illusion as if the image is projected and displayed, and even if the window frame of the movable body is not equipped with a display device or the like, it is possible to easily display the previous effect image on the window frame and An increase in cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, movable bodies that can move independently in the left-right direction may be arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, so that any movable body can be sufficiently moved within the movable range in the left-right direction. It is possible to cross movable bodies, overtake and overtake, and increase the variation of movable production by multiple movable bodies, making it difficult to get bored by various productions and interest in games It can suppress that it falls.

  The window frame of the movable body can be viewed from the player side through the frame, and the effect image displayed on the effect display means is composed of a plurality of layers. The rear effect image may be arranged on the rear layer and displayed on the effect display means on the front layer, so that the movable object may be provided with a window frame of the movable object even if it is not provided with a display device. It is possible to make an illusion that the previous effect image is displayed, to simplify the configuration of the movable body and to facilitate the movement, and to suppress an increase in the cost associated with the gaming machine.

Means 2: In the constitution of means 1,
“The production control means
The combination of symbols in a plurality of symbol sequences that are stopped and displayed in the lottery result effect image displayed as the post-effect image can satisfy the combination of symbols in which an advantageous gaming state occurs In accordance with the lottery of the lottery result to be a combination, the display of the lottery result effect image is started, and the combination of the symbols in the plurality of symbol sequences that are stopped and displayed except for the one symbol sequence is in an advantageous gaming state The lottery result special effect is performed when the combination of symbols that can be generated becomes a combination that can be satisfied ".

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine provided with the effect display means capable of displaying the predetermined effect image, in the lottery result effect image that suggests the lottery result to the player, for example, the symbols that are stopped and displayed except for one symbol row When the combination of symbols in the column becomes a combination that can satisfy the symbol combination in which an advantageous gaming state occurs, that is, when it becomes a so-called “reach”, a predetermined character, etc. It is known that all symbols are stopped and displayed by changing the symbol sequentially according to the movement of the character, etc., and this reach effect image is compared with the case where only the symbol is displayed, the character, etc. As a result of this movement, it is possible to make it easier for players to empathize, and to make it more exciting whether or not to stop at the desired design. It has been cut way. However, in such a gaming machine, since the reach effect is performed only with the effect image displayed on the effect display means, it is easy to familiarize with a simple image lacking a three-dimensional effect, and it gets bored with familiarity, and it is interesting for the game. There is a problem that the difference from other similar gaming machines is reduced and the appealing power to the player is weakened by becoming unfamiliar and getting used to it.

  According to the configuration of the means 2, a combination of symbols in a plurality of symbol sequences that are stopped and displayed except for one symbol sequence in the lottery result effect image displayed as a post-effect image by the effect control means causes an advantageous gaming state. In accordance with the lottery of the lottery result that is a combination that can satisfy the symbol combination, the display of the lottery result effect image is started, and the combination of symbols in a plurality of symbol sequences that are stopped and displayed except for one symbol sequence is advantageous game When the combination of symbols in which the state occurs can be satisfied, the lottery result special effect is implemented.

  As a result, the combination of symbols in the symbol sequence that is stopped and displayed except for one symbol sequence in the lottery result effect image becomes a combination that can satisfy the combination of symbols in which an advantageous gaming state occurs (so-called “reach” When the two movable bodies are separated from each other so that the rear symbols can be visually recognized, the desired game state is generated. Depending on whether or not this symbol appears, the player can be thrilled and excited to increase the expectation, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

  Also, compared to the “reach” effect (a special effect for the lottery result) produced only by the effect image of the effect display means as in the past, the two movable bodies displaying the predetermined previous effect image on the window frame are displayed in a variable manner to the end. Since the symbols in the displayed symbol sequence are repeated and pinched, they are concealed by two movable bodies, so that the player can see a new and unprecedented “reach” production. It is possible to prevent a player from getting bored and to reduce the interest of the player in the game, and to increase the appeal to the player by collaborating with the movable body and the effect image. This gaming machine can be easily selected as a gaming machine that is greatly differentiated from the machine.

  Furthermore, the combination of the symbols in the symbol sequence that is stopped and displayed in the lottery result effect image except for one symbol row becomes a combination that can satisfy the combination of symbols in which the advantageous gaming state occurs, that is, in the lottery result effect image. In accordance with the lottery result in which the symbols of the multiple symbol rows that are variably displayed are in the “reach” state, the two movable bodies that display the previous effect image carry out the lottery result special effect by holding the variable symbol and changing Since the lottery result special effect may not be implemented even if it becomes `` reach '', the premium feeling for the lottery result special effect can be increased, and the lottery result special effect is implemented, It is possible to further increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, in the lottery result effect image, a combination of symbols in which a plurality of symbol sequences to be variably displayed is stopped except for one symbol sequence can satisfy a combination of symbols in which an advantageous gaming state occurs In other words, if the two movable bodies begin to approach each other with a fluctuating pattern after reaching the `` reach '' state, some players may recognize that the lottery result special effect has started. As a result, it is possible to focus attention on the movement of the movable body after “reach”, and to increase the expectation for the special effect of the lottery result, thereby suppressing the interest in the game from decreasing.

  In addition, the pre-effect image projected and displayed on the window frames of the two movable bodies in the special effect of the lottery result may be a stop-displayed pattern, which varies depending on the movable body on which the stopped-displayed pattern is displayed. Since the displayed symbols are fluctuated, it is possible to show the player an unprecedented fresh and fluctuating production, and to prevent the player from getting bored and reducing the interest in the player's game. In addition, it is possible to increase the appeal to the player by collaborative production of the movable body and the production image, making it easier to select this gaming machine as a gaming machine that greatly differentiates from other gaming machines. be able to. In addition, the symbols that are stopped and displayed are displayed on the window frames of the two movable bodies, that is, the “reach” symbol is displayed on the movable body, and the “reach” symbol is displayed to the player. Since it is possible to be strongly conscious, it becomes possible to always recognize which symbol should be displayed when the variable symbol sandwiched between the two movable objects is stopped, and the symbol that appears between the two movable members Depending on whether or not it is a desired symbol, the player can be thrilled and excited and the expectation can be enhanced, and the player can be prevented from being entertained and the interest in the game being reduced.

  Furthermore, the plurality of symbol sequences displayed in the lottery result effect image may be three symbol sequences arranged in the left-right direction, and the central symbol sequence may be displayed variably to the end. In the result special production, the two movable bodies move so as to sandwich the central symbol, making it easier for the player to see the movement of the movable member and the symbols, and making the lottery result special production more entertaining It can suppress that interest falls.

Means 3: In the constitution of means 1 or means 2,
“The production control means
In the lottery result special effect, the previous effect image projected and displayed on the window frames of the two movable bodies is the symbol of the symbol sequence stopped and displayed in the lottery result effect image. It is characterized by.

  According to the structure of the means 3, the effect control means uses the special effect of the lottery result and the effect image projected and displayed on the window frames of the two movable bodies as the symbol of the symbol sequence stopped and displayed in the lottery result effect image. It is what I did.

  As a result, the symbols that are displayed in a stopped state are fluctuated by the movable object projected and displayed on the window frame, and the symbols are fluctuating, so that it is possible to show the player a new and unfamiliar variation effect. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the player's interest in the game, and to increase the appealing power to the player by collaborating with the movable body and the production image, other gaming machines In contrast, the present gaming machine can be easily selected as a gaming machine that is greatly differentiated.

  In addition, if the special effect of the lottery results is performed at the time of “reach”, the “reach” symbol will be displayed on the window frames of the two movable bodies, and the “reach” symbol will be displayed to the player. Since it is possible to be strongly conscious, it becomes possible to always recognize which symbol should be displayed when the variable symbol sandwiched between the two movable objects is stopped, and the symbol that appears between the two movable members Depending on whether or not it is a desired symbol, the player can be thrilled and excited and the expectation can be enhanced, and the player can be prevented from being entertained and the interest in the game being reduced.

  When projecting and displaying the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the window frames of the two movable bodies, the symbols that are stopped and displayed are displayed on the window frames of the movable body after the stopped and displayed symbols are covered with the movable body. In this way, it is possible to make the design displayed on the effect display means feel as if it has been transferred to the window frame of the movable body and displayed to the player on the window frame of the movable body. It is possible to easily recognize that the displayed symbol is a symbol that is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to entertain emotions to the symbol displayed on the movable body and entertain the symbol that can move as the movable body.

Means 4: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 3,
“The production control means
In the lottery result special effect, the symbols sandwiched between the two movable bodies are displayed so as to be elastically deformed in accordance with the movement of the movable bodies.

  According to the configuration of the means 4, the effect control means displays the symbol sandwiched between the two movable bodies in a lottery result special effect so as to be elastically deformed according to the movement of the movable body.

  Thereby, for example, when a symbol that is variably displayed in front view is sandwiched between two movable bodies and the distance between the movable bodies is smaller than the width of the symbol, the pattern is defined as the width between the movable bodies. When the width between the movable bodies is larger than the width of the symbol, the symbol is restored to its original state, that is, according to the movement of the movable member. Since the sandwiched design is elastically deformed like a rubber bowl, the movable body and the design can be viewed from the player's side even though the movable body and the design are located at different positions in the front-rear direction. It is possible to create an illusion as if the design is deformed by being pinched by the movement of the movable body that can enhance the real feeling and appeal to the player's sensibility and the production image (design) Embody It can, to delight player interest in the game can be suppressed.

Means 5: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 4,
“The production control means
In the lottery result special effect, when the two movable bodies in contact with each other are separated from each other so that the player can visually recognize the symbols on the rear side, the symbols are temporarily displayed larger than usual. It is characterized by being.

  According to the configuration of the means 5, when the effect control means makes the lottery result special effect so that the two movable bodies in contact with each other are separated from each other so that the rear symbol can be visually recognized by the player, the symbol is once temporarily displayed. It is intended to be enlarged and displayed.

  As a result, after the symbol that is being displayed is covered by the two movable bodies, when the two movable bodies are separated from each other and the symbol that is displaying the variation is displayed, the symbol is temporarily displayed larger than usual. The player can be given the illusion that a symbol has jumped from between two movable bodies, which can surprise the player and increase the impact on the symbol's variation display, making it difficult to get bored. And it can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls.

Means 6: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 5,
“The lottery result effect image as the post effect image is
The symbol sequence is displayed in a three-variable manner along the left-right direction, and the symbol sequence variably displayed at the center in the left-right direction is stopped and displayed at the end ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 6, the lottery result effect image as the rear effect image is variably displayed with three symbol rows arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and the symbol sequence variably displayed at the center in the left-right direction is finally stopped and displayed. It is what I did.

  As a result, the plurality of symbol strings displayed in the lottery result effect image are changed to three symbol strings arranged in the left-right direction, and the central symbol string is variably displayed to the end. Now, it becomes possible for two movable bodies to sandwich the central symbol, making it easier for the player to see the movement and symbols of the movable member, and making the special effects of the lottery more enjoyable and more interesting for games. It can suppress that it falls.

Means 7: In the configuration of means 6,
“The production control means
At the start of the lottery result special effect, when the two movable bodies approach each other and cover the symbols of the left and right symbol rows that are stopped and displayed, they are stopped and displayed on the window frames of the two movable bodies. The symbols are projected and displayed as the previous effect image, and the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the rear effect image are erased until the lottery result special effect ends.

  According to the structure of the means 7, when the effect control means causes the two movable bodies to approach each other at the start of the lottery result special effect and covers the symbols in the left and right symbol rows that are stopped and displayed, the windows of the two movable bodies are displayed. The symbols stopped and displayed in the frame are projected and displayed as the previous effect image, and the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the subsequent effect image are deleted until the lottery result special effect ends.

  As a result, when the two movable bodies that are close to each other so as to sandwich the central symbol in the variable display cover the front surfaces of the left and right symbol columns that are stopped and displayed, the symbols that are stopped and displayed are the front effect images, respectively. Since the stop-displayed design displayed as the post-production image after being projected and displayed on the window frame is erased, the design of the post-production image displayed as a stop is displayed to the player on the movable object window. It is possible to make an illusion as if the player has moved to the frame, and the player's interest can be changed from the post-production image to the previous production image (movable body). I can do it.

  By the way, after the stopped display is projected and displayed on the window frame of the movable body, the movable body is approached so as to sandwich the variable display pattern with the stopped display pattern displayed as it is. If the operation is repeated, the symbols on the rear stop will appear and disappear depending on the position of the movable body, and the player will display the symbols displayed on the window frame of the movable body and the effect display means. Since the displayed symbols can be seen at the same time, it may be felt that the stopped and displayed symbols have not been transferred to the movable body, and the interest in the movable body may be reduced. There is a risk that your eyes will flicker, and you may feel a sense of incongruity and reduce your interest in gaming.

  However, according to this means, when the stop-displayed design is projected and displayed on the window frame of the movable body, the design of the effect image after the stop-display is erased. Even if the movable body repeats the approach and separation so as to sandwich the symbol, the symbol that is stopped and displayed after the movable member is not seen, and the symbol that is stopped and displayed to the player is surely attached to the movable member. It is possible to recognize that it has been transferred to, and it is possible to prevent the eyes from flickering due to the symbols visible and hidden behind the movable body, and to feel uncomfortable, and the interest in games is reduced Can be suppressed.

Means 8: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 7,
"The movable body is
A visually recognizable area that substantially corresponds to the front face of the effect display means and is visible from the player side within a range that is smaller than the width of the gaming panel in the left-right direction and larger than half of the width of the gaming area. It is arranged on the left and right outer sides of the area and is movable between the invisible area that is invisible from the player side, and from the left or right invisible area to the horizontal center in the visible area. And can be moved independently to the other side,
The production control means includes
At least according to the lottery result for starting the lottery result special effect, the display of the lottery result effect image is started in a state where all the movable bodies are arranged in the invisible area, and the lottery result special effect is displayed. When the combination of the symbols in the plurality of symbol rows that are stopped and displayed except for the one symbol row at the start becomes a combination that can satisfy the combination of the symbols in which the advantageous gaming state occurs, the left and right invisible regions are The movable bodies are moved so as to approach each other into the visual recognition area, and the two movable bodies in the visual recognition area are moved into the left and right invisible areas at the end of the lottery result special effect, respectively. It is characterized by the

  According to the configuration of the means 8, the movable body can be visually recognized from the player side within a range substantially corresponding to the front surface of the effect display means and smaller than the width of the game panel in the horizontal direction and larger than half of the width of the game area. It is possible to move between a viewable area and a non-viewable area that is arranged on the left and right outer sides of the viewable area and cannot be seen from the player side. A state in which all the movable bodies are arranged in the invisible area according to the lottery result starting at least the lottery result special production by the production control means after being independently movable to the opposite side beyond the center in the direction The combination of symbols in which a combination of symbols in a plurality of symbol sequences that are stopped and displayed except for one symbol sequence occurs in an advantageous gaming state after starting the display of the lottery result effect image at When the combination is satisfiable, the movable bodies are moved from the left and right invisible areas so as to approach each other into the visible area, and at the end of the lottery result special effect, the two movable bodies in the visible area are moved. Each is moved to the left and right invisible regions.

  Thereby, the movable body is substantially corresponding to the front surface of the effect display means and is visible between the visible area from the player side and the left and right sides of the visible area between the visible area and the invisible area from the player side. Since the lottery result effect image is displayed on the effect display means, the entire effect display means can be obtained by moving all the movable bodies into the invisible area. Can be used to display a lottery result effect image, display each symbol or the like as large as possible for easy viewing, and enjoy a lottery result effect image on a large screen.

  In addition, when the lottery result special effect is started, the two movable bodies are moved from the invisible area to the visible area so that the lottery result special effect is performed. Can greatly change the atmosphere in the game area, attract the player's interest strongly, increase the expectation for the special effect of the lottery results, and suppress the player's interest in the game to decline be able to.

  Furthermore, when the lottery result special effect is finished, all the movable bodies are moved into the invisible area, so after the lottery result special effect is finished, the lottery result effect image is displayed as a stop indicating the lottery result. The combination of symbols can be shown to the player on the large screen as much as possible, and the player can be surely recognized the lottery result.

Means 9: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 8,
"The window frame of the movable body is visible from the player side through the frame, and the predetermined effect image displayed on the effect display means is composed of a plurality of layers,
Arranging the rear effect image controlled by the rear effect image control means in the rear layer and the front effect image controlled by the front effect image control means in the front layer, respectively. It further comprises image synthesizing means capable of synthesizing a predetermined effect image displayed on the display means ".

  By the way, as a configuration for projecting and displaying the previous effect image on the window frame of the movable body, for example, when a predetermined display device is fitted in the window frame, power is supplied to the display device of the movable body or the image is displayed. However, because the movable body is movable in the left-right direction, it is necessary to route the wiring so as not to obstruct the movement of the movable body. The space of the movable body is relatively small and the impact of the movable body is reduced, and the wiring is frequently flexible, causing disconnection and poor contact, resulting in a decrease in durability of the gaming machine There is a problem.

  In addition, when a projection device is arranged at a predetermined position so that a pre-production image is projected on the window frame of the movable body, a large pre-production image is projected by enlarging the window frame of the movable body. Since a certain distance is required between the movable body and the window frame, the depth of the gaming machine is necessary, and there is a possibility that the size cannot be set in an existing island facility such as a gaming hall. In addition, if the position of the projection device is fixed, the projection angle changes depending on the movement position of the movable body due to the movement of the movable body, and the pre-production image projected on the window frame is distorted depending on the position of the movable body. There is. On the other hand, when the projection apparatus can be moved together with the movable body, a mechanism for moving the projection apparatus is further required, and the space for the movable body and other accessories is relatively compressed and reduced. There is a problem that becomes.

  According to the configuration of the means 9, the movable body can be visually recognized from the player side through the inside of the window frame, and a predetermined effect image displayed on the effect display means is composed of a plurality of layers. The rear effect image controlled by the rear effect image control means is arranged on the rear layer, and the front effect image controlled by the front effect image control means is arranged on the front layer, so that it is displayed on the effect display means. Image synthesizing means capable of synthesizing a predetermined effect image is provided.

  Thereby, since the effect image displayed on the effect display means is synthesized by arranging the effect image on the front layer of the effect image by the image synthesizing means, the effect image is displayed behind the effect image. The rear effect image appears to be arranged, and the outer periphery of the front effect image is partitioned by the window frame of the movable body, so that the illusion is as if the previous effect image is displayed in the window frame. Thus, a gaming machine capable of reliably achieving the above-described operational effects with a simple configuration can be realized.

  The illusion that the previous effect image displayed on the effect display means is displayed as if the previous effect image is displayed on the window frame of the movable body without the movable body having a display device or a separate projection device. The structure of the movable body can be simplified and moved easily, and the space for arranging the movable body can be secured sufficiently. It can be a high gaming machine. In addition, since a display device or a projection device for projecting and displaying the previous effect image on the window frame of the movable body is not required, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost associated with the gaming machine.

Means 10: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 9,
“The game panel further includes a guide member that is substantially the same length as the lateral width of the game panel and that is disposed on the rear side of the game panel and can guide at least one movable body in the lateral direction.” It is characterized by being.

  Here, as the “guide member”, any member can be used as long as it can guide the movable body in the left-right direction. “Cylindrical member having a substantially circular cross-sectional outline”, “bar-shaped member having a polygonal cross-sectional outline” ", A long member having a predetermined cross-sectional outer shape", a "member having a groove extending in the left-right direction in which a predetermined roller supported by a movable body can be inserted", and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 10, the guide member has a length substantially the same as the width in the left-right direction of the game panel and is disposed on the rear side of the game panel and can guide at least one movable body in the left-right direction. Is provided.

  Thereby, the movable body is arranged in the rear side of the game panel and is guided in the left-right direction by the guide member having a length substantially the same as the width of the game panel, so that the movable range of the movable body is made as wide as possible. The movable body that appears and moves from the invisible area can appear in a wider range, and more dynamic movement can be achieved by guiding the movable body in a wide range. The movement of the movable body can be enjoyed by the player and the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing. In addition, the movable body and the game area in which the movable body is arranged can be made conspicuous by the movable body that moves greatly, and at first glance, it gives the player an impression that is different from other gaming machines and attracts the player's interest strongly. It can be a gaming machine.

  In addition, since the guide member is arranged on the rear side of the gaming panel, it is possible to make it difficult to see the guide member from the player side, and it is possible to prevent the appearance of the gaming machine from being deteriorated by seeing the guide member. In addition, the movable body is likely to be arranged on the rear side of the game panel, and the game panel can easily form a visible area or an invisible area of the movable body. A variety of movable effects can be realized.

  Furthermore, since at least one movable body is guided with respect to one guide member, and a plurality of movable bodies can be guided with respect to one guide member, the movable bodies are actually in contact with each other. It becomes a state which became a state, and it can suppress that the entertainment with respect to a game falls by making the movable production by a movable body more enjoyable. In addition, since a larger number of movable bodies than the number of guide members can be guided, it is possible to realize a movable effect that attracts the player's interest more strongly with a large number of movable bodies. It can be suppressed that the interest of the player in the game is reduced. In addition, since a larger number of movable bodies than the number of guide members can be guided, it is possible to suppress an increase in the depth in the front-rear direction of the mechanism related to the guidance of the movable bodies, and the relatively movable bodies It is possible to increase the size of an accessory or the like placed in a game area or the like, and make a movable body or the like stand out, thereby attracting the player's interest strongly.

  Note that a plurality of guide members may be arranged in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the game panel, so that the movable body guided by the guide member can be arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, so that it cannot be visually recognized. By stacking a plurality of movable bodies in the front-rear direction at substantially the same position in the left-right direction in the area, it is possible to increase the number of movable bodies that can be arranged in the invisible area, and the width in the left-right direction of the invisible area Can be suppressed, and the width of the viewable region can be relatively increased, so that the visible range of the movable body can be widened to make the movable body easier to see. It is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating. In addition, since the movable bodies can be arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, one movable body can move to the opposite side across the other movable body in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The movable range becomes wider and more dynamic movement can be made to the movable body, and it is also possible to move the movable bodies to cross and overtake, making it more difficult to get bored by embodying more diverse movable effects It is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the interest in the game from being reduced.

Means 11: In the constitution of means 10,
"The guide member is
A plurality of the panels arranged in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the game panel and each guides at least one movable body in the left-right direction.

  According to the configuration of the means 11, a plurality of guide members are arranged in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the game panel, and at least one movable body is guided in the left-right direction.

  Thereby, since a plurality of movable bodies can be arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, by overlapping the plurality of movable bodies in the front-rear direction at substantially the same position in the left-right direction within the invisible area, Since it is possible to increase the number of movable bodies that can be arranged, it is possible to suppress an increase in the width in the left-right direction of the invisible area, and it is possible to relatively increase the width of the visible area. The viewing range of the movable body is widened so that the movable body can be easily seen, and the movement of the movable body can be enjoyed to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  In addition, since a plurality of movable bodies can be arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, not only the movable bodies are connected to each other, but also one movable body is the other in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Can move to the opposite side of the movable body, the movable range of the movable body is widened and more dynamic movement can be made to the movable body, and the movement of the movable bodies crossing and overtaking It is possible to make it difficult to get bored by embodying more various movable effects, and it is possible to prevent the entertainment for the player from deteriorating and entertaining the game.

Means 12: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 11,
"The movable body is
The width in the left-right direction is a width within a range of 1/2 to 1/10 of the width in the left-right direction of the effect display means ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 12, the width in the left-right direction of the movable body is set to a width in the range of 1/2 to 1/10 with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the effect display means. The reason why the width of the movable body is within the range of 1/2 to 1/10 of the width of the effect display means (viewable area) is that the width of the movable body is larger than ½ of the width of the effect display means. If the movable bodies are in contact with each other, the entire front surface of the effect display means is always covered by the two movable bodies, and the effect display means cannot be seen. Because. Therefore, in a case where the movable body can be moved outward in the left-right direction from the effect display means, in order to make the entire effect display means visible to the player, the effect display means is determined from the width of the movable body. If it is larger than ½ of the width, the width of the effect display means is probably ½ or less of the width of the game area or the game panel, the effect display means becomes small, and the effect image is sufficient. This is because there is a possibility that it will not be entertained. On the other hand, if the width of the movable body is smaller than 1/10 of the width of the effect display means (viewable area), the movable body is relatively small with respect to the size of the effect display means, and the movable body becomes difficult to stand out. Because.

  This allows the player to clearly see the entire movable body in front of the effect display means, so that it is easy to see the previous effect image (symbol) projected and displayed on the movable body and the window frame, It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the movable body entertain. Moreover, since the size of the movable body can be set to an appropriate size with respect to the size of the effect display means (viewable area), various movable effects by the above-described movable body can be realized with certainty. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered by making the movable performance difficult to get bored.

Means 13: In the gaming machine,
“A game area where game media is driven by the player's operation,
A starting port arranged to be placed at a predetermined position in the game area and capable of receiving a game medium that has been driven in;
The starting port is a receiving port that is arranged at a different position in the gaming area and is capable of receiving a game medium that has been driven in;
A payout unit for paying out a predetermined number of game media in response to the reception of game media at the receiving port and the start port;
Lottery means for drawing a predetermined lottery result in response to the reception of the game medium at the start port;
Advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state advantageous to a player in accordance with the lottery result of the lottery means;
A plate-like game panel that supports at least the start port and the receiving port at a predetermined position in the game area, and can partition a rear end of the game area;
An effect display means that is arranged to be visible from the player at a position corresponding to the game area on the rear side of the game panel, and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image composed of a plurality of layers;
Between the effect display means and the game panel, the player side within a range that is substantially corresponding to the front face of the effect display means and is smaller than the width of the game panel in the horizontal direction and larger than half of the width of the game area. Can be moved between a viewable area that is visible from the left side and an invisible area that is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the viewable area and cannot be seen from the player side, and either the left or right side is not visible. It is possible to move independently from the area to the opposite side beyond the center in the left-right direction within the viewable area, and a predetermined effect image can be projected and displayed, and the rear side can be seen from the player side through the frame A plurality of movable bodies having a window frame and a width within a range of 1/2 to 1/10 with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the effect display means;
Each of the movable bodies can be guided in the left-right direction, and a plurality of guide members arranged in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the game panel at substantially the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the game panel;
Movable effect control means for independently controlling movement of the plurality of movable bodies guided by the guide member in the left-right direction according to the lottery result of the lottery means;
A previous effect image control means capable of controlling a previous effect image as an effect image projected and displayed on the window frame of the movable body, the movement of which is controlled by the movable effect control means, according to the lottery result of the lottery means; ,
It seems that it is arranged behind the previous effect image controlled by the previous effect image control means, and according to the lottery result of the lottery means, three lines arranged in the left-right direction consisting of a predetermined number of symbols. After the two symbol sequences are variably displayed, the variation display of the symbol sequences is sequentially stopped so that the symbol sequence at the center in the left-right direction is stopped and displayed last, and the combination of the symbols in the symbol sequence that has been stopped is displayed. Including a lottery result effect image that suggests the lottery result, and a post-effect image control means capable of controlling the post-effect image displayed on the effect control means;
By arranging the rear effect image controlled by the rear effect image control means on the rear layer and the front effect image controlled by the front effect image control means on the front layer, respectively. Image synthesizing means capable of synthesizing a predetermined effect image displayed on the display means;
The central symbol in the lottery result effect image displayed as the rear effect image by controlling at least the image composition means, the subsequent effect image control means, the front effect image control means, and the movable effect control means. All the movable bodies according to the lottery of the lottery result in which the combination of the symbols in the plurality of symbol columns to be stopped and displayed except for the columns becomes a combination that can satisfy the combination of symbols in which an advantageous gaming state occurs Display of the lottery result effect image is started in a state in which it is placed in the invisible region, and a combination of the symbols in the plurality of symbol rows that are stopped and displayed except for the central symbol row generates an advantageous gaming state When the combination of symbols can be satisfied, the movable bodies are moved so as to approach each other from the left and right invisible areas to the visible area, and the two movable When the symbols of the left and right symbol rows that are displayed in a stopped state are covered, the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the window frames of the two movable bodies are projected and displayed as the front effect image, and the stop display in the rear effect image is displayed. The left and right symbols are erased, and then stopped and displayed on the window frame so as to sandwich the symbols in the central symbol row that is variably displayed on the effect display means from the left and right sides in front view. The two movable bodies projecting and displaying the symbols are repeatedly moved close to and away from each other, and the central symbols are displayed so as to be elastically deformed according to the movement of the movable bodies. After contacting the central design with the two movable bodies, the design is changed to the design as it is, or the design is changed to a different design. Separated from each other When the rear central symbol is made visible to the player, the central symbol row is variably displayed by temporarily displaying the symbol larger than usual once, and the central symbol row is stopped. When displayed, the two movable bodies in the viewable area are moved to the left and right invisible areas, respectively, and at the same time, the lottery result special effect for displaying the left and right symbols that are stopped and displayed in the rear effect image is displayed. At least controllable effect control means ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 13, the game area into which the game medium is driven by the player's operation in the gaming machine, the start port in which the game medium placed at a predetermined position in the game area can be received, and the start A mouth that is placed at a different position in the game area and is capable of receiving a game medium that has been struck, and a payout that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to the acceptance of the game medium at the entrance and the start opening A unit, lottery means for lottery of a predetermined lottery result in response to acceptance of a game medium at the start port, and advantageous game state generation means for generating an advantageous game state advantageous to the player in accordance with the lottery result of the lottery means; , At least the starting port and the receiving port are supported at predetermined positions in the game area, and the player can be placed at a position corresponding to the game area on the rear side of the game panel, and a rear panel of the game area. Visible from Between the effect display means and the game panel, and substantially corresponding to the front of the effect display means between the left and right direction of the game panel. A viewable area that is visible from the player side within a range that is smaller than the width of the game area and greater than half of the width of the game area, and an invisible area that is disposed on the left and right outside of the viewable area and is not visible from the player side Between the left and right invisible areas and the center in the left and right direction within the viewable area, and independently move to the opposite side, and project a predetermined effect image. It has a window frame that can be viewed from the player side through the frame, and has a width within a range of 1/2 to 1/10 of the width in the horizontal direction of the effect display means. Multiple movable bodies and movable bodies Each can be guided in the left-right direction at least one, and has a plurality of guide members arranged in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the game panel with the same length as the width of the game panel in the left-right direction, and guided by the guide members. A plurality of movable bodies are projected and displayed on the window frame of the movable body that is controlled to move by the movable performance control means and the movable performance control means that independently controls the movement in the left-right direction according to the lottery result of the lottery means. The previous effect image as the effect image is arranged behind the previous effect image control means that can be controlled according to the lottery result of the lottery means and the previous effect image controlled by the previous effect image control means. Appears and, according to the lottery result of the lottery means, after the three symbol rows arranged in the left-right direction consisting of a predetermined number of symbols are variably displayed, the central symbol row at the center in the left-right direction is stopped and displayed sequentially. Design A post-effect image control means that includes a lottery result effect image that suggests a lottery result based on a combination of symbols in the stopped and displayed symbol sequence, and that can control a post-effect image displayed on the effect control means. And the rear effect image controlled by the rear effect image control unit are arranged on the rear layer, and the front effect image controlled by the front effect image control unit is arranged on the front layer, respectively, so that it is displayed on the effect display unit. A lottery displayed as a post-effect image by at least controlling an image composition means capable of synthesizing a predetermined effect image, an image composition means, a post-effect image control means, a front effect image control means, and a movable effect control means. A lottery result in which a combination of symbols in a plurality of symbol sequences that are stopped and displayed excluding the central symbol row in the result effect image is a combination that can satisfy a combination of symbols that generate an advantageous gaming state In accordance with the lottery, display of the lottery result effect image is started in a state where all the movable bodies are arranged in the invisible region, and a combination of symbols in a plurality of symbol sequences that are stopped and displayed except for the central symbol sequence is advantageous. When the combination of symbols in which the game state occurs can be satisfied, the left and right symbols on which the two movable bodies are stopped and displayed by moving the movable bodies from the left and right invisible areas to the visible areas respectively. When the symbols in the row are covered, the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the window frames of the two movable bodies are projected and displayed as a front effect image, and the left and right symbols that are stopped and displayed in the rear effect image are erased, and then the effect display The two movable bodies that project and display the symbols stopped and displayed on the window frame so as to sandwich the symbols in the central symbol row that is variably displayed on the means from both the left and right sides when viewed from the front, In addition, while the central symbol is displayed so as to be elastically deformed in accordance with the movement of the movable body, the two movable bodies are brought into contact with each other and the central symbol is covered with the two movable bodies, and then the symbol is left as it is. Alternatively, if the symbol is changed to a different symbol and the two movable bodies that are in contact with each other are separated from each other so that the central symbol on the rear side can be visually recognized by the player, the symbol is temporarily displayed larger than usual. In this way, the central symbol row is variably displayed, and when the central symbol row is stopped, the two movable bodies in the viewable area are moved to the left and right invisible areas, and at the same time, the stop effect is displayed in the rear effect image. In addition, a lottery result special effect for displaying left and right symbols is provided at least with an effect control means capable of controlling the effect.

  As a result, when the game medium that has been driven into the game area by the player operating the driving operation unit is received in the receiving port or the starting port, a predetermined number of game media are paid out from the payout unit. In addition, when the game medium is received at the start port, in addition to the game medium being paid out by the payout unit, a predetermined lottery result is drawn by the lottery means. After the three symbol sequences arranged in the direction start to change display, the central symbol sequence is stopped and displayed sequentially so that the last symbol sequence is stopped. A lottery result effect image is displayed. Then, if the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed satisfies a predetermined combination, an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) that is advantageous to the player occurs, and more game media are provided to the player. Can give an opportunity to be paid out, and can increase the interest of the game. For the combination of symbols in which the advantageous gaming state occurs, the combination of the symbols in the left and right symbol rows that are stopped and displayed in the lottery result effect image except for the last (center) symbol row is the symbol in which the advantageous gaming state occurs. When the combination is satisfied (so-called “reach” state), the movable body approaches each other from the left and right invisible areas to the front of the effect display means that is the visible area. When the movement starts and covers the front of the symbols on which the movable body is stopped, the symbols that are stopped and displayed as the front effect image are projected and displayed on the window frame of the movable body, and stopped as the rear rear effect image. The displayed symbol is once erased. The two movable bodies displaying the symbols displayed in a stopped state are repeatedly moved closer to and away from each other so as to sandwich the symbols in the central symbol row displayed in a variable manner. The symbols sandwiched in accordance with the movement of the movable body are displayed so as to be elastically deformed, and the two movable bodies eventually come into contact with each other. It will be hidden. In that state, the symbol that is displayed in the fluctuation state is either unchanged or changed to a different symbol, and the two moving objects that are in contact with each other move away from each other. At the same time, the symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is temporarily enlarged and the central symbol is displayed in a variable manner. When such a movement is repeated at least once and the symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed, the two movable bodies in the visible region move into the invisible region, and the three symbols arranged in the left-right direction The lottery result will be suggested. In this way, since the symbol that has been stopped and displayed as the previous effect image is displayed on the window frame of the movable body, the appearance of the three-dimensional movable body can be greatly changed by changing the previous effect image (design). It is possible to increase the number of types of collaboration effects by combining the movable object and the subsequent effect image displayed on the effect display means, and to realize the collaboration effect of more various movable objects and effect images, making it difficult to get bored. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In addition, when the two movable bodies come into contact with each other again and become able to visually recognize the rear symbols, the player is excited whether or not a desired symbol in which an advantageous gaming state occurs appears. Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Also, compared to the “reach” effect (a special effect for the lottery result) produced only by the effect image of the effect display means as in the past, the two movable bodies displaying the predetermined previous effect image on the window frame are displayed in a variable manner to the end. Since the center symbol row is repeatedly held and concealed with two movable bodies, the player can create an unprecedented and fresh “reach” production. It can be shown, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the player's interest in the game, and to increase the appeal to the player by collaborating with the movable body and the production image, etc. This gaming machine can be easily selected as a gaming machine that is greatly differentiated from other gaming machines.

  Furthermore, the combination of symbols in the symbol sequence that is stopped and displayed in the lottery result effect image except for the last symbol sequence becomes a combination that can satisfy the combination of symbols in which an advantageous gaming state occurs, that is, in the lottery result effect image. In accordance with the lottery result in which the symbols in the two symbol sequences are in the “reach” state among the three symbol sequences that have been variably displayed, the two movable bodies displaying the previous effect images change the variation symbols by holding them. A lottery result special effect is implemented, and even if it reaches “Leach”, the lottery result special effect may not be implemented, so the premium feeling for the lottery result special effect can be increased, and the lottery result special effect By being implemented, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Also, in the lottery result effect image, if the two movable bodies start to approach each other with a fluctuating pattern after becoming the “reach” state, some players recognize that the lottery result special effect has started. Therefore, it is possible to focus attention on the movement of the movable body after “reach”, and to increase the expectation for the special effect of the lottery result, thereby suppressing the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Furthermore, the symbols stopped and displayed on the window frames of the two movable bodies are projected and displayed, that is, the “reach” symbol is displayed on the movable body, and the “reach” symbol is displayed to the player. This makes it possible to always recognize which symbol should be displayed when the variable symbol sandwiched between the two movable objects is stopped. Depending on whether or not the symbol is a desired symbol, the player can be thrilled and excited to increase the expectation, and the player can be prevented from being entertained and the interest in the game being reduced.

  In addition, in the special results for the lottery results, the central design sandwiched with the movement of the two movable bodies is elastically deformed like a rubber bowl, so the movable body and the design are in different positions in the front-rear direction. Despite being placed, when viewed from the player side, it is possible to create an illusion as if the design is deformed by being sandwiched between two movable bodies, enhancing the realism and making the player more It is possible to embody a collaborative effect between the movement of the movable body and the effect image (symbol) that can appeal to the sensibility of the player, and to prevent the player from having fun and reducing the interest in the game.

  In addition, after the central symbol in the variable display is covered with two movable bodies, when the two movable bodies are separated from each other and the symbol in the variable display appears, the symbol is temporarily displayed larger than usual. Therefore, the player can be given the illusion that the symbol has jumped out from between the two movable bodies, which can surprise the player and increase the impact on the symbol display. It is possible to prevent the interest in games from being reduced.

  Furthermore, when the two movable bodies that are close to each other so as to sandwich the central symbol in the variable display cover the front surfaces of the left and right symbol rows that are stopped and displayed, the stopped and displayed symbols are displayed as the front effect images in the respective windows. Since the stop-displayed design displayed as the post-production image is erased after being projected on the frame, the design of the post-production image displayed as a stop is displayed to the player as a window frame of the movable body. It is possible to change the player's interest from the post-production image to the previous production image (movable body), and to entertain the movement of the movable body by paying attention to the movable body. be able to. Also, when the stopped display is projected and displayed on the window frame of the movable body, the design of the effect image is erased after the stop display, so that after that, the design that is in the variable display is sandwiched. Even if the movable body repeats the approach and separation, the symbols that are stopped and displayed after the movable body are not visible, and the symbols that are stopped and displayed to the player have surely transferred to the movable body. Can be recognized, and it is possible to prevent the eyes from flickering due to the symbols visible and hidden behind the movable movable body and to feel uncomfortable, and to suppress the decrease in interest in games. it can.

  Further, the movable body substantially corresponds to the front surface of the effect display means and can be viewed from the player side, and the left-right direction between the left and right sides of the viewable area and the invisible area from the player side. Therefore, when displaying the lottery result effect image on the effect display means, the entire effect display means is made to be in a state where all the movable bodies are moved into the invisible region. It is possible to display a lottery result effect image by using it, display each symbol and the like as large as possible for easy viewing, and entertain the lottery result effect image on a large screen. In addition, when the lottery result special effect is started, the two movable bodies are moved from the invisible area to the visible area so that the lottery result special effect is performed. Can greatly change the atmosphere in the game area, attract the player's interest strongly, increase the expectation for the special effect of the lottery results, and suppress the player's interest in the game to decline be able to.

  In addition, since the front effect image including the stopped pattern is projected and displayed on the window frame of the movable body that moves in the left-right direction on the front side of the effect display means, the appearance of the movable body is displayed by the previous effect image. It can be changed in various ways, making it more difficult to get tired of the variety of lottery result special effects and lottery result suggestive effects, etc., and making the movable body in the visible area more conspicuous, It can be a gaming machine that attracts the interest of the person.

  Furthermore, an effect display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image on the rear side of the movable body is provided, and in a manner similar to the conventional gaming machine, after a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed, the display is stopped. Since the lottery result effect image that suggests the lottery result to the player is displayed by the combination of symbols, it is possible to prevent the player who is used to the conventional gaming machine from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, since various images can be displayed on the effect display means in accordance with the movement of the movable body, the types of collaboration effects between the movable body and the effect images can be increased, making it difficult to get tired of the collaboration effects. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest in the game from being reduced. Further, the window frame of the movable body is configured so that the rear side can be visually recognized, and an image corresponding to the window frame of the movable body (front effect image) is displayed on the effect display means, as if the image is displayed on the window frame. It is possible to make an illusion as if the image is projected and displayed, and even if the window frame of the movable body is not equipped with a display device or the like, it is possible to easily display the previous effect image on the window frame and An increase in cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, movable bodies that can move independently in the left-right direction may be arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, so that any movable body can be sufficiently moved within the movable range in the left-right direction. It is possible to cross movable bodies, overtake and overtake, and increase the variation of movable production by multiple movable bodies, making it difficult to get bored by various productions and interest in games It can suppress that it falls.

  Furthermore, since the effect image displayed on the effect display means is synthesized by arranging the effect image on the layer on the front side of the effect image image by the image composition means, the image is displayed behind the effect image means. The effect image appears to be arranged, and the outer periphery of the previous effect image is partitioned by the window frame of the movable body, so that the illusion is as if the previous effect image (symbol) is displayed in the window frame. It is possible to implement a gaming machine that can reliably achieve the above-described effects with a simple configuration. Further, the previous effect image displayed on the effect display means displays the previous effect image (symbol) on the window frame of the movable body even if the movable body is not provided with a display device or a separate projection device. The structure of the movable body can be simplified so that it can be moved easily, and a sufficient space for arranging the movable body can be secured, and the movable body can be made as large as possible. It can be a gaming machine with higher impact. Further, since a display device or a projection device for projecting and displaying the previous effect image (symbol) on the window frame of the movable body is not required, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost related to the gaming machine.

  In addition, the movable body is arranged in the rear side of the game panel and is guided in the left-right direction by a guide member having a length substantially the same as the width of the game panel, so that the movable range of the movable body is made as wide as possible. It is possible to push the movable body pushed out from the invisible region to a wider range, and it is possible to make the movable body move more dynamically by guiding it in a wide range, It is possible to make the player enjoy the movement of the movable body and to suppress the interest in the game from being lowered. In addition, the movable body and the game area in which the movable body is arranged can be made conspicuous by the movable body that moves greatly, and at first glance, it gives the player an impression that is different from other gaming machines and attracts the player's interest strongly. It can be a gaming machine.

  In addition, since the guide member is arranged on the rear side of the gaming panel, it is possible to make it difficult to see the guide member from the player side, and it is possible to prevent the appearance of the gaming machine from being deteriorated by seeing the guide member. In addition, the movable body is likely to be arranged on the rear side of the game panel, and the game panel can easily form a visible area or an invisible area of the movable body. A variety of movable effects can be realized.

  Furthermore, since at least one movable body is guided with respect to one guide member, and a plurality of movable bodies can be guided with respect to one guide member, the movable bodies are actually in contact with each other. It becomes a state which became a state, and it can suppress that the entertainment with respect to a game falls by making the movable production by a movable body more enjoyable. In addition, since a larger number of movable bodies than the number of guide members can be guided, it is possible to realize a movable effect that attracts the player's interest more strongly with a large number of movable bodies. It can be suppressed that the interest of the player in the game is reduced. In addition, since a larger number of movable bodies than the number of guide members can be guided, it is possible to suppress an increase in the depth in the front-rear direction of the mechanism related to the guidance of the movable bodies, and the relatively movable bodies It is possible to increase the size of an accessory or the like placed in a game area or the like, and make a movable body or the like stand out, thereby attracting the player's interest strongly.

  Further, the width of the movable body in the left-right direction is set to a width within a range of 1/2 to 1/10 with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the effect display means (viewable area), thereby making the movable body an optimal size. In addition, since the entire movable body can be clearly seen by the player in front of the effect display means, it is possible to make it easier to see the pattern (pre-effect image) projected and displayed on the movable body and the window frame. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the movable body entertain. Moreover, since the size of the movable body can be set to an appropriate size with respect to the size of the effect display means (viewable area), various movable effects by the above-described movable body can be realized with certainty. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered by making the movable performance difficult to get bored.

Means 14: In any one gaming machine from means 1 to means 13,
It is a pachinko machine.
Here, the pachinko machine is a gaming machine in which an input medium that is a medium that a player inputs into the gaming machine and a game medium that is a medium used for a substantial game performed by the player are the same. This is a type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball inserted. Specifically, “a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a number of obstacle nails, accessories, display means, etc. , A game area provided with appropriate entrances for game balls such as passing holes and arrival holes, a rail for guiding the game balls from the launcher to the game area, and entrance of the game balls guided to the game area It has a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entrance to the ball entrance or according to the entrance mode of the game balls to the plurality of entrances.

  In addition, there are various types of pachinko machines, which are generally represented by what is referred to as a “digipachi machine”, “entrance state detection means for detecting the entrance state to the entrance (game state detection And a special lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the incoming ball is detected by the incoming ball state detecting means, and a special symbol for varying the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the fluctuation. "With a symbol display means" or "Additionally, during special symbol fluctuations, a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is displayed in a variable manner, and the symbols are stopped in the symbol string, and characters, various articles, etc. Further comprising an effect display means for displaying an appropriate display by drawing the display object and operating the display object, etc. " Game ball distribution Therefore, one game is played with a predetermined number of game balls, such as 16 that are equipped with lottery means for performing a lottery, and generally called “aletachi machines”. For example, “a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to the manner in which the game balls enter the ball port”.

  According to the structure of the means 14, in the pachinko machine, the effect of any of the means described above can be achieved.

Means 15: In any one gaming machine from means 1 to means 13,
It is a pachislot machine.
Here, the pachislot machine inserts a medal as an insertion medium, and rotates a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols drawn thereon by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) after the medal is inserted. Then, the player can perform a game such that the symbol sequence constituted by each reel is variably displayed, and thereafter the variation display of each symbol sequence is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, stop button). Is to be done. In other words, it can be understood as a slot machine with a stop operation function. If the stop operating means is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the variable display of each symbol row is stopped, the displayed single symbol is a specific symbol, the combination of symbols displayed in each symbol row is a specific combination, etc. When the condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the satisfied condition, or a special advantageous state advantageous to the player who can acquire a large amount of medals is generated.

  According to the structure of the means 15, in the pachislot machine, the effect of any of the means described above can be achieved.

Means 16: In any one gaming machine from means 1 to means 13,
It is characterized by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.
Here, “a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused” means that a plurality of (for example, five) game balls are used as one unit of input medium, and after the input medium is input, the starting operation means A symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed in response to an operation of the operation lever (for example, an operation lever), and thereafter, the variation of the symbol string is stopped in response to an operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the variable display of each symbol row is stopped, the displayed single symbol is a specific symbol, the combination of symbols displayed in each symbol row is a specific combination, etc. When the condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the satisfied condition, or a special advantageous state advantageous to the player who can acquire a large amount of medals is generated.

  According to the configuration of the means 16, in the gaming machine obtained by fusing the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine, the operational effect of any of the means described above can be achieved.

  As described above, according to the present invention, a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of a player by making it difficult to get tired by embodying a collaboration effect between a variety of movable bodies and effect images is provided. be able to.

[Overall structure of pachinko machines]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1, FIG. 4 is a side view of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 5 is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 6 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the door frame 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the door frame 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1.

  1 to 8, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can be mounted with an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown), and pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A main body frame 3, a game window 101 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 and is formed on the game board 4 so that a ball can be driven, and a game window 101 that allows a player to visually recognize the game area 101. And a door frame 5 provided with a tray unit 300 as a storage tray for storing balls that are arranged and are paid out according to the result of the game.

  A lower front plate 14 whose surface is covered with a decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side. Further, as described above, the game board 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and the ball hitting device 650 and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 are provided at the lower back side thereof. A board unit 1100 on which various control boards and power boards for controlling electrical components are collectively provided is attached, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580 (see FIG. 7) of the main body frame 3 is detachable. Is provided. Furthermore, in addition to the above-described dish unit 300, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 250 and a handle device 460 so as to close the gaming window 101. The feature of the present embodiment is that there is one dish unit 300 provided on the door frame 5, and the handle device 460 conventionally provided on the main body frame 3 is provided on the door frame 5, and the door Since the frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 is not visible from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

[Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 9 to 13. 9 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front of the outer frame 2, FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 13 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 11A, a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 13A, and a sectional view taken along line DD. , E-E sectional view (D).

  9 and 10, the outer frame 2 according to the present embodiment is a connection for connecting the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 at their respective ends. It is assembled in a square shape by connecting with the member 19. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape with a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center part is an engagement notch formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The side frame plates 12, 13 are fitted to the side surfaces of the left and right portions which are fitted to the portion 20, and the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the planes of the left and right portions lowered one step. The inner surface of the is in contact.

  The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the present embodiment correspond to the horizontal frame of the present invention, and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 of the present example correspond to the vertical frame of the present invention. Yes.

  In that state, the insertion hole 21 and the left and right sides of the connecting member 19 are lowered by one step on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the lower frame plate 11. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting holes 22 (shown on the connecting member 19 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 in FIG. Are also fixed by a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting screws 23 from above or below, and further, a plurality ( Two (in the illustrated case) mounting holes 24 and a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 that are lowered by one step are aligned to form a plurality (from the lateral outer side). The upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 10 are fixed by fastening with three connecting screws 26 and 27 in the case of illustration. A lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is firmly coupled and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 26 and 27, one connecting screw 27 does not connect the side frame plates 12 and 13 and the connecting member 19 but connects the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The member 19 is directly connected from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is made of an extruded plate of a lightweight metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island lined up in a game hall, a predetermined angle is given to the vertical plane of the island. Although it is necessary to perform a fixing operation, such an operation is performed by hitting the nail to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that it is easy to hit the nail. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 23) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the main body frame 3 can be widened. This is because the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and as a result, the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed larger.

  If the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy flat plate, sufficient rigidity cannot be ensured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13C, the side frame plate 12 (the side frame plate 13 has the same structure). .) Is formed by drawing so that the thickness h1 of the rear portion is increased by forming a space portion 28 (the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 12) opened rearward by a rib. Yes. Of course, the wall thickness h1 is the same as or slightly smaller than the wall thickness of the conventional wood.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 13B and 13D, in the front of the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 12, a groove portion 29 (on the side where one portion of the left and right portions lowered by one step of the connecting member 19 is fitted. 9 is formed in the groove 29 of the frame plate 13. From the groove 29 to the front end of the side frame plate 12, as shown in FIGS. 13B to 13D, a flat plate shape with which the other side of the left and right portions whose inner side surfaces are lowered by one step is brought into contact. However, a shallow concave portion for reducing material is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove 29 is formed, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 13B, the recessed portion 30 (side) into which the hanging piece 53 of the upper support metal fitting 45 is inserted. A recess 30 of the frame plate 13 is formed in FIG.

  In addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side formed as described above is provided with a hanging piece 53 of the upper support fitting 45 on the outer side of the side frame plate 12. A mounting hole 31 for fixing with a fixing screw 32 is formed in the lower portion of the mounting hole 31, and a fixing screw 34 is formed at the lower portion thereof so as to coincide with the mounting hole 69 formed in the vertical contact piece 72 of the lower support fitting 66. A mounting hole 33 for fastening is formed. Also, a mounting hole 35 for fixing the side frame plate 12 and the lower front plate 14 with a fixing screw 36 is formed in the lower part of the mounting hole 33 and in the front portion of the side frame plate 12.

  On the other hand, in addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the open side frame part 13 is provided with an attachment hole 37 for attaching a closing projection 38 with an attachment screw 39 at the upper part thereof, and closing at the lower part thereof. A mounting hole 40 for mounting the projection 41 with the mounting screw 42 is formed, and a mounting hole 43 for fixing the side frame plate 13 and the lower front plate 14 with the fixing screw 44 is further provided at the lowermost position. Is formed.

  The closing projections 38 and 41 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 67) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ), And as will be described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and turning it to one side, the hook portions 1054, 1065 and the closing projections 38, 41 are engaged with each other. The main frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by being uncoupled.

  The lower front plate 14 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 has the main body frame 3 placed on the upper surface thereof when closed. The front and side surfaces of the decorative cover plate 15 are covered with a decorative cover plate 15, and a fixing protrusion 16 (see FIG. 12) is formed on the rear surface of the decorative cover plate 15. The attachment protrusion 16 is attached to the lower front plate 14 by being passed through a fastening hole 17 that passes through the lower front plate 14. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer frame 2 on the open side of the decorative cover plate 15.

  By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, the main frame 3 is attached along the upper surface of one side of the upper support bracket 45 and the lower front plate 14 that also serve to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12. A lower support fitting 66 is provided. The upper support fitting 45 is formed with a support hole 47 formed by bending the support protrusion piece 46 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion piece 46 toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin 504 (see FIG. 25) of an upper shaft support fitting 503 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the flange 47.

  Further, the lower support fitting 66 is also formed to protrude forward, and a support protrusion 68 protrudes upward from the protruding portion, and a frame support plate 506 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is provided on the support protrusion 68. The support hole formed in FIG. 26 is inserted. Accordingly, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main body frame 3 are engaged with the support protrusions 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66, By pivoting the pivot pin 504 of the upper pivot bracket 503 in the support hole 47, it can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  The upper support bracket 45 is attached to a mounting step portion 49 formed in a concave shape on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the shaft support side. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 48 and a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 50 formed in the mounting step portion 49 are aligned so that the mounting screws 51 are inserted from above, and the upper frame The upper support fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by being fastened to the holding plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

  Further, there is a hanging piece 53 that contacts the outside of the side frame plate 12 on the outer side of the upper support fitting 45, and a mounting hole is also formed in the hanging piece 53, and this mounting hole and the mounting hole are provided. 31 is fixed with fixing screws 32 to fix the upper support bracket 45 and the side frame plate 12 and to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 via the upper support bracket 45. Yes.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 66 is fixed by the fixing screw 34 in a state where the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical contact piece 72 coincide with each other as described above. By inserting a mounting screw 71 into a mounting hole 70 drilled in the middle of the horizontal surface of the metal fitting 66, it is fixed to the upper surface of the lower front plate 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

  In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the connecting member 19 is connected to the side frame by connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13, which are constituent members, with the connecting member 19. Since the connection member 19 is fastened in close contact with the inner surfaces of the plates 12 and 13 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the mounting strength is high and the rectangular shape is strong. It can be a framework. In addition to the engagement state of the connection member 19 with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the left and right sides of the connection member 19 that are lowered by one step in the groove portion 29 when the connection member 19 is attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since one part of the structure is fitted, the attachment of the connecting member 19 to the side frame plates 12 and 13 is strengthened, which can also improve the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately position it. Can be done.

  Further, when the upper support plate 45 is attached at a predetermined position after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 19, as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on a pachinko island base (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending device. Even when the lower support fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the lower front plate 14 and the upper surface of the lower support fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

(Door frame)
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. 14 is a front view of the door frame 5, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the door frame 5, FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 14, and FIG. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame 5, and FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame 5.

  As shown in FIGS. 14, 15, 18, and 19, the door frame 5 has a vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 formed on the upper part of a door frame main body 100 that is formed in a square shape. A door lens unit 120 is attached around the front surface, a plate unit 300 is provided on the door frame main body 100 on the front surface of the plate-like portion below the game window 101, and a handle is provided on one side (open side) of the plate unit 300. An operation handle portion 461 of the device 460 is fixedly projected. Further, a reinforcing sheet metal 210 is fixed around the gaming window 101 on the back surface of the door frame main body 100, and a glass unit 250 is attached so as to close the gaming window 101, and a plate-like portion below the gaming window 101. A joint unit 480, a mounting base 280, and a frame decoration relay board 290 corresponding to the operation handle portion 461 are attached to the back surface of the frame. A security cover 270 having a security function is also attached to the bottom of the back surface of the glass unit 250. Hereinafter, a more detailed structure of each of the above constituent members constituting the door plate 5 will be described.

<Door frame body>
As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the door frame main body 100 is formed in a frame shape with a synthetic resin, and as described above, the vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 is formed on the upper portion, and the lower side of the gaming window 101 is It is a plate-like part. A circular speaker opening 102 that penetrates a speaker 163, which will be described later, is formed on the upper left and right of the gaming window 101, and a stopper 254 of a glass unit 250, which will be described later, is locked below the speaker opening 102. A stop lever 108 (see FIG. 15) is rotatably provided. Note that the gaming window 101 according to the present embodiment is mounted with the gaming board 4 having larger dimensions in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction than the conventional one, so the vertical dimension and the horizontal dimension of the gaming window 101 are also increased. Yes. For this reason, the shape of the door frame lens unit 120, which will be described later, is greatly different from that generally known in the art.

  On the other hand, in the plate-like portion below the game window 101, a prize ball passage port 103 through which the prize ball communication rod 451 of the dish unit 300 passes is opened at the upper part on the pivot support side. A lid opening 105 for detaching 406 is opened, and a ball feeding opening 104 for mounting the ball feeding unit 287 is opened at a position adjacent to the opening side of the lid opening 105. Further, a lock hole 106 for allowing the cylinder lock 1010 to pass therethrough is opened closer to the open side.

  In addition, a joint unit mounting recess 107 for attaching the joint unit 480 is formed on the back side of the plate-like portion below the ball feed opening 104. An attachment receiving piece (not shown) for engaging the engaging protrusion 255 of the unit 250 is formed, and an attachment elastic piece 273 (to be described later) of the security cover 270 is attached to the side of the engagement receiving piece. An opening 110 is formed. In addition, an engagement protrusion 111 is formed in the center of the front surface of the plate-like portion so as to be inserted into a guide hole 456 (see FIG. 16) of the dish unit 300 described later. Further, the lower side of the door frame main body 100 is a door frame protruding piece 112 protruding rearward, and as will be described later, the door frame protruding piece 112 and engagement grooves 584 and 585 formed in the main body frame 3 Constitutes the outer ridge and the engaging portion at the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

<Door lens unit>
Next, the structure of the door lens unit 120 attached to the upper part on the front side of the door frame main body 100 will be described. The door lens unit 120 includes a reflector having a front surface as a reflection surface, a cold cathode tube and an LED substrate attached to the front and inside of the reflector, a light-transmissive lens cover 150 covering the front of the reflector, and the lens cover 150. And a lens base body 121 serving as a base of the lens cover 150.

  In the lens cover 150, the upper lens cover portion 151 and the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 in the lens base body 121 are formed of a transparent resin. And since the opening dimension of the game window 101 formed in the door frame main body 100 is formed larger than before, as described above, the dimension between the outer periphery of the door frame main body 100 and the inner periphery of the game window 101. In other words, since the dimensions for mounting the lens cover 150 (particularly the dimensions of the left and right sides) are narrow, the lens cover 150 in this embodiment includes the upper lens cover portion 151 and the side lens cover. All of the maximum forward projecting portions of the portions 156 and 157 have a wedge-shaped cross section in which the projecting size projecting forward is larger than the base size (the width size of the portion contacting the door frame body 100). ing. More specifically, the upper lens cover portion 151 and the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 are both formed as a white lens portion with a wedge-shaped front bulging portion formed of a synthetic resin, and the lower end portion of the white lens portion. A red lens portion formed of synthetic resin with different coloring is connected to the inside of the gaming window 101 to be bordered.

  By the way, the upper lens cover portion 151 is formed in a wedge shape in a cross section with a hollow inside and opened at the rear, and is formed in a boomerang shape in a plan view. It is formed so that the distance between the cathode tube and the inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip is reduced. An opaque leading molding member 154 colored in silver is fixed to the outer side of the wedge-shaped front end portion of the upper lens cover portion 151, and the front bulging surface having a wedge-shaped cross section corresponding to almost the entire upper lens cover portion 151 is formed. Illuminated with an upper cold cathode tube. The side lens cover portions 156 and 157 are similar to the upper lens cover portion 151 in that the inside is hollow and the rear is open and formed in a wedge shape in cross section. The distance between the side cold cathode fluorescent tube formed in a straight line and the inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip is smaller than that of the lens cover 151 and is formed in a boomerang shape having a gentle curve as a whole. Is formed to be close.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the reason why the cold cathode tube is used as the illumination means for decorating the periphery of the front surface of the door frame 5 is as follows. When decorating the periphery of the front surface of the door frame 5, there is a restriction that the distance between the light source and the lens cover disposed on the front surface of the light source cannot be made too large. This restriction is because the door frame 5 is always opened and closed, and if the protrusion amount is made too large, there is a possibility that the operation at the time of opening may be hindered. Thus, in a situation where the distance between the light source and the lens cover is not so large, the light decoration visible through the lens cover is continuous when the lamp or LED is scattered as the light source as in the past. The light decoration is not visible, but can only be seen as a spotted pattern with strong and weak parts. On the other hand, when a continuous cold cathode tube is used as a light emitting source as in this embodiment, even if the distance between the cold cathode tube and the lens cover 150 is short, the light decoration visible through the lens cover 150 is A beautiful light decoration in a continuous state is visible. For this reason, since the area surrounding the game board 4 is bordered by a continuous beautiful light decoration, a decoration effect not found in conventional pachinko gaming machines can be achieved. If the distance between the light source and the lens cover can be kept to some extent, light should diffuse and illuminate the entire area of the lens cover with little intensity even if scattered light sources such as LEDs are used. Can do.

  Further, a decorative member attachment region 184 is formed below the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 of the lens cover 150, and the decorative member 185 is attached to the decorative member attachment region 184. The decorative member 185 has a shape similar to the speaker cover 165 described above, and when the lens cover 150 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, the upper left and right and the lower left and right of the lens cover 150 are balanced. To be installed to give The speaker cover 165 and the decorative member 185 described above do not simply cover the front of the speaker 163 or decorate the lower part of the lens cover 150 as described above, but the surroundings are light-decorated with LEDs. It has a structure.

  As described above in detail, the speaker cover 165 and the decorative member 185 according to the present embodiment have four corners in the region surrounding the game window 101 of the door frame 5 apart from the light decoration by the cold cathode tube and the LED substrate described above. Since it is configured so as to be intensively decorated with light, the entire circumference except for the lower side of the gaming window 101 is not casually decorated with light, but can be made with a light decoration with strength and weakness. In particular, the light decoration on the upper left and right sides of the door frame 5 has a tendency that only a speaker is conventionally arranged, and the light decoration around the speaker is not performed. However, by configuring as in the present embodiment, the entire periphery except the lower side of the gaming window 101 can be effectively decorated with light.

<Reinforcing sheet metal>
The door lens unit 120 described above is attached to the front side of the door frame main body 100, and the dish unit 300 is attached below the door lens unit 120. Here, before explaining the structure of the dish unit 300, the reinforcing sheet metal 210, the glass unit 250, the security cover 270, the mounting base 280, the frame decoration relay board 290, and the handle device 460 attached to the back side of the door frame main body 100 will be described. A description will be made sequentially. First, the reinforcing sheet metal 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 18, 19 and 15 to 17.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the reinforcing sheet metal 210 is attached along the upper reinforcement sheet metal 211 attached along the upper side rear surface of the door frame main body 100 and the shaft support side side rear surface of the door frame main body 100. A pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 212, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 213 attached along the open side of the door frame body 100, and a lower reinforcing sheet metal attached along the bottom side of the gaming window 101 of the door frame body 100. 214 are fastened with screws or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 18, an upper shaft support portion 218 having a shaft pin 219 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 212 and a shaft pin 221 ( And a lower shaft support portion 220 having a structure (see FIG. 15). The upper and lower shaft pins 219 and 221 are pivotally supported by an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3 so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the width dimension of the door frame main body 100, and the lower long side edge of the both long side edges is bent rearward. Although it becomes the lower bending protrusion piece 229, and both sides of the upper long side edge are the upper bending protrusion pieces 230 bent backward, The sandwiched portion is a vertical bent protrusion 231 extending in the vertical direction. The amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 229 is not so large, and the lower bent protrusion 229 does not engage with the groove or the recess to form the uneven engagement, but is formed to increase the strength. On the other hand, the amount of protrusion of the upper bent protrusion 230 on both sides is slightly larger than the amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 229, and somewhat prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools from below, but rather the lower reinforcement in the present embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the sheet metal 214 is a vertical bent protrusion 231.

  The vertical bent protrusion 231 is formed in a concave shape so that its upper edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 described later, and when the glass unit 250 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5 Further, the upper end piece of the vertical bent protruding piece 231 is adapted to engage with an engaging groove 261 formed along the outer periphery of substantially the center in the width direction of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 (see FIG. 17). ). The lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 228 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 103 formed in the door frame main body 100.

<Glass unit (transparent plate unit)>
Next, the glass unit 250 as a transparent plate unit attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the glass unit 250 has an annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 251 molded with a synthetic resin having an opening larger than the game window 101, and outer peripheral front and back surfaces of the opening of the unit frame 251. It is constituted by adhering two glass plates 262 (not a glass plate but a transparent synthetic resin plate) as a transparent plate (with a hot melt adhesive). In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in the unit frame 251, the desiccant enclosure space part which encloses a desiccant inside is formed.

<Security cover>
Next, with respect to the crime prevention cover 270 that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 250 and is provided with a crime prevention function that prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4, mainly FIG. 15, FIG. 17, FIG. Will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the security cover 270 is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 250 between the left and right reinforcing sheet metals 212 and 213 with a transparent synthetic resin, and the upper side portion thereof is the inner side of the game board 4. It is formed as an arc-shaped contact recess 271 along the lower arc surface of the rail 603, and a post-crime prevention projection piece 274 protrudes rearward along the contact recess 271. Further, a crime prevention rear end protrusion 275 is formed in a slanting manner on the back surface of the shaft support side with the crime prevention cover 270 attached. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 270, a crime prevention pre-projection piece 272 is projected along the lower shape of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 with the crime prevention cover 270 attached, and U-shaped at the lower ends. A mounting elastic piece 273 formed in a protruding manner is formed to project forward.

  The security cover 270 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5 by mounting the mounting elastic piece 273 in the mounting opening 110 formed in the door frame main body 100. And in the attached state, as shown in FIG. 17, the protrusion piece 272 before crime prevention faces the back lower one side of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250. Further, the front end of the crime prevention front protrusion 272 is in contact with the vertical bent protrusion 231. In addition, the post-crime projection piece 274 and the post-crime end edge projection piece 275 are in a state of protruding rearward, but when the door frame 5 is closed, the half of the post-crime prevention projection piece 274 on the pivot side is The bottom side of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 enters and faces each other, but the half of the open side of the post-crime protrusion 274 is the rail crime prevention formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601 The state is inserted into the groove 607, and the crime prevention rear end protrusion 275 is superposed along the upper surface of the crime prevention projection 608 formed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 30). ).

  Thus, in the state in which the security cover 270 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the security structure by the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above, and the security protrusion 285 and the security space 586 described later. In addition to the crime prevention structure, the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the lower front direction of the security cover 270 is caused by the polymerization of the pre-crime projection pieces 272 and the unit frame 251 even if an unauthorized device is attempted to enter from the lower side of the glass unit 250. The anti-crime piece 274 and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component member 601 are superposed to prevent unauthorized equipment from entering from the lower side of the rear face of the security cover 270. In particular, against the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the diagonally lower side of the door frame 5 on the shaft support side, the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the outer rail 602 is prevented by the superposed structure of the security projection 608 and the rear end projection 275. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4 by a superposed structure of the inner rail 603 and the post-crime protruding piece 274.

  Similarly, in addition to the crime prevention structure by the double bent projecting pieces 223 and 225 of the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 213, the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the obliquely lower side on the opening side of the door frame 5 The uneven engagement between the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the post-crime projection piece 274 can further prevent the unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4. Note that a vertical surface between the post-crime protrusion 274 and the rear end protrusion 275 on the back side of the security cover 270 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball, it also has a function of preventing the hit ball hitting or back feeding the guide path part from colliding with the glass plate 262.

<Mounting base>
As shown in FIGS. 15, 18, and 19, the mounting base 280 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the back surface of the plate portion of the door frame main body 100, and is a transparent synthetic resin similar to the security cover 270. Is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape whose front is opened. This mounting base 280 is formed by the rear surface of the mounting base 280 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed in order to smoothly guide the ball fired from the launch rail 515 to the game board 4. For this reason, a ball flight guide surface 286 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting base 280. By the way, the mounting base 280 according to the present embodiment has a prize ball passing port opening 281 that penetrates the rear protruding portion of the prize ball passing port covering part 228 formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 at the upper part on the shaft support side. A ball feed unit mounting recess 282 for attaching the ball feed unit 287 is formed in the lower part of the open side. A region in the oblique direction from the ball feed unit mounting recess 282 is a ball flight guide surface 286.

  The ball feed unit 287 attached to the ball feed unit mounting recess 282 is provided with a ball feed member that swings in response to the reciprocal movement difference of a ball striking rod 687 of the ball hitting device 650 described later. The balls at the lower end of the guide passage portion of the dish unit 300 are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 515 by the swinging operation. Further, a lid opening 283 into which a finger can be put when a side opening lid 406 described later is removed is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 280. Further, an upright wall 284 is formed to stand vertically on a part of the upper side of the mounting base 280. As shown in FIG. 15, the upright wall 284 is provided to restrict the lower portion of the security cover 270 from moving forward by contacting the front surface of the security cover 270 when the security cover 270 is attached. is there.

  Further, the mounting base 280 according to the present embodiment is characterized in that the security protrusion 285 is obliquely projected from the lower side of the above-described ball flight guide surface 286 to the prize ball passage opening 281 toward the rear. It is. As described above, the security projecting piece 285 is provided between the security space 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 and the inner ridges and the inner side ridges at the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured.

<Frame decoration relay board>
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 18, a frame decoration relay board 290 is attached to the lower side of the mounting base 280, and a relay board cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the frame decoration relay board 290 is attached. ing. This frame decoration relay board 290 is an electrical part or electrical part provided on the door frame 5 (cold cathode tube, LED board, speaker 163, switch provided in the operation handle part 461, ball rental unit 327, operation button unit 329. Etc.) are integrated and connected, and the prize ball payout control board via the door relay board 1102 or the like incorporated in the board unit 1100 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 with the wiring from the frame decoration relay board 290. It is connected to the main control board 1350 (see FIG. 78) of the main control board box 624 attached to 1186 or the game board 4.

<Dish unit>
Next, the configuration of the dish unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14, 18 and 19. The dish unit 300 is roughly divided into a unit frame 301 constituting an external appearance, a lower speaker unit 340 attached to the inside of the unit frame 301, an upper part of the lower speaker unit 340, and facing the upper surface of the unit frame 301. , A second ball extraction link unit (not shown) for performing the ball extraction operation of the second ball extraction valve provided on the plate body 380, and a plate lid plate for closing the rear surface of the unit frame 301 450.

  The unit frame 301 is provided with a ball rental unit 327. The ball lending unit 327 is provided with a switch for deriving a lending command, a remaining lending indicator, and the like when a ball lending machine is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Further, the unit frame 301 is provided with an operation button unit 329 at the front center on the upper surface. The operation button unit 329 includes a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) push buttons 330 a, 330 b, and 330 c, and the plurality of operation buttons 330 is a liquid crystal provided on the game board 4. It is operated when the player participates in the game content performed on the display device 640 or the like.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is provided with a first ball extraction button 316 on the right side of the upper surface of the unit frame 301, and a second part of the second ball extraction link unit is formed at the lower center of the unit frame 301. A two-ball removal button 421 is arranged. In this embodiment, the two ball removal buttons 316 and 421, which are the first ball removal button 316 and the second ball removal button 421, are provided by storing the dish body 380 by operating the first ball removal button 316. Although all the spheres stored in the portion 381 and the guide passage portion can be removed, the operation of removing the spheres takes some time to remove the spheres arranged in a line in the guide passage portion 382. On the other hand, by operating the second ball removal button 421, the ball on the upstream side from the storage portion 381 of the dish body 380 can be quickly removed from the second ball extraction opening having a large diameter. Can be shortened. For this reason, it is possible to select the length of time for the player to take the ball.

  In addition, when a big hit is made during the game, a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, and if the game is continued with the ball left unattended, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 (see FIG. 57), the payout operation is stopped, or the ballistic operation is stopped and the game is not possible even though the game is being hit. In such a case, the second ball release button 421 By performing the operation, the ball that is being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained, and the game during the big hit can be continued.

<Handle device>
Next, the handle device 460 attached to the lower part of the door frame 5 on the open side will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 18, 19, and 20. FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device 460 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided on the main body frame 3. The handle device 460 is assembled to an operation handle portion 461 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 on the open side, and the back surface of the door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 461, and rotates according to the turning operation of the operation handle portion 461. And a joint unit 480 that cooperates with the rotating shaft 465 and changes the rotational motion of the rotating shaft 465 into a slide motion.

  Although not shown, the handle device 460 is a micro switch that is turned on when the operation handle portion 461 is rotated, and a single button that turns the micro switch off when the micro switch is turned on. And a touch sensor for detecting contact of the player with the operation handle portion 461 through conductive plating applied to the outer peripheral surface of the operation handle portion 461. Then, when the player rotates the operation handle portion 461, the microswitch is turned ON and the touch sensor detects contact, a later-described launch motor 695 (see FIG. 37) of the hitting ball launcher 650 is rotationally driven. It has become so. In addition, a cam formed in the shape of a ball is fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 465, and the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 moves in the left-right direction by rotating this cam. .

  As shown in FIG. 20, the slide movement of the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the ball hitting device 650, and the tension of the biasing spring 684 (see FIG. 37) of the ball hitting device 650 is increased. By adjusting, the strength of the urging force of the hitting ball rod 687 can be adjusted to obtain the ball hitting force desired by the player. The relationship between the handle device 460 and the ball hitting device 650 will be described in detail after the ball hitting device 650 is described.

[Body frame]
Next, the game board 4 can be detachably mounted from the front side, and a hitting ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for discharging a prize ball, a tank rail member 740, a ball path unit 770, and a prize ball unit 800. (Corresponding to the payout unit of the present invention), the full unit 900, the locking device 1000 for locking the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 And various components such as a board unit 1100 in which various control boards and power supply boards for controlling electrical parts provided in the main body frame 3 are collectively provided, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580. The main body frame 3 constructed by mounting the main body frame 500 on the main body frame main body 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29, the main body frame main body 500 on which the above-described various components are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which the various components are mounted will be described. FIG. 21 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, FIG. 22 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 23 is a main body frame main body before mounting the parts. 24 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. 26 is a perspective view of the state in which the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2, and FIG. 27 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. FIG. 29 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame 3 to which components are attached, and FIG. is there.

  In FIG. 21, an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 (both see FIG. 25) for attaching and closing the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 are mounted on one side of the main body frame main body 500. In the state where the shaft bracket mounting step portions 501 and 502 are formed and the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 are mounted on the shaft bracket mounting step portions 501 and 502, the upper side and the side side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. Is substantially coplanar with the upper and side sides of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower and side sides of the main body frame main body 500 are substantially coplanar with the lower and side sides of the lower shaft support 509 (FIG. 27). reference). Here, the upper shaft support bracket 503 and the lower shaft support bracket 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 27. The upper shaft support fitting 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and its upper end protrudes forward. A shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed on the upper surface protruding forward, and the shaft support pin 504 A door shaft support hole 505 is formed on the side.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support 509 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly on the upper side. The lower support plate 506 constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 on the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2, and the upper support plate 507 is provided on the door frame 5. A door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft support portion 220 on the main body frame 3 is configured. For this reason, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 68 of the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the door support plate 507 is provided with the lower shaft support portion 220 of the door frame 5. A shaft support hole 508 for inserting the projecting shaft pin 221 is formed.

  By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof becomes a game board installation recess 510 (see FIG. 25) for installing the game board 4. A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 510 is a plate portion 511. In addition, the front upper side portion and the front open side portion on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are formed with a predetermined width so as to face the rear surface of the door frame 5, An upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by a protrusion protruding in parallel with the lateral direction, and a side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outer side and on the inner side of the front opening side edge on the right side when viewed from the front. A security recess 583 is formed which is formed by an inner wall having an inclined surface that is connected to the first side wall 540 at the rear end. Unlike the side part, it is not formed so as to have a predetermined width that faces the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front shaft support side part of the main body frame main body 500 is more forward than the front upper side part or the front open side part. The shaft support side portion 587 has a large protrusion amount.

  More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed on the upper side of the front surface is bent toward the rear with both long side ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 211 attached and fixed to the rear side of the upper side of the door frame 5. The bent projecting pieces 215 and 216 are inserted respectively. Further, the side security grooves 582 and the security recesses 583 formed on the front open side edges are folded back at the long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 213 attached and fixed to the open back of the door frame 5. The open-side outer bent protrusion 223 and the open-side inner bent protrusion 225 to be bent are respectively inserted. Further, on the shaft support side portion 587 of the front shaft support side portion, the tip end of the shaft support side L-shaped bent protruding piece 217 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 212 attached and fixed to the shaft support side rear surface of the door frame 5 is provided. The parts come into contact.

  Further, the above-described structure can prevent an illegal act of inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire through the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, and in particular, the open side where the fraudulent act is most likely to be performed. It has a structure that can prevent fraud at the side and then at the upper side where fraud is likely to be performed. Of course, the prevention of fraud by the contact between the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 212 on the support side and the support-side L-shaped bent protrusion 217 also functions sufficiently, but in many cases the support side is sturdy. Since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected to each other by the support brackets 45 and 66 and the shaft support brackets 503 and 509, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is larger than that of the upper side and the open side. It is difficult to make a gap. For this reason, in this embodiment, not a double crime prevention structure but a single crime prevention structure. These points will be described in detail later.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the front upper side, front open side, and front pivot side on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are arranged on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the front open side. A door hook hole 549 is formed for passing through a door hook portion 1041 (see FIG. 67) provided on a lock device 1000, which will be described later, attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3 and jumping forward. A board positioning projection 576 for engaging with a positioning recess 611 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the front shaft support side. Further, the pivot side L-shaped bent projecting piece 217 of the pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 212 with the door frame 5 closed on the inner front surface of the board positioning projection 576 on the side side of the front pivot side is slightly lower. Two upper and lower restricting projections 577 into which the distal ends are inserted project. The operation of the restricting protrusion 577 is as described above. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, a board stopper insertion hole into which an end of a game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open-side flat portion and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

  Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate part 511 is a game board placement part 512 for placing the game board 4, and the game board 4 is placed on the placement part 512 in the approximate center of the game board placement part 512. A passage support protrusion 513 is provided to support the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 30) formed in the game board 4 when placed. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, a rail mounting boss 514 protrudes from the central portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the open side end portion at a predetermined interval, and the launch rail 515 ( 25) is fixed with screws. Further, a rail connection member 516 protrudes from the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 is provided. The connecting passage 609 (see FIG. 30), which is the downstream end of 603, is adjacent.

  In addition, at the side position of the rail connection member 516 (position opposite to the firing rail 515), the upper end of an elliptical game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 25) for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 is provided. A fixture mounting boss 517 for mounting is projected, and a stopper 518 is projected diagonally below. That is, the game board fixing tool 519 is provided to be rotatable about the fixing tool mounting boss 517, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board mounting portion 512 to play the game. The board fixture 519 is pressed against the front surface of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. Further, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by turning the game board fixture 519 counterclockwise and removing it. In this case, the game board fixture 519 is prevented from being rotated counterclockwise by the stopper 518.

  In addition, the lower part of the open side of the plate part 511 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 520 that projects in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A hitting ball launcher 650 is fixed to the mounting portion 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This will be described in detail later. A handle connecting window 522 that houses a slide member 710 (see FIG. 41) that is associated with the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 described above is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 described above. A shaft hole 523 is formed at the position adjacent to the connecting window 522 so that the end face of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 37) of the ball striking rod 687 faces. In addition, the upper wall portion of the launching device mounting portion 520 is formed with a notch-shaped through-hole opening 521 for projecting the hitting ball rod 687 of the hitting ball launching device 650 upward. Is formed with a cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 passes.

  On the other hand, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, as shown in FIG. 22, a ball discharge passage 524 that extends from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 and then goes downward is formed. . The ball discharge passage 524 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball connection passage 880 (see FIG. 25), which will be described later, from below the pachinko machine 1 into the island. Further, a cylindrical guide protrusion 525 protrudes rearward above the above-described launcher mounting portion 520, and a guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 73) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is inserted into the guide protrusion 525. This facilitates the mounting of the substrate unit 1100. Also, mounting holes 527 for mounting the board unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 511, and the mounting pieces 1122 of the board unit 1100 are associated with the mounting holes 527 and fastened with screws. In addition, a launching device mounting boss 529 for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650 is projected rearwardly inside the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 520, and the lowermost end portion on the open side is shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide protrusion with a tapered tip and a vertically long shape is provided to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 protrudes rearward.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with a ball extraction connection opening 530 that is an opening at the upstream end of the ball extraction discharge passage 524 on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. Yes. The downstream end of the ball removal connection passage 880 is connected to the ball removal connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball-opening connection opening 530 is horizontal so that a full unit mounting portion 531 for mounting a full unit 900 (see FIG. 25), which will be described in detail later, is orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engagement groove 532 that engages with the engagement piece 924 (see FIG. 57) of the full unit 900 is formed in the front portion of the full unit mounting portion 531. Further, as shown in FIG. 25, an outlet for blocking a prize ball discharged from the outlet 921 of the full tank unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened is provided on the front surface of the plate part 511 in front of the full unit mounting part 531. An opening / closing device 579 is provided.

  Although the outlet opening / closing device 579 is not described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by a lever that contacts the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, the contact with the lever disappears, so that the opening / closing plate rises and closes the outlet 921. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not fall down from the outlet 921. Also, as shown in FIG. 25, a fastening hole penetrating vertically in a position corresponding to the upper part of the launching portion of the firing rail 515 in the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511. 533 is formed, and a fastening link 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533. The fastening linkage 534 is a mechanism for preventing the game board 4 from being detached from the main body frame 3.

  Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 510 is demonstrated. The game board installation recess 510 is provided around a first side wall 540 that is provided in a rearward direction from the inner side surface on the pivot support side and the above-described upper side portion and the open side surface portion, and is provided in the rear side from the first side wall 540. A second side wall 541, a third side wall 542 circumferentially provided rearward from the second side wall 541, and a fourth side wall 543 circumferentially provided rearward from the third side wall 542, The body frame 3 is formed in a concave shape in which the left and right sides and the rear part of the upper side are surrounded.

  The first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed such that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are straightly extended rearward with a step when viewed from the back, whereas the left side ( The open side is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 29) that is inclined inwardly from the first side wall 540 toward the fourth side wall 543. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 543 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the left side (side on the open side) are straightly formed rearward. May be in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 so that it cannot be opened smoothly. Therefore, the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side can be smoothly opened by inclining inside. It is something that can be done.

  At the same time, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and the attachment is made using a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 63) provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 540. In order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the fourth side wall 543 is formed in an inclined step shape from the first side wall 540 on the open side. Furthermore, as for the step size of the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. For this reason, it is formed with a somewhat large step, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the side walls 540 to 543 are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively. In this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, third side wall 542, and fourth side wall 543. The rear projecting portions of various gaming devices provided in 4 are accommodated.

  In other words, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the back of the peripheral part of the game board 4. A rear side wall that has a stepped portion that contacts the rear side wall of the gaming device 4 that extends from the first side wall 540 toward the rear substantially in parallel with the first side wall 540 and is provided on the game board 4. It constitutes. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the rearward protruding amounts of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed so as to be at substantially the same position as the rear wall 722 of the reservoir 728 for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 720.

  Thereby, since the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured up to a position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, for example, a game Even in the case where a gaming device is installed such that the liquid crystal display screen occupies almost the entire area of the board 4, the rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device can be easily stored.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 24, from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 to the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (shaft support side) when viewed from the back side, the open side rear wall 544, An upper rear wall 545 and a pivot support side rear wall 546 as a rear wall are provided so as to project inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The shaft support side rear wall 546 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 21), and a ball path unit 770 (to be described later) and a prize ball unit 800 constituting a ball payout mechanism are detachably attached to the rear surface. It is like that. Therefore, the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the pivot support side rear wall 546 is sufficient if the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 are wide enough to be mounted.

  The upper rear wall 545 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 21), and a tank rail member 740, which will be described later, is attached to the rear surface of the upper rear wall 545, so that the lower end side is inclined. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 545 to have a height width dimension of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner. Furthermore, the front surface of the open-side rear wall 544 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 21), and a cover body support cylinder portion 575 that pivotally supports a cover body 1250 described later is formed on the rear surface. Accordingly, it is sufficient that the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the open-side rear wall 544 is a width that forms the cover body support cylinder 575.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot-side rear wall 546 that project inward from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat plate portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space formed by 543 is ensured, for example, even when a gaming device is installed in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies almost the entire area of the gaming board 4, such gaming device 4 The rear projecting portion can be easily stored. Note that the insides of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot support-side rear wall 546 form a rear opening 580 so that the rear opening 580 can be opened and closed by a cover body 1250 described later. It has become.

  In addition, the 1st side wall 540 in this embodiment is corresponded to the front side wall of this invention, and the 2nd side wall of this example, the 3rd side wall, and the 4th side wall are the back side wall of this invention. It corresponds.

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board mounting recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 passes is formed on the open side plane portion. The middle and lower three places are opened, and the upper and lower door hook holes 549 are further above, below, and below, the lock locking holes 548 with which the locking protrusions 1004 described later of the locking device 1000 are engaged (see FIG. 22). Is formed. Further, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 22) for performing the attachment with a screw is an upper part of the rear end portion of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the middle. Note that the locking device 1000 is attached not only at the upper and middle positions, but also at a screw mounting portion 1003 formed on a lock mounting piece 1008 described later and a lock mounting hole formed near the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the locking device 1000 can also be attached by fixing 547 to 547 with screws.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24, on the left and right in front of the upper side of the first side wall 540, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 A guide arc projection 552 that abuts is provided, and a relief recess 551 that communicates with a notch 729 of a prize ball tank 720, which will be described later, is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. When the mounting flange 733 of the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, the notch 729 of the prize ball tank 720 communicates with the escape recess 551 as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the sphere stored in the tank increases, the pressure is released to prevent clogging. Further, when the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 substantially coincide with each other when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 720 in plan view (FIG. 5). See). The guide arc projection 552 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and the decorative cover plate. 15 is formed to prevent a fraudulent act such as forming a gap with 15 and inserting a fraudulent instrument through the gap.

  Further, the above-described upper rear wall 545 is formed with a rail locking groove 553 for attaching the tank rail member 740 along the opening edge of the rear opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall. A rail locking groove 554 is formed in the bent portion of 545. The tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking protrusions 749, 750 (see FIG. 45) of the tank rail member 740 in the rail locking grooves 553, 554. In addition, a rail latching elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper part of the upper rear wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 553 and 554. When the projecting pieces 749 and 750 are locked and the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail latching elastic piece 555 is arranged at the upper end on the downstream side of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact with the top.

  When the tank rail member 740 is removed, the rail rail elastic member 555 is pressed backward, and then the tank rail is released to release the locking state between the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 and the locking protrusions 749 and 750. The member 740 may be lifted upward. Further, a relief hole 556 is formed on the side of the rail hooking elastic piece 555, and a ground wire connector 557 is formed below the rail hooking elastic piece 555. The escape hole 556 is formed to escape the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided in the tank rail member 740, and the ground connector 207 is attached to the inside of the tank rail member 740. In addition to being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, a wiring connected to a ground connector provided on the power supply board is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 24, vertical support walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the support-side rear wall 546 on the support-supporting rear wall 546, and a spherical passage unit is provided between the stand-up walls 560. 770 and a prize ball unit 800 are attached. In addition, a prize ball guide projection 561 is provided in a bent shape from the most upstream part between the left and right standing walls 560 to slightly above the middle stream part. The award ball guide protrusion 561 is protruded rearward on the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the protrusion height gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and a ball passage unit 770 described later is attached. This corresponds to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 50) of the ball passage unit 770 and guides the winning balls in a line. Further, a path unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball path unit 770 with screws and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are provided on the left and right sides of the prize ball guide projection 561, and a ball break switch described later. A switch-corresponding protrusion 563 is provided so as to face 778 (see FIG. 50). The passage unit mounting boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

  Furthermore, an engagement protrusion 565 as a locking portion that engages with a hook-shaped engagement portion 824 (see FIG. 52) as an engagement portion of the prize ball unit 800 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560, A lock elastic claw 564 that engages with the button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 52) of the prize ball unit 800 is formed, and the rotation shaft 808 (see FIG. 52) of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800 is formed. A relief hole 566 is formed to receive the end. Also, a payout motor escape opening 572 is formed below the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the payout motor 815 as the drive motor of the prize ball unit 800 faces the payout motor escape opening 572. (See FIG. 25). The prize ball unit 800 is engaged with the lower end of the engaging groove 573 formed at the lowermost lower end of the rear surface of the shaft supporting side rear wall 546 and is supported by the engaging protrusion 565 and the locking elastic claw 564. The rear wall 546 is detachably attached. This detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

  In addition, a cover body contact groove 567 into which an open side end of the cover body 1250 enters is formed at the open end of the pivot support side rear wall 546, and the cover body contact groove 567 of the cover body contact groove 567 is formed. A locking wall 569 protrudes downward. The cover body abutment groove 567 is formed with a stop hole 568 corresponding to the stop hole 1253 (see FIG. 28) of the cover body 1250. By doing so, the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover body 1250. The locking wall 569 is provided with a U-shaped locking protruding hook piece 570 in a plan view, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 is attached to the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. By passing through the formed through-hole 1254 (see FIG. 28) and, for example, hooking a lock such as a padlock on the locking protrusion 570, only the person having the key of the padlock can open the cover body 1250. You can make it impossible.

  As mentioned above, although the structure of the main body frame main body 500 which consists of the game board installation recessed part 510 and the board part 511 was demonstrated, when the door frame 5 was closed to the lowest end side part of the board part 511 other than having demonstrated above. In addition, engagement grooves 584 and 585 (see FIG. 21) are formed into which the door frame protrusions 112 and 113 (see FIG. 19) bent downward with the lower side of the door frame main body 100 bent rearward. The engagement groove 584 is a groove formed below the above-described firing device mounting portion 520, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the shaft support side. Note that the door frame protrusion 112 corresponding to the engagement groove 585 protrudes rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 113 corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, a door frame protrusion 112 with a large amount of protrusion is slightly formed at the lower end of the open end. The door frame protrusions 112 and 113 and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 constitute the outer protrusions and engagement portions on the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the launch rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connection member 516 and the launch device attachment portion 520 are formed to project, but the launch device attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are provided. The position of the plate portion 511 is biased toward the open side, and they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, in the state where the door frame 5 is closed, the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 on which the launching device mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are arranged to the open side is the rear surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device mounting portion. 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 are in close contact with each other, so that an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement groove 585 can be removed from the back surface of the door frame 5. It is extremely difficult to make the gap between the launcher mounting portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 even better and reach the front side of the game board 4 or the back side of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, since the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are not arranged to the shaft support side does not have a portion protruding on the surface of the plate portion 511, the door frame 5 is closed. In this case, a space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement groove 584 can easily open the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. In order to prevent unauthorized tools from slipping through the space 586 upward, the mounting base 280 attached to the lower back of the door frame 5 has the door frame 5 in a closed state. A security protrusion 285 that enters 586 is formed. The security protrusion 285 is formed on the mounting base 280 so as to extend from substantially the middle of the plate portion 511 to the end portion on the shaft support side. Therefore, the space below the launch rail 515 and the outer rail 602 attached to the game board 4 constitutes a crime prevention space 586 for receiving the crime prevention protrusion 285 protruding from the mounting base 280. The security projection piece 285 and the security space 586 constitute an inner ridge and engagement portion in the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the main body frame 3 includes the game board 4, the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the lock device 1000, and the board unit. 1100 and the cover body 1250 are attached, and these will be sequentially described below.

<Schematic configuration of game board>
A schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35. 30 is a perspective view of the game board 4 as viewed from the front, FIG. 31 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 32 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. FIG. 34 is an enlarged perspective view of a removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 35 is a main body frame 3 showing a structure on the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4. FIG.

  In FIG. 30, the game board 4 includes a game panel 600 made of wooden plywood and having a substantially square outer shape, and a front component 601 attached to the front surface of the game panel 600 so as to surround the game area 605. Yes. On the surface of the gaming panel 600, various gaming devices and a number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the gaming area 605. Then, after those gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided, the front component 601 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 600, and the front component 601 has a circular cavity so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 605. And the outer shape is formed in a shape along the outer shape of the gaming panel 600, and an arc surface extending from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side past the center of the upper side is formed as the outer rail 602. An inner rail 603 is formed from the lower position of the stopper 620 provided at the end of 602 to the position where the symmetrical backflow prevention member 604 of the upper stopper 620 is provided. The outer rail 602 has a connecting passage portion 609 connected to a rail connecting member 516 provided in an extension shape of the firing rail 515 at the start end thereof, and is formed in an oblique shape. A mouth 610 is formed. In addition, a metal rail is closely attached to the outer rail 602 from the upstream end of the foul port 610 to the stop portion 620.

  The stopper 620 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so that when a hit ball that has slid on the outer rail 602 collides with force, the hit ball hits the inside of the game area 605. The backflow prevention member 604 prevents the hit ball, which is fired at one end and taken inside the game area 605, from flowing back to the outer rail 602 again. Further, a security protrusion 608 is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail 602 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. As described above, the security projection 608 overlaps with the rear end projection 275 of the security cover 270 protruding from the security cover 270 in the state in which the door frame 5 is closed. It prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the support side gap.

  Further, an out port 606 is provided at the center of the lower portion of the inner rail 603, and the hit ball hits the game area 605 between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from the out port 606 to the backflow prevention member 604. Although it constitutes a guided passage to be guided, the hit ball that has flowed back through the outer rail 602 without reaching the game area 605 is taken into the foul port 610 and guided to the foul ball inlet 923 of the full tank unit 900 described later. Then, it is discharged again to the dish unit 300. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. In addition, a rail security groove 607 is formed in the front component 601 on the way from the out port 606 of the inner rail 603 to the stop 620. The rail security groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime projection piece 274 protruding from the security cover 270 enters as described above with the door frame 5 closed. Due to the concavo-convex engagement between the rail security groove 607 and the post-crime protrusion piece 274, the piano wire or the like that is inserted from the middle of the gap on the open side of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is overlapped in the vertical direction. This will ultimately prevent the tool from entering.

  By the way, a positioning recess 611 is formed on one side of the game board 4 to fit in the board positioning projection 576 formed on the main body frame 3, and is formed on the main body frame 3 on the other side of the game board 4. A game board stopper 614 to be inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. The end of the game board stopper 614 is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when the game board stopper 614 is pressed and fixed. Thus, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, the game board 4 is entirely inserted after the positioning recess 611 is inserted from the front side of the main body frame 3 in an oblique direction so as to be fitted to the board positioning protrusion 576. Is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 614 which is in a free state in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end thereof is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed. Thereafter, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, the game board 4 may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure.

  In addition, the game board 4 in the present embodiment has a configuration that prevents unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3 very easily. That is, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 34, a mounting notch 616 that penetrates the game board 4 in the front and rear direction is formed at the lower end opposite to the passage notch 613 below the game board 4 (exactly). Is formed with a mounting notch 616 in the front component 601.), and a fastening bar 617 is stretched and fixed in the horizontal direction below the mounting notch 616. The fastening bar 617 is formed with a belt groove-like fastening portion 618 for latching the fastening band 619 at the approximate center thereof. On the other hand, as the removal preventing mechanism provided in the main body frame 3, as described above, it is the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3, and the firing rail 515 is fired. A fastening hole 533 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the portion, and a fastening linkage 534 for hooking the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 (see FIG. 35). ).

  When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation recess 510 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board placement part 512 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 are in a matched state. In this state, the tip of a fastening band 619 that is generally marketed from above the fastening bar 617 is inserted into the mounting notch 616 with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 coincide. Then, it is inserted downward into the fastening hole 533 and guided forward, and its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. And the unnecessary front-end | tip part which protruded ahead from the fastener of the fastening band 619 is cut | disconnected. In this way, unless the fastening band 619 is cut, the game board 4 cannot be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the game board stopper 614 and the game board fixture 519 are released. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main body frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if different fastening bands are fastened by using a fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor, It can be easily understood that the board 4 has been removed and some sort of fraud has been performed. Thus, illegal removal from the main body frame 3 of the game board 4 can be prevented by an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism.

  Further, the outer shape of the game board 4 has speaker cutouts 612 formed on the upper left and right sides of the game board 4 so as to receive the rear protruding portions of the speakers 163 provided on the back surface of the door frame 5, and the side of the foul mouth 610. A notch portion 613 for passage into which a part of the front guide passage 920 portion of the full tank unit 900 described later is inserted is formed obliquely below. In addition, on the lower left and right sides of the front component member 601, a certificate sticking unit 615 for attaching a certificate check certificate is provided.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the game board 4, the balls won in various game devices (for example, a general prize opening, a start opening, a big prize opening, etc.) provided in the game area 605 are aligned and guided downstream. As a display control board box in which a display device control board for controlling the display of a liquid crystal display device 640 (see FIG. 74, etc.) as a display device arranged almost at the center of the game area 605 is placed on the back surface of the back box 621 A liquid crystal display control board box 622 is attached.

  Further, a board substrate holder 623 is fixed to the back of the game board 4 below the back box 621. This board substrate holder 623 has a space part (this space part has a width in the front-rear direction that is relatively wider than the width of the back box 621 so as to collect the winning balls aligned and guided by the back box 621 in front of it. And a drop port 629 (see FIG. 29) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The drop port 629 joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 606 and communicates with an out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 73) formed in the substrate unit 1100 described later.

  Further, the board substrate holder 623 is connected to the main control board box 624 for storing the main control board 1350 for controlling the game operation on the back surface thereof, and a payout control board 1186 and a power supply board provided in the board unit 1100 described later. And a relay terminal plate 625 for mounting. The relay terminal plate 625 is provided with drawer connectors 626 and 627 that are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 simply by mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3.

  Furthermore, the board substrate holder 623 is formed with a joint guide protrusion 628 that protrudes backward from between the drawer connectors 626 and 627 so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 625. The joint guide protrusions 628 are provided on the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 side and on the game board 4 side when an operation of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3 is performed as will be described in detail later. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 are inserted into the joining guide holes 1213 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 of the substrate unit 1100 so as to be naturally connected (see FIG. 73). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

<Hitball launcher>
The ball striking device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 is a perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball launcher 650, a perspective view (B) with the firing motor part removed, and FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the hitting ball launching device 650, FIG. These are the front view (A) which shows the relationship between the hit ball launcher 650 and the launch rail 515, and the perspective view (B) of the launch motor part, and FIG. 39 is the hit ball launch in the state where the operation handle 461 is not operated. 40 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the firing rail 515, and FIG. 40 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball striking device 650 and the firing rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 461 is operated. 41 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), a front view (B) of the slide member 710 provided in the ball striking device 650, and a cross-sectional view A-A in the front view (B). It is.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 pivotally supports a hitting ball rod 687 on the firing base frame 651 and attaches a shot motor 695 for reciprocating rotation to the hitting ball rod 687 to the firing base frame 651, and further hits the hitting ball rod 687. The firing base frame 651 is provided with a slide rod 677 and a slide member 710 that adjust the urging force of the urging spring 684 that imparts the urging force that returns to the position.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, the launch base frame 651 is molded into a horizontally long rectangular shape by a synthetic resin, and a bearing in which a bearing 689 of a ball striking rod 687 is fitted at substantially the center thereof. A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 687 are attached and fixed to the upper part and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684. In addition, a slide guide hole 655 having a horizontally elongated groove is formed on the rear side of the firing base frame 651 (on the opposite side of the portion corresponding to the lower side of the firing rail 515), and a slide member storage space is formed below the slide guide hole 655. 656 is formed.

  The slide guide hole 655 is configured to guide a slide movement of the slide rod 677 by inserting a guide locking piece 678 protruding from an upper rear end of a slide rod 677 described later. The slide member 710 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is guided by a guide bush 681 fixed to a guide hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 in a stop hole 662 formed in the firing base frame 651 by a set screw 682. This is done by penetrating through. Further, as shown in FIG. 38, a rectangular connection opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656.

  Further, a hook portion is formed with respect to the main body of the launch base frame 651 at a front portion of the upper side of the launch base frame 651, and an operating piece opening 657 is formed in the hook portion above the bearing cylinder 652. ing. The operating piece opening 657 abuts on a supply swing piece 289 (see FIG. 15) provided facing a hitting ball supply port 288 (see FIG. 15) on the downstream side of the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. The operating piece 658 is swingably provided by a stop pin 659 on a mounting portion 660 protruding from the rear upper part of the opening edge of the operating piece opening 657. The operating piece 658 is formed in a “te” shape, the rear end portion of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by a stop pin 659, and the base plate rotates integrally with the ball striking rod 687 from the pivotal support portion to the arc portion below. 690 is in contact with an operating piece abutting portion 693 provided in a projecting manner, and the upper side portion swings the supply swing piece 289 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hitting ball rod 687. Balls flowing out from the supply port 288 are supplied one by one to the launch position of the launch rail 515.

  Further, on the firing base frame 651, motor mounting bosses 661 for fixing a motor cover 694 containing the firing motor 695 are projected in a total of three locations, two at the rear lower part and one at the front upper part. In addition, a swinging piece boss 663 into which a shaft hole 673 at the lower end of the swinging piece 672 connected to the slide member 710 is inserted in a projecting manner to slide the slide rod 677 to the lower rear of the slide member storage space 656. Has been.

  A metal plate 665 is attached to the above-described launch base frame 651 so that the hitting ball launcher 650 has a high rigidity. For this reason, the metal plate 665 has through holes 666, 667, 668, 669 corresponding to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the swing piece boss 663, respectively. A horizontal oblong through hole 670 through which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 passes is also formed. In the metal plate 665 configured as described above, after the slide member 710 is stored in the slide member storage space 656, the respective through holes 666 to 671 have the members 652, 653, 655, 681, 712, 663 corresponding thereto. It is fixed to the firing base frame 651 by being brought into close contact with the firing base frame 651 so as to penetrate or match with the screws.

  The tip of the swing piece boss 663 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 671, and the shaft hole 673 of the swing piece 672 is inserted into the head portion. The swing piece 672 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable about the lower end. As shown in FIG. 37, the swing piece 672 is formed in a vertically long bowl shape, the shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle thereof. A connecting hole 674 having a shape is formed. The front surface above the connection hole 674 is an abutting portion 675 that abuts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Accordingly, the rocking piece 672 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 663 and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with washer. The rocking piece 672 is attached to the firing base frame 651 by being fixed to the convex portion 712. The attached swinging piece 672 swings at the upper part around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

  Further, a horizontally long bowl-shaped slide bar 677 is attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 665 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 678 projecting from the rear upper part of the slide rod 677 is engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665, and the guide elongated hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 is engaged. The guide bush 681 having the set screw 682 is passed through, and the set screw 682 is fixed to the set hole 662. The slide hook 677 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide long hole 680 and the guide bush 681. The slide rod 677 is formed with a contacted portion 679 that contacts the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672 described above at one end (rear end), and one end of the biasing spring 684 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 683 for hooking the locking ring 685 is projected.

  A bearing cylinder 652 of the launch base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 666, and the bearing cylinder 652 is fitted so that the bearing 689 of the hitting ball rod 687 does not fall off. The lower end portion of the hit ball 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689 and, at the same time, the base plate 690 is fixed. The base plate 690 is provided with an operating piece abutting portion 693 that abuts against the operating piece 658 on the front back surface side thereof, and the front front surface of the base plate 690 is used to latch the locking ring 686 on the other end of the biasing spring 684. A spring locking portion 692 is provided in a projecting manner, and a motor contact projecting piece 691 that engages with and disengages the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is provided in a projecting manner on the rear front surface thereof. A synthetic resin rivet tip 688 is fixed to the upper end of the hitting ball 687, and the firing position formed by the lower end portion of the firing rail 515 and the firing position stopper 702 secured above the tip 688. I am going to rush into.

  On the other hand, a firing motor 695 housed in a motor cover 694 is attached to the above-described motor mounting boss 661 of the firing base frame 651. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), the motor cover 694 includes a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 695 therein, and is enlarged in front of the cylindrical portion to attach the motor. An anti-rotation cam 698 and a motor cam formed at the tip of the motor shaft 696 of the firing motor 695 integrally formed with an attachment portion in which an attachment fixing hole 699 for attachment to the boss 661 is formed. 697 is fixed.

  A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation prevention cam 698 and engages with a stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 39) fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701 so as to be swingable. This prevents rotation in the opposite direction. This is to prevent the motor cam 697 from rotating in the reverse direction so that the motor cam 697 and the motor abutting protrusion 691 mesh with each other to prevent a failure in which the ball striking device 650 cannot be driven. Further, the motor cam 697 is formed in a ball shape, and reciprocates the hitting ball rod 687 while being engaged with and disengaged from the motor abutting protrusion piece 691 as the firing motor 695 rotates. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor attachment boss 661, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), the main structure of the hit ball launching device 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

  Incidentally, the slide member 710 housed in the slide member housing space 656 and slidably moved is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with the rear open as shown in FIG. 41, and an elliptical oval convex portion 711 projects on the front surface thereof. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 712 is projected from the rear position of the elliptical convex portion 711. Further, on both the upper and lower surfaces, slide contact protrusions 713 having an arc cross section are provided at both ends so as to easily slide in the slide member storage space 656. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 provided in the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 is inserted.

  The insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the front side of the side wall in the sliding direction, and protrudes from the inside of the upper surface and the lower surface to the inside slightly behind the first inclined surface 715. In addition, a clamping piece 716 is formed in which a predetermined interval is formed between the tips of each other. A second inclined surface 717 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 716 so as to incline in a C shape when viewed from the side. Thus, in the state in which the slide protrusion 492 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 41B, one end side of the slide protrusion 492 on the inclined side 493 side contacts the side wall in the sliding direction. In this state, it is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716. In addition, although the space part 718 is formed in the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, this space part 718 is not necessarily playing a function.

  Thus, the slide member 710 configured as described above is an ellipse formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG. 38A in the state of being stored in the slide member storage space 656. The insertion space 714 is formed so as to face the connecting opening 664 having a shape, and the slide member 710 is in contact with one inner wall of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. Although it is illustrated as being in contact, in a normal state, it is in a state of being in contact with the inner wall of the right space.

  First, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the urging spring 684 of the slide member 710 and the ball striking device 650 will be described. The slide member 710 has a right position at the initial position (FIG. 39, the swing piece 672 connected to the connecting projection 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state. For this reason, the slide rod 677 that is in contact with the swing piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left side in FIG. 39) by the biasing force of the bias spring 684 and the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672. The contacted portion 679 of the slide rod 677 is in contact. In this state, since the urging spring 684 is not tensioned, even if the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 is weak, and the hit ball at the firing position is not elastic. Even if issued, the game area 605 of the game board 4 is not reached.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (when it moves toward the left inner wall in FIG. 38A), as shown in FIG. Since the swing piece 672 swings and tilts about the shaft hole 673 at the lower end, the slide rod 677 is moved in the other direction (right side in FIG. 40) by the contact between the contact portion 675 and the contacted portion 679. Slide towards you. Then, the biasing spring 684 locked to the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the urging spring 684 is tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the shooting motor 695 is increased, and the hit ball at the shooting position is The game area 605 of the game board 4 is reached by being strongly bulleted. The strength of the impact force of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the slide amount of the slide member 710 in the slide member storage space 656.

  As described above, by moving the slide member 710, it is possible to adjust the resilience by the ball hitting device 650. The movement of the slide member 710 is performed by the operation handle portion 461 of the handle device 460 described above. This is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 483 of the joint unit 480 that moves in accordance with the turning operation of the moving operation member 464. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, when the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461 of the handle device 460 is rotated, the slanted cam 466 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 465 is also rotated, so that the slide body of the joint unit 480 483 slides and moves in one direction inside the storage body 481. For this reason, the slide protrusion 492 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 483 also slides in the same direction. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 492 of the slide body 483 penetrates the connection opening 664 formed in the launching device mounting portion 520 of the main body frame 5 and inserts the slide member 710. It is inserted into the space 714. The insertion state in this case is a state in which one end side on the inclined side 493 side of the sliding protrusion 492 is in contact with the side wall in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716 as described above. . Accordingly, when the slide protrusion 492 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, since the slide rod 677 also slides as the slide member 710 slides, the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, the ball striking force of the ball striking device 650 can be adjusted by rotating the rotation operation member 464 of the handle device 460.

  By the way, in this embodiment, since the handle device 460 is provided on the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 is provided on the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 492 of the handle device 460 is opened each time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 710 of the ball striking device 650 are linked or separated. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 492 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, and the handle device 460. The ball striking device 650 is linked, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 492 is separated from the insertion space 714 to separate the handle device 460 and the ball striking device 650. Therefore, the handle device 460 and the ball hitting device 650 can be linked / separated with the opening / closing of the door frame 5 very easily. In particular, when the slide protrusion 492 is inserted into the insertion space 714, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 716 that protrudes into the insertion space 714 even if the position of the slide protrusion 492 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction. The slide projection 492 is smoothly inserted into the clamping position by the surface 717.

  In some cases, the player may stuff the padding operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461 and fix it at a position rotated to some extent. 5 may be opened and closed. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the slide protrusion 492 is simply separated from the insertion space 714. However, when the door frame 5 is closed, the position of the slide protrusion 492 is not limited. Is slightly displaced in one direction, but the sliding member is accompanied with the closing operation of the door frame 5 by the cooperative action of the inclined side 493 of the sliding protrusion 492 and the first inclined surface 715 of the sliding member 710. The slide protrusion 492 and the slide member 710 are finally engaged with each other while moving 710 in one direction. That is, in the present embodiment, the operation handle device 460 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can be linked regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461. It is.

<Prize ball tank>
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 720. As described above, the prize ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 24) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the prize ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a notch 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom surface is formed from the upstream side wall 724 to the downstream side wall 723. A storage portion 728 is formed by a first inclined bottom surface 726 inclined toward the bottom and a second inclined bottom surface 727 inclined from the front wall 721 toward the discharge port 730 described below.

  In addition, a discharge port 730 is formed at the inclined lower end of the second inclined bottom surface 727, and this discharge port 730 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In this manner, the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 are formed so as to be surrounded by a discharge port projecting wall 725 that connects the U-shape. Further, on both outer sides of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, attachment flanges 733 that engage with the tank attachment groove 550 are formed, and on the back side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 720, the main body frame 3 is provided. Placement contact pieces 731 and 732 for placement and contact with the fourth side wall 543 project, and a ball leveling member 744, which will be described later, is attached to the lower portion of the rear wall 722 on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 720. The ball leveling attachment shaft 735 is projected. Further, an overflow preventing member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the prize ball tank 720 excluding the discharge port 730.

  In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting flange 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are attached to the main body frame 3. It abuts on the fourth side wall 543. As a result, the prize ball tank 720 is placed and mounted on the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. In this attached state, as shown in FIG. 28, the prize ball tank 720 is stored through the notch 729 of the front wall 721. The portion 728 communicates with the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 5, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 described below. ing. Therefore, in the prize ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 that stores the sphere (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. It forms so that it may become substantially the same as the width | variety of the front-back direction to -4th side wall 543, and is mounted in the upper part to those side walls 541-543.

  Further, as described above, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are deeply formed so as to cover the rear projecting space of the peripheral part of the game board 4, so that the side walls 541 to 541 are formed. Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper part of the 543 is shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, the prize ball tank 720 is stored even if the prize ball is stored and increases in weight. Is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the stored sphere can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 730 without the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727 being deformed. Further, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, the flow of the sphere stored in the storage portion 728 flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. It is configured. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which a part of the inclined bottom surface is provided with an opening as a discharge port as in the prior art, a spherical break-up protrusion for eliminating the clogging is formed in the storage portion near the discharge port. In addition, it is possible to obtain a structure in which ball clogging hardly occurs.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the award ball tank 720 is placed on the outside of the upper portion of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that accommodates the rearward projecting portions of the gaming apparatus, and the award is given. Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the storage unit, the tank rail member 740 is disposed outside the storage unit of the prize ball tank 720 (as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). Since the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction, the rear protrusion of the gaming device provided on the back surface of the gaming board 4 is stored. The upper sides of the rear side walls 541 to 543 can be projected rearward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, so that even if the rearward protruding portion of the gaming device protrudes at the upper side portion of the game board 4. It can be comfortably accommodated in the interior of the side walls 541 to 543.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the storage part 728 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that house the rearward projecting part of the gaming apparatus, the discharge port 730 is provided in the prize ball tank 720. A unique effect that is not found in conventional prize ball tanks can be obtained only by the configuration of being provided outside the rear wall 722. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a plan view showing the pressure state of the sphere at the discharge port portion of the conventional prize ball tanks (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the figure, normally, the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored and retained in the storage part of the prize ball tank 720. In this case, when the discharge port 730A is formed by opening a part of the inclined bottom surface of the storage portion as in the conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of a prize-ball tank in which a discharge port 730A is formed on the opposite side of FIG. 43, or a discharge port 730B is formed adjacent to the ball collapse projection 736B as shown in FIG. , 730B, the ball pressure is always applied to the discharge ports 730A, 730B from four directions by the pressure of the stored sphere and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure.

  For this reason, the pressure between the spheres happens to be balanced due to the degree of sphere overlap, and even when the sphere on the downstream side flows out, a sphere-engaged state may occur at the outlets 730A and 730B, resulting in the occurrence of clogging. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 720 according to the present embodiment, the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, so as shown in FIG. The pressure of the stored sphere in the discharge port 730 is a pressure from only two directions, that is, an action force directed from the storage portion toward the discharge port 730 and a reaction thereof, and does not receive pressure from four directions as in the prior art. For this reason, even if the sphere on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult to generate a sphere-engaged state at the discharge port 730 portion, and an excellent effect that sphere clogging does not occur can be achieved.

<Tank rail member>
The tank rail member 740 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 44 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900 as seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. FIG. 46 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball path unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the member 740, and the upstream part of the ball passage unit 770.

  As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 (see FIG. 24) of the upper rear wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 740 is provided with a plurality of locking protrusions 749 that are inserted from above into the rail locking groove 553 on the left and right sides and the lower side of the rear side surface, and the upper side of the rear side surface. At the center, a hook-shaped locking protrusion 750 that is hooked on the rail locking groove 554 from above is provided. Thus, the tank rail member 740 is formed in a slanted bowl shape having an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 forms a ball passage unit 770 described in detail later. I'm here. Further, the inside of the tank rail member 740 serves as a passage 742 through which the spheres flow down in two rows by the partition wall 741 as shown in FIG.

  The bottom surface of the passage 742 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign matters that roll along the passage 742 together with the sphere fall downward from the narrow groove. In addition, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 22). Yes. For this reason, the static electricity charged in the sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded from the metal plate to the outside via the ground wire connector 557 via the ground connector.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 744 having a weight on the slightly downstream side of the midstream region of the tank rail member 740 is swingably provided. The ball leveling member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball leveling mounting shaft 735 of the award ball tank 720 described above, and moves toward the passages 742 in the two rows of the tank rail members 740. The spheres that are suspended and flow down the respective passages 742 flow down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction so as to be rectified so as to become one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 744 is covered with a ball pressing plate 745. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the ball that has not been made one step by the ball leveling member 744 is forced to one step.

  Further, a pair of alignment gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 so as to face the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 747 is shifted by a half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the sphere that has flowed down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the spheres in the two rows of passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46, the spheres flowing through the respective passages 742 are guided in the central direction along the inclined surfaces 743 formed in the lower portions of the two rows of passages 742 while meshing with the alignment gears 747. During the guidance, the spheres from the two rows of passages 742 fall in a row alternately to the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described below. The alignment gear 747 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 746 on its upper surface.

<Ball passage unit>
A ball passage unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a line to the winning ball unit 800 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 51. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. 49 is a perspective view of the ball passage unit 770 as viewed from the back, FIG. 50 is a front view of the ball passage unit 770, and FIG. 51 is a connection structure of the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. It is a side view for demonstrating. 48 and 49, the prize ball unit 800 portion is a drawing of the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 801 with the gear cover 866, the aluminum heat sink 841 and the unit sub plate 825 removed. is there. However, the gears and the like are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

  In the spherical passage unit 770, a spherical drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent to the back surface of a substantially rectangular plate (the surface seen from the back surface is referred to as the front surface). As shown in FIG. 46A, the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front / rear bent passage portion 772a whose upstream is bent in the front / rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back) and the front / rear bent passage portion 772a. It consists of a left and right bent passage portion 772b bent in the left and right direction (left and right direction when viewed from the back) and a vertical passage portion 772c communicating with the left and right bent passage portion 772b and having a substantially vertical shape.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (A), the front / rear bent passage 772a is located at the center of the two rows of passages 742, as described above, because the position of the upper end inlet 773 falling from the tank rail member 740 described above is the main body. The winning ball guide projecting from the front / rear bent passage 772a and the pivot-side rear wall 546 is located on the rear side from the surface of the upper rear wall 545 and the pivot-side rear wall 546 of the frame 3. The projection 561 bends the ball drop passage 772 in the front-rear direction so that the ball drop passage 772 is positioned close to the surface of the pivot-side rear wall 546. Further, as shown in FIG. 50, the left and right bent passage portions 772b are formed in a U-shape so as to be almost full of the width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the momentum of the sphere that has dropped from the tank rail member 740 to the front and rear bent passage portions 772a. It is formed by bending.

  Further, although the vertical passage portion 772c is formed in a substantially vertical shape, it is slightly curved and formed, and a cutout portion 775 is formed in one bent passage wall 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c. A ball breakage detecting piece 776 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 777 is attached to 775 so as to be swingable. A ball break switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 776, and an actuator 779 of the ball break switch 778 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 776. The ball break detection piece 776 and the ball break switch 778 constitute a ball break detection mechanism for detecting a ball break in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Thus, when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball piece detection piece 776 is pressed by the ball present in the vertical passage portion 772c and the actuator 779 is pushed to turn on the ball piece switch 778. When no ball is present in the portion 772c due to clogging or ball deficiency, the ball piece detecting piece 776 swings into the vertical passage portion 772c, and the actuator 779 turns off the ball piece switch 778. When the ball break switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, stops and the payout of the prize ball is stopped.

  A stopper protrusion 780 is formed at the lower end of the notch 775 in order to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detecting piece 776 to the opposite side of the passage, and the ball passage unit 770 has a ball. A ball clogging insertion groove 781 is formed in the vertical passage portion 772 c corresponding to the cut detection piece 776. The ball clogging insertion groove 781 inserts a pin from the rear surface side of the ball passage unit 770 to prevent clogging of the ball breakage detection piece 776 when it is difficult to swing the ball breakage detection piece 776 due to ball clogging or the like. This is provided to eliminate the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 771 facing the ball piece detecting piece 776 is formed in a bulging shape slightly toward the ball piece detecting piece 776 side. This is because when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball break detection piece 776 is surely pressed to turn on the ball break switch 778.

  Further, a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 are formed in the ball path unit 770 at a position avoiding the above-described ball drop path 772. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with a positioning pin 574 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is a passage unit mounting boss similarly formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546. 562. Thus, in order to attach the ball passage unit 770 to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 47, the passage unit attachment boss 562 and the stop hole 782 are made to coincide with each other while the positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574. In this state, the screw 784 can be screwed from the stop hole 782. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 785 that engages with an engaging piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side, and is connected to the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. A connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the connecting lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting in an arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate member, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770 The projecting shaft 789 as the rotating shaft projecting from the tip of the support piece 788 extending from the both ends of the connecting lid member 786 is fitted into the supporting projecting piece 787 serving as the shaft support projecting from the left and right ends of the connecting lid 786. Thus, it is pivotally supported. In addition, the connecting lid member 786 is extended below the ball passage unit 770 by closing, and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end portion of the ball dropping passage 772 communicate with each other (see FIG. 51B). The state shown in FIG. 51) and the state where the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball dropping passage 772 do not communicate with each other (the state shown in FIG. 51A). A guide projection 791 that guides the support piece 788 of the connecting lid member 786 when projecting from the opened state to the closed state projects from the lower end of the rear surface of the ball path unit 770.

  Thus, in a state where the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as described later (FIG. 51). In the state shown in (A)), the connecting lid member 786 is closed and the rear surface thereof is locked by the locking elastic claw 820 provided in the prize ball unit 800, so that the ball drop path 772 of the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball The bent passage 803 of the unit 800 is communicated with the passage wall 790 so that a ball falling on the ball dropping passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800. The reason why the rotatable connecting lid member 786 is provided in the ball passage unit 770 is that the award ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as will be described later, and the attachment and detachment thereof is possible. This is to prevent the space formed between the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 from being hindered from falling smoothly.

  Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 projecting from the ball passage unit 770, the projecting height is provided on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 so as to gradually decrease toward the downstream side. By inserting the award ball guide projection 561, the upstream portion of the ball drop passage 772 is placed on the rear side so that the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 is located substantially at the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front / rear bent passage portion 772a that bends in the front / rear direction when viewed from the side. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the balls flowing down in two rows by the pair of alignment gears 747 are alternately sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 side, the balls are smoothly sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 through the ball drop passage 772. Can do. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced, and the ball drop passage 772 can be assembled. Workability can be improved.

  In addition, the sphere that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 in the front / rear bent passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left / right bent passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the winning ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. . The vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed in a state where the momentum is weakened is provided with a ball break detection mechanism (a ball break detection piece 776 and a ball break switch 778) for detecting the ball break. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably detect a break in the ball drop passage 772, in other words, a break in the ball supplied to the winning ball unit 800 (a ball break).

<Prize ball unit>
Next, the prize ball unit 800 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball path unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 55. 52 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the back side of the prize ball unit 800. FIG. 53 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a payout member. FIG. 55 is a rear view for explaining the path and drive relationship of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 55 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  52, a prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 in which a bent path 803, a prize ball path 810, and a ball extraction path 811 forming a ball path by a pair of bent path walls 802, and the unit base body. A unit sub-plate 825 covering the rear surface of 801, a relay board 830 attached to the upper surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub-plate 825, and a gear provided in a substantially central surface region (rear surface region) of the unit sub-plate 825; It comprises a group 843, 844, 847 and a gear cover 866 that covers the detection disk 850 (rotation transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 825 side. A bent passage 803 is formed by the wall 802. The bent passage wall 802 protrudes from the center of the upper part of the unit base body 801 to the middle of the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both ends of the unit base body 801 from the downstream end to the downstream end. In addition, the middle bent passage wall 802 is largely divided into left and right portions to form a distribution space 805 in which a sprocket 807 serving as a ball feed rotating body is arranged, and a unit base body 801 from the lower portion of the distribution space 805. A passage partition wall 809 is formed in a projecting manner so as to form a pair of the bent passage walls 802 divided to the left and right until the downstream end.

  That is, the right and left bent passage walls 802 and the passage partition wall 809 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 805, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 810, The other passage constitutes a ball passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. That is, the payout motor 815 is housed and fixed in a motor housing space 814 that is located at a position avoiding the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and within the depth width dimension of the ball passage. Is done. The bent passage 803 is formed in a meandering shape so as to weaken the pressure applied to the sprocket 807 of the spheres staying in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805, but the upstream side of the distribution space 805 An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface of the. The opening 804 stores small dust or the like that has entered the bent passage 803, and can collect dust or the like that is collected when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3.

  Further, in the distribution space 805 described above, a sprocket 807 as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits on the outer periphery is rotatably disposed. A bearing cylinder 806 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotary shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 809 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side thereof A payout ball detection sensor 812 is detachably mounted.

  The payout ball detection sensor 812 is a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor in which a circular passage hole through which a ball passes is formed at the front end, and a switch fitting recess 865 that matches the shape of the rear end is provided with a bent passage wall 802. In this way, it can be easily and detachably attached. A wiring (not shown) from the payout ball detection sensor 812 is connected to a relay board 830 described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 802 constituting the prize ball passage 810, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 860 formed on a passage lid plate portion 859 formed integrally with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality of 813 are formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 that engages with one locking portion 860 at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

  In addition, a circular motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball removal passage 811. This motor storage space 814 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 815 is accommodated in the inside. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed to the back side of the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 with a pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface thereof with screws 817. Then, in a state where the payout motor 815 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub-plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 passes through the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. The gear 843 is fixed.

  In addition, a space in the depth width direction in which the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball removal passage 811 are formed by covering the rear surface side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat sink 841. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is also accommodated in the inside. Since the motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 and the distribution space 805 in which the sprocket 807 described above is arranged are formed in an extremely close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the unit base body 801 in the vertical direction The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 800 can be made compact.

  Further, the unit base body 801 is provided with a guide protrusion 819 that guides the ball extracted at the lowermost end of the above-described ball extraction path 811 to the back side of the prize ball unit 800, and the guide protrusion 819 The guided sphere is guided to a ball outlet connecting passage 880 described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform). A locking elastic claw 820 that locks the connecting lid member 786 of the above-described ball passage unit 770 protrudes from the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and the prize ball unit 800 is mounted on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the button insertion engagement hole 821 and the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 for removably attaching to the rear wall 546 and the gear cover 866 with the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween. Is provided.

  The button insertion engagement hole 821 is provided on one side of the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and a rod-like attachment / detachment button 822 is slidably attached in the depth width direction. Corresponds to the locking elastic claw 564 formed on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 has a concave shape so that the distal end portion of the lock elastic claw 564 enters. The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 engages with an engaging protrusion 565 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the shaft support side rear wall 546. By pushing down downward, the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 are engaged. In the engaged state, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged with each other, so that the upward movement of the prize ball unit 800 cannot be performed.

  Note that the hook-shaped engagement portions 824 are formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 801. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched therebetween is long and protrudes toward the rear surface, and is a through hole formed in the unit sub-plate 825. After passing through 858, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are coupled with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched by fitting the screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866 to correspond to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866. doing.

  The structure of the unit sub-plate 825 that covers the unit base body 801 will be described. The unit sub-plate 825 is a composite that covers the bent passage 803 portion, the distribution space 805 portion, and the prize ball passage 810 portion of the unit base body 801. A payout motor 815 is attached to a resin plate, and an aluminum heat radiating plate 841 that covers the downstream portion of the ball extraction passage 811 is attached. A relay board region 826 for attaching the relay board 830 is formed on the top side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 825, and a plurality of gears 843, 844, 847 and detection are provided below the relay board area 826. A gear region 840 to which the disk 850 is attached is formed.

  The relay substrate region 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for mounting the relay substrate 830 are provided along the square shape, and a substrate cover 835 (described later) is formed above and below the one side vertical side. An engagement groove portion 828 that engages with the engagement protrusion 836 is formed, and a locking claw portion 829 that engages with the locking projection portion 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other side vertical side. Further, the relay board region 826 is formed with a button insertion hole 834 through which the attach / detach button 822 is inserted and an attachment boss part 832 for fixing the relay board 830 with screws (not shown).

  The relay board 830 attached to the above-described relay board area 826 includes wiring from the above-described payout ball detection sensor 812, payout motor 815, and sensor 855 described later provided in the prize ball unit 800, and a payout control board 1186 (described below). 25 and 72), a plurality of connectors are provided for this purpose, and a button insertion hole 833 through which the detachable button 822 is inserted and a mounting hole 831 corresponding to the mounting boss portion 832 are provided. And are drilled. Thus, the relay board 830 is mounted on the mounting rib 827 in the relay board area 826, and the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned with each other and fixed with screws (not shown). It can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the plate 825.

  Further, the relay board 830 attached as described above is covered with the board cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape having a substantially square front side open, and an engagement projection 836 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one vertical side, and a locking projection 837 is formed on the substantially central side of the other vertical side. ing. A button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Thus, after the engagement protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is inserted into the engagement groove portion 828 of the relay substrate region 826 and engaged, the engagement protrusion 837 and the engagement claw portion 829 are engaged with each other. The relay substrate 830 can be covered with the substrate cover 835. On the other hand, when removing, the latching claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the latching projection 837 and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally forward to engage the engagement projection 836 and the engagement groove 828. The engagement with can be released. In the state where the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 passes through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838. Yes. Further, the wiring connected to the relay substrate 830 is drawn out from the connection opening 839.

  Next, the gears 843, 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 provided in the gear region 840 formed in the unit sub plate 825 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 projects through the shaft insertion hole 842 formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825 and protrudes to the surface (rear side) of the unit sub plate 825. The first gear 843 (drive gear) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 843, a second gear 844 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the first gear 843 is press-fitted into the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866 and is formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. A shaft 845, the other end of which is supported in the shaft hole 846, is rotatably provided. Above the second gear 844, a third gear 847 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the second gear 844 is a unit sub-plate. A shaft 848 press-fitted in a shaft hole 849 formed in 825 is rotatably provided. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (driven gear) that meshes with the third gear 847 is rotatably provided on a rotary shaft 808 that supports the sprocket 807. .

  As shown in FIG. 55, the tip of the motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in a receiving hole formed in the gear cover 866. The rotating shaft 808 is supported by being pressed into a bearing cylinder 806 formed on the unit base body 801 and supported at the other end by a bearing hole formed on the gear cover 866. The sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 805 through a shaft through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the 840, and the detection disk 850 is formed in the space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866. Is pivotally supported. However, as shown in FIG. 55, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the center front surface portion of the detection disk 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disk 850 are integrated around the rotation shaft 808. It is designed to rotate. Accordingly, when the dispensing motor 815 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 850 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 807 (in the illustrated case). 3) detection notches 851 are formed. This detection notch 851 is detected by a light emitting / receiving sensor 855 (rotation position detecting means) provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 825. . The sensor 855 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If an abnormal rotation is detected by the sensor 855 (mostly a ball-engaged state by the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball-engaged state). It is. Note that the number of balls actually paid out is detected by the payout ball detection sensor 812 provided in the prize ball passage 810 and used for counting. As shown in FIG. 55, the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also sandwiched between substrate mounting portions formed on the gear cover 866.

  As described above, of the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 845 that is press-fitted to the gear cover 866 side. As a result, the gear cover 866 covering the gear region 840 is provided. A mounting hole 867 is formed at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 that protrudes from the unit base body 801 and passes through the through hole 858 of the unit sub-plate 825. The mounting hole 867 and the mounting boss 823 are aligned with each other while meshing the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side with the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub-plate 825 side. In this state, the base unit body 451 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed in a state where the unit sub plate 825 is sandwiched by screwing with the screw 868 from the rear surface of the gear cover 866. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, there is a wiring processing piece 869 that hangs and collects wiring connected to the relay board 830 (for example, wiring connecting the relay board 830 and a payout control board 1186 described later). Projected.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above. In the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub-plate 825, the relay board 830, the board cover 835, and the gear cover 866 are assembled, as shown in FIG. The cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 815 is positioned below the bent passage 803 through which the ball to be taken out is guided. Further, the unit base body 801 includes a sprocket 807 arranged in a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and a depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed therein, and the rotation of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825 is rotated by the sprocket 807. A rotation transmission member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844, 847, and a gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) for transmitting to the shaft 808 is provided, and in the distribution space 805 of the dispensing motor 815 and the bending passage 803. A plurality of gears 843, 844, 84 provided in the gear region 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 825 with the sprocket 807 serving as a payout member disposed. It has become a consolidated structure to be driven to rotate by 850 (852). That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are accommodated within the depth width of the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. In addition, the rotation transmission members (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844 and 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that connect the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are connected to the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 can be made thinner than the one in which a payout motor and a part of the sprocket are arranged outside the ball passage.

  In addition, such a prize ball unit 800 has a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 formed in a single passage shape, so Thinning is achieved. That is, unlike the conventional case in which the payout motor 815 protrudes to the front side, the rear side or the side of the prize ball unit, when attached to the rear side of the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, Any part of the prize ball unit 800 can be structured not to protrude further rearward. 55, the front end portion of the payout motor 815 is configured to slightly protrude from the rear surface of the unit base body 801. This protruding portion is formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as shown in FIG. Since it faces the front portion of the main body frame 3 from the lower discharge motor escape opening 572, as a result, it protrudes by a dimension obtained by subtracting the thickness of the shaft support side rear wall 546 from the protruding dimension. Thus, the amount of protrusion toward the front side relative to the shaft support side rear wall 546 is small. In addition, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game board 4 is provided between the pivot side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 800 is attached and the back surface of the game board 4. A storage space for storing the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus can be increased in the depth width direction.

  Further, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the pivot support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 47, the hook-shaped engagement portion 824, the engagement protrusion 565, After the alignment, the lower end of the prize ball unit 800 is hooked in the locking groove 573, and the prize ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565. The lower side wall 546 is pressed down while being in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging protrusion 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. When the prize ball unit 800 is moved upward, the respective engagement states are easily released. To prevent this, the lock elastic claw 564 is engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821. It is supposed to be.

  That is, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged to prevent the prize ball unit 800 from moving upward in the attached state. As described above, after the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball path unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claws 820, so that the ball path of the ball path unit 770 drops. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 can be communicated with each other through a passage constituted by a pair of passage walls 790. When the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is connected to the prize ball entrance 927 of the full tank unit 900 described in detail later, and the downstream end of the ball removal path 811 is connected to the ball removal connection path. Connected to the upstream end of 880.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 800 is removed, the engagement by the latching elastic claws 820 is released and the connecting lid member 786 is rotated forward, and then the detachable button 822 is pressed to release the locking elastic claws 564. It is moved to the front side to release the engagement between the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821, and then the prize ball unit 800 is pulled upward with the detachable button 822 pressed, and the prize ball unit 800. By releasing the engagement between the lower end portion of the lens and the locking groove 573 and the engagement between the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 and pulling out the prize ball unit 800 to the front side, Easy to remove.

<Full tank unit>
The full tank unit 900 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 62. 56 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900. FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900. FIG. 58 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. 59 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 60 is a partially broken perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610, 61 is a cross-sectional view taken along the bottom rocking plate 907 provided in the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610.

  As described above, the full tank unit 900 is mounted and fixed on the full tank unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 901 and a lid body 926 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. The box main body 901 is configured such that the sphere that has flowed in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the outlet 921. Therefore, a side guide passage 902 that guides a sphere that has flowed in from a prize ball inlet 927 formed in the lid 926 to the side from one end to the other end is formed in the upstream portion. A side guide receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the sphere toward the side is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 902 directly below the prize ball entrance 927, and the side guide passage is provided. A buffer member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of 902 to receive the impact of the sphere flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guide the sphere downstream.

  In addition, the sphere that collides with the buffer member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is guided to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the sphere in the side guide passage 902 after changing the direction to the downstream side. A reverse side guide passage 905 is formed. The sphere that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 905 is then guided to the front guide passage 920 formed forward and the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920 of the plate unit 300 described above. Guided to prize ball contact 451.

  By the way, a bottom surface opening 906 is formed on the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 905 so as to open over the entire bottom surface, and the bottom surface swing plate 907 is closed so that the bottom surface swinging plate 907 can swing. ing. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape having an open top surface, and a pair of shaft projections 911 project from the side walls in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. A circular spring mounting recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom surface opening 906. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 907 that closes the bottom opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is semicircular that is pivotally supported by fitting to the pivot projection 911 when viewed from the front on the downstream side of the bottom surface. A bearing portion 908 is formed to project.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 61, a spring locking projection 910 that locks the upper end of the spring 913 protrudes downward from the center of the back surface of the bottom rocking plate 907. Therefore, the bottom rocking plate 907 is biased in the direction in which the upstream side is always rocked upward by the biasing force of the spring 913. The spring 913 does not swing the bottom rocking plate 907 downward even when a normal number of payout balls (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom rocking plate 907 at a time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or greater than the payout number is formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom swing plate 907. Further, a detection protrusion 909 protrudes forward on the upstream side of the bottom rocking plate 907. The detection protrusion 909 passes through the communication hole 929 and is positioned in a switch storage space 914 described below when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom rocking plate 907 is fitted and supported on the shaft support protrusion 911. It has become.

  In addition, a switch storage space 914 for storing the full tank switch 916 is integrally formed on the outer side of the upstream end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905 above the switch storage space 914. A mounting piece 917 of the switch holder 915 that holds the full switch 916 is fixed to the portion 918 by a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch composed of a projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  Further, a foul ball passage 922 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 905. As shown in FIG. 60, the foul ball passage 922 is bent and formed such that the foul ball entrance 923 communicates with the foul port 610 described above and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 920. Has been. For this reason, the foul ball taken into the foul port 610 is guided from the foul ball inlet 923 through the bent foul ball passage 922 to the front guide passage 920, and further through the outlet 921 and the prize ball connecting rod 451 to the dish unit. Returned to 300.

  The box main body 901 includes engagement pieces that are engaged with unit engagement grooves 532 formed in the full unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923. A latching projection 925 that engages with a latching piece 928 formed on the lid body 926 is formed while a projection 924 is provided. The latching protrusion 925 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right side walls of the box main body 901.

  On the other hand, the lid body 926 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 902, the reverse side guide passage 905, the front guide passage 920, and the foul ball passage 922 of the box main body 901. A square prize ball inlet 927 is opened in the passage 902 at a position corresponding to the upstream end. Further, around the lid 926, a latching piece 928 for engaging with the latching projection 925 of the box main body 901 projects downward.

  In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 56, the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800 are moved upstream from the prize ball entrance 927 to the side guide passage 902. It enters and is guided toward the side by the side guide receiving portion 903 and collides with the buffer member 904. The sphere colliding with the buffer member 904 is guided in the reverse side guide passage 905 toward the downstream side in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 902 and guided to the front guide passage 920, and the front guide passage 920. From the exit 921 through the prize ball communication rod 451 to the dish unit 300. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul ball entrance 923 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 922 and joined to the front guide passage 920, and passes through the prize ball contact hole 451 from the outlet 921 of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the dish unit 300.

  In normal times, when the sphere naturally flows in the full tank unit 900, when the sphere moves from the side guide passage 902 to the reverse side guide passage 905, it falls to the bottom rocking plate 907. Since the elastic force of the spring 913 is strong when the number of normal prize balls is paid out, the bottom rocking plate 907 does not rock, and the detection protrusion 909 is a light projecting / receiving method as shown by the solid line in FIG. The full tank switch 916 is placed between the projector and the light receiver, and the switch is not conductive (OFF). On the other hand, when the prize balls are stored in the dish unit 300 and the full tank unit 900 is also filled with balls, the bottom fluctuations formed in the entire upstream area of the front guide path 920 and the reverse side guide path 905 are formed. The bottom rocking plate 907 rocks downward against the biasing force of the spring 913 due to the pressure of the sphere stored on the moving plate 907, and the detection protrusion 909 is projected as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. The light receiving full tank switch 916 is disconnected from the light projector and the light receiver, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotational driving of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 is stopped (if the ON signal is derived while the predetermined number of prize balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls). Will be stopped after it has been paid out).

  As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is operated by the bottom rocking plate 907 having a width substantially the same as the width of the bottom of the path of the path through which the ball flows (in the illustrated case, the reverse side guide path 905). 916 is actuated and biased by a biasing member (spring 913) so that the bottom rocking plate 907 swings when a certain amount of balls are placed without swinging due to the normal flow of the balls. Therefore, compared to the conventional case where a ball is placed on the bottom surface of some passages or the like to detect a clogged ball, the placement of the balls in that portion of the passage is not detected due to the clogging. It can be surely prevented. This can reliably detect a full tank.

  Moreover, in the full unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the full unit is formed on the main body frame as in the prior art because it is detachably attached to the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3. It is not necessary to form a passage for a full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the dispensing passage. Further, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 a zigzag passage, it is possible to guide to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. The awarded ball does not jump out of the dish unit 300. Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 922 that guides the foul ball joins the ball in the middle of the front guide passage 920 that pays out the award ball. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.

<Lock device>
Next, the lock device 1000 that is attached in the vertical direction along the rear side edge on the open side of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 71. 63 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the lock device 1000 and the main body frame 3, and FIG. 64 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing a latching structure of the lock device 1000 to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 66 is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 66 shows a detailed relationship between the lock device 1000 and the side walls 540 and 541 of the main body frame 3. 67 is an enlarged sectional view, FIG. 67 is a side view (A) of the locking device 1000, a perspective view (B) viewed from the front side, and FIG. 68 is a perspective view (A) viewed from the back side of the locking device 1000. ) Are perspective views (B) and (C) of a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000. FIG. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 1000, and FIG. Is a front view for explaining the operation of the body frame for sliding rod 1050, FIG. 71 is a front view for explaining the action of the anti-fraud members 1023,1032.

  The locking device 1000 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. A plurality of (three in the illustrated example) lock locking holes 548 formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the rising portions of the first side wall 540 and the upper part of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540 The U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000 described below is supported by the lock mounting hole 547 formed by being cut out in the middle and the lock mounting hole 547 formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, the locking device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding frame 1040 for the main body, the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame cannot be illegally slid. The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 are attached to the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and slidably providing a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 therein. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is concentrated on a base body having an L-shaped cross section. As described above, the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is greatly increased, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased. A mounting structure that allows the locking device 1000 to be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3 by reducing the width of the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment by making the dimension between the outer periphery and the outer periphery extremely small. It is because it improved as. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base body 1001 is mounted so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 have a tamper-proof structure in which the U-shaped base 1001 is completely covered except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065.

  First, a rectangular hook penetration opening 1002 through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 pass is opened on the closed side opposite to the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 and on the closed side. Further, a screw fixing portion 1003 protrudes in the horizontal direction at the upper part and the middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 69) that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, and further, the side surface 1001a (not in close contact with the first side wall 540 on the open side) A locking projection 1004 is formed in a protruding manner at the upper end and middle portion of FIG.

  The screw stoppers 1003 and the locking protrusions 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The locking protrusions 1004 are inserted into the lock locking holes 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. (See FIG. 64) In this state, since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 coincide with each other, the locking device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. can do. The locking device 1000 is mounted not only on the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached by fixing the lock attachment hole 547 with a screw (not shown).

  In addition, when mounting, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked, and the U-shaped Screw fixing portions 1003 formed at two locations on the closed side (rear portion) of the base body 1001 and screw fixing portions 1003 formed on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are formed in the lock mounting holes 547. Since the structure is fixed with screws, the front portion of the locking device 1000 is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the locking locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw locking portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. In addition, since the lower portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base body 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure (or a fixed structure) at the front portion protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. On the other hand, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. Therefore, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the locking structure of the front part is not loosened as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front part is formed on the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. is there.

  Further, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided in the U-shaped substrate 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 in the stored state. it can. That is, one rivet slot 1042 is formed in each of the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are respectively formed in the main frame sliding rod 1050. By passing the rivet 1006 through the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can move upward, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can move downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet slot 1055, 1061 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and as shown in FIG. A rivet 1006 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 of the sliding rod 1040.

  Further, a tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed on the closed side of the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001, and at the front end of the side 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the body frame 3 on the open side. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 is provided projecting sideways, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are provided on a side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. The fraud prevention notch 1007 is configured such that a stopper piece 1027 of a first fraud prevention member 1023 described later advances and retreats. This will be described in detail later. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 has a front end of the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The lock mounting piece 1008 is formed with a lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and a mounting hole formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010. Mounting holes 1014 for mounting 1013 with screws 1012 are formed in two upper and lower positions, and further, screw fixing portions 1003 for mounting the lower part of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The insertion vertical opening 1020 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. The spring locking piece 1021 is for locking the spring 1035 provided on the tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032, and the clearance lateral hole 1022 constitutes a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It is. This point will be described in detail later.

  The cylinder lock 1010 attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 will be described. The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock body fixed to the front of the lock attachment board 1011, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body is a lock attachment board. The engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement projection piece 1017 that engages with the lowering engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating. The cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above has a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 and mounting holes 1013 and lock mounting pieces 1008 formed at two positions on the lock mounting substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by making the mounting holes 1014 coincide with each other and screwed with screws 1012.

  Next, fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 are for preventing the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally lowered by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key. . Therefore, each of the anti-tamper members 1023 and 1032 has a structure in which the first anti-tamper member 1023 and the second anti-tamper member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is swingable around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the swing shaft hole 1025 is formed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 described above. Of the insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050, the lowermost insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 1026 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 1020 on the plate-like surface, and the second engaging protruding piece 1018 is formed in the protruding piece insertion hole 1026. It can be inserted. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the upward engagement hole 1045 of the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The second engagement protrusion 1018 is engaged. In addition, a slanting portion 1024 is an outline line obliquely above the opening position of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. The inclined portion 1024 contacts the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, and the first engaging protrusion 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 are rotated when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. , The first fraud prevention member 1023 swings about the swing shaft hole 1025 (clockwise rotation in FIG. 71B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding on an outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a restriction protruding piece 1031 is provided below the stopper piece portion 1027. A pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 are formed vertically on the front portion of the restricting protrusion 1031. The stopper piece 1027 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when the body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is engaged. This is to prevent unauthorized sliding. Further, in the restricting protruding piece 1031, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected by a spring 1035, and the second tamper-proof member 1032 is biased when connected by the spring 1035. The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 1029 is for fixing the guide pin 1028. With the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the U-shaped body. Further, the connection hole 1030 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 with a connection pin 1034.

  The second tamper-proof member 1032 connected to the first tamper-proof member 1023 is formed of a reverse “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 is formed at one upper end thereof, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end. A stop hole 1036 is formed, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 1033 is for connecting with the connection pin 1034 so as to coincide with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and one end of the spring locking hole 1036 is a spring locking piece of the U-shaped base body 1001. The other end of the spring 1035 locked to 1021 is locked. Further, the abutting portion 1037 abuts on a closing projection 41 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 will be described in detail later.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally formed forward and downward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the one side. Projected. The door frame hook portion 1041 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, 3 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 549 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) formed on the door 3 and engages with a hook cover 227 (see FIG. 15) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 227 are locked with each other by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. It can be canceled.

  Further, a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 1040. A guide projection 1043 is provided below the elongated hole 1042 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet long hole 1042 is a hole through which the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 passes, and the rivet 1006 does not interfere with the ascending operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in contact with the upper end portion of the rivet slot 1042. The guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. And the sliding motion 1050 for the main body frame are guided.

  Further, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, one end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1046, and the other end of the spring 1048 is the main body frame sliding rod 1050. The upper hook member 1051 is engaged with a spring hook portion 1057. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 1040, a contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape. This abutting elastic piece 1047 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be internally used for the door frame. This prevents the sliding rod 1040 from rattling.

  Further, a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 are formed in the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1044 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 1045 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. An escape notch portion 1049 that is a notch larger in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 is formed at the lower rear side of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The escape notch 1049 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 so as to be surely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It is composed of That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  By the way, the upper hook member 1051 is provided with a hook portion 1054 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet long hole 1055 and a projecting piece moving hole 1056 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 1057 and a connecting hole 1058 are formed at the lower end of the vertical side, and contact portions 1059 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing projection 38 provided on the inner side on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed.

  The rivet slot 1055 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and in a normal state in which the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1055. The rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055. Thereby, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. As described above, the guide piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1056 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The spring hook portion 1057 is for locking the other end of the spring 1048 as described above. The connecting hole 1058 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1059 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1059 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001, and the upper hook member 1051 is smoothly moved without rattling. It is for doing so.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper portion to the lower portion of the plate surface portion with the elongated rivet hole 1061, the descending engagement hole 1062, and the play hole 1063. One moving hole 1064 is sequentially formed, a connecting hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, an engagement notch 1066 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side, and the upper and lower sides are contacted. A contact portion 1067 is formed. The hook portion 1065 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing protrusion 41 provided on the lower part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 1061 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1061, The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061.

  As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 1062 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 1063 has a tip portion of the second engagement protrusion 1018 that does not interfere with the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. Further, the connecting hole 1060 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1067 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1067 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 can be smoothly performed without rattling. It is for making.

  The members constituting the locking device 1000 have been described above. To attach the locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053. In this state, the guide protrusion 1043 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet length The holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and in the overlapped state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001. However, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are placed in the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001. You type. Thereafter, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

  At this time, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet slots 1055, 1061, 1042. However, when the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connection pin 1034 and the guide pin 1028 is illustrated in the pin hole 1029. The guide pin 1028 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021 and 1036, and the second fraud prevention member 1032. Is in contact with the restricting protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with screws 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement projection piece 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip end portion is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the locking device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, as described above, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed on the main body frame 3. While being inserted into the hook hole 549, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the locking locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward, and in this state the screw fixing portion 1003 and screw fixing protruding horizontally By aligning the portion 1003 with the lock mounting hole 547 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. . In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, while the rear portion Since the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the U-shaped base 1001 are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Compared to the case where the locking structure is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the backlash does not occur.

  By the way, an operation of the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In the state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the hook cover 227 of the door frame 5 are locked. Yes. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 which are connected are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, since the locking projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are released, the main body frame 3 is pulled by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 70A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is forced into the closing projections 38, 41 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered downward, the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are locked again. The body frame sliding rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, since the hook state 227 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released, the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 70A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the slope is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side slope portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is hooked to the hook cover 227 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is lifted upward, and finally the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 227 are locked again, and the door frame is brought into contact with the upper end of the door frame. The sliding rod 1040 moves down and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the side surface in the vertical direction of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. For this reason, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are securely locked in the entire length in the vertical direction, and an illegal act of forcibly opening the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and inserting an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from there There is also the advantage that it cannot be done.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to this embodiment releases the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like to the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering the same may be performed. Are not allowed to perform such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 are It is in a contact state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is intrusion prevention notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. Therefore, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the main body frame 3 is properly unlocked, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and the stopper piece 1027 also moves away from the tamper-proof cutout 1007. For this reason, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the locking state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, and thus the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 71 (A) is obtained. . For this reason, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. Since the sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, they are completely covered. Even if an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, the both sides 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 close the closed space Since the intrusion is prevented, fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

  As described above in detail, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has an extremely thin U-shaped base 1001 for a door frame, compared with a lock device whose lateral width is concentrated on a conventional L-shaped base. The sliding hook 1040 and the main body frame sliding hook 1050 are slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is lower than the lower end side of the game board. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 can be 3 can be firmly attached to the back side. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside and the main body Since the frame sliding rod 1050 is completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, a main body provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. Unauthorized acts such as lowering the frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be easily performed.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked. Since the screw fixing portions 1003 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 547 with screws, the locking device 1000 The front portion of the lock device is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the lock locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, so that the structure is extremely simple. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3.

  In the embodiment described above, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the cylinder lock through hole 526 of the main body frame 3 are formed near the upper portion of the lock mounting piece 1008 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. However, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 penetrates the lock attachment piece 1008. Alternatively, a structure may be employed in which the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 526. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screwing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in close contact with the first side wall 540 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 The L-shaped base (lock base) is omitted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a and the first side wall 540 of the L-shaped base (lock base). It is good also as a structure which accommodates the sliding rod 1050. FIG. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

<Board unit>
Next, the board unit 1100 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 72 and FIG. 72 is a perspective view of the substrate unit 1100 as viewed from the back side, and FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the substrate unit 1100 as viewed from the front side.

  The substrate unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIGS. 22 and 24) formed in the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. As shown in FIG. The board holder 1101 is configured by attaching various boards such as a door relay board, a power board box 1103, a terminal board box 1104, a payout control board box 1105, a main drawer relay board, and a sub drawer relay board. Among the above boards, the door relay board, the power board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105 are attached to the rear side of the frame board holder 1101 in the front-rear direction, and are attached to the main drawer relay board. The auxiliary drawer relay board is attached to the front side of the frame board holder 1101. A shield plate is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from a power supply board or the like, and the main drawer relay board and the sub drawer relay board are covered with a board cover 1109. Installed.

  First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed of a synthetic resin in a horizontally long shape, and as shown in the drawing, a wiring opening 1124 is formed on one side of the rear surface side. A recess for the relay board for attaching the door relay board is formed. At both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 1101, attachment pieces 1122 for attaching the substrate unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 are projected outward, and the attachment pieces 1122 are attached to the attachment hole portions of the main body frame 3. The board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to 527 (see FIG. 22). As shown in FIG. 24, the attachment hole 527 is formed with an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the attachment piece 1122. Furthermore, a wiring latching piece 1123 for locking the wiring is formed on the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 73) of the frame substrate holder 1101.

  Further, an out-sphere passage 1119 is formed in an inverted L shape substantially at the center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. The out ball passage 1119 is formed broadly on the upper side so as to correspond to the above-described out port 606 (see FIG. 31), the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 22), and the drop port 629 (see FIG. 29). In addition, the downstream side is formed narrow so that the spheres are discharged in a row. Therefore, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 1119 is positioned behind the passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606 as shown in FIG. ing. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball without ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119 toward the outside of the pachinko gaming machine (generally, an island recovery basket).

  The board cover 1109 includes a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board, and a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board. A rectangular connector opening for projecting outward is formed.

  The payout control board box 1105 includes a box main body to which a horizontally long rectangular payout control board is fixed, and a cover body that is attached to the box main body and covers the surface of the payout control board. One side of the box main body and the cover body are engaged, and the other side is caulked and fixed by a separation cutting portion 1183. Thus, in order to separate the box main body and the cover body, the separation cannot be performed unless the separation cutting portion 1183 is cut. However, caulking and fixing in the separation / cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (in the illustrated case, four locations indicated by numerals 1 to 4) with a caulking member. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of illegal separation, a cut trace remains, so that it is possible to immediately know whether there has been an illegal act.

<Cover body>
Next, the cover body 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6, 24, and 28. The cover body 1250 covers the rear surface opening 580 of the main body frame 3, and is inserted from above into a cover body supporting cylinder portion 575 formed on one side of the back surface of the main body frame 3 at one of the upper, middle, and lower sides on one side. A shaft support pin 1251 is formed, and an engagement piece 1252 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is formed at substantially the center of the other side. Thus, by inserting the shaft support pin 1251 of the cover body 1250 into the cover body support cylinder portion 575, the cover body 1250 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the engagement piece 1252 is inserted into the cover body engagement groove 785. By locking, the cover body 1250 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back of various components provided on the game board 4 can be protected. In the case of releasing, the engagement between the engagement piece 1252 and the cover body engagement groove 785 may be released.

  Further, in the cover body 1250 in the illustrated case, a locking hole 1253 is formed on the upper and lower sides of the engagement piece 1252 on the open side, and a locking protruding hook piece 570 protruding from the locking wall 569 of the main body frame 3 is provided. A through hole 1254 to be penetrated is formed, and although not shown in detail, a connection operation opening 1255, a standing wall, an abutting protrusion, and a reinforcing rib are formed in the same manner as a cover body 1270 according to a second embodiment described below. Has been. The connection operation opening 1255, the standing wall, the contact protrusion, and the reinforcing rib are provided at the same position as the connection operation opening 1283, the standing wall 1284, the contact protrusion 1285, and the reinforcing rib 1286 of the cover body 1270 according to the second embodiment. Have the same function. Then, in a state where the cover body 1250 is closed, the stop hole 1253 of the cover body 1250 and the stop hole 568 on the main body frame 3 side are made to coincide with each other and fastened with screws (not shown), so The rear opening 580 can be closed and fixed. Since the locking protrusion 570 passes through the through hole 1254 of the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, for example, a lock such as a padlock is locked. The cover body 1250 can be opened only by the person in charge having the padlock key.

<Detailed configuration of game board>
The detailed configuration of the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 74A is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 74A is an enlarged front view showing a status indicator in the game board. FIG. 75 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the diagonally right front, and FIG. 76 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the diagonally left front. FIG. 77 is a perspective view of the game board viewed obliquely from behind, and FIG. 78 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. FIG. 79 is an enlarged perspective view showing the vicinity of the stage in FIG. Further, FIG. 80 is a perspective view disassembled for each main member constituting the game board and viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded view for each main member constituting the game board and viewed from an oblique rear. FIG.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and a game ball as a game medium is driven when a player operates an operation handle portion 461. A frame-shaped front component member 601 that defines and forms the outer periphery of the game area 605, and a rear end of the game area 605 that is disposed so as to close the frame of the front component member 601 on the rear side of the front component member 601 A plate-shaped gaming panel 600 that can be formed, a frame-shaped center accessory 1400 that is attached to the center of the gaming area 605 on the front side of the gaming panel 600, and an out side in the gaming area 605 below the center acting 1400 An attacker unit 1500 disposed on the upper side of the mouth 606 and outside the game area 605 on the upper side of the attacker unit 1500 and on the lower left side of the center accessory 1400. , A state indicator 1800 that can be displayed on the lower right side of the front component 601 outside the game area 605 and can display a game state, and a back box 621 on the rear side of the game panel 600. A back unit 2000 that is attached to the rear unit 2000, a liquid crystal display device 640 that is detachably supported on the rear side of the back box 621 in the back unit 2000 and can display a predetermined effect image, and a rear panel of the game panel 600 And a board substrate holder 623 which covers the lower part of the back unit 2000 and the back box 621 and which fixes the main control board box 624 to the rear side.

  The center accessory 1400 in the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described in detail later, but is arranged at the approximate center in the game area 605, and the game ball can roll in the horizontal direction on the inner peripheral lower surface of the frame. In addition, a role-side rolling surface 1402 that can be released into the front game area 605 and an opening toward the game area 605 that is arranged on the outer periphery on the left side of the frame can enter the game ball in the game area 605 A gate entrance 1404, and a gate exit 1406 that is opened to the inside of the game area 605 below the gate entrance 1404 and into which the game ball that has entered the gate entrance 1404 is released, and enters the gate entrance 1404. The game ball is detected by the gate sensor 3012 (see FIG. 103) and then released from the gate outlet 1406 into the game area 605. Further, the center accessory 1400 includes a warp inlet 1410 disposed on the left outer periphery of the frame below the gate outlet 1406 and opening toward the game area 605, and a left inner side of the frame below the warp inlet 1410. And a warp outlet 1412 that opens to the periphery.

  The attacker unit 1500 in the game board 4 will be described in detail later. As shown in the figure, the attacker unit 1500 is disposed below the role-side rolling surface 1402 in the center role 1400. Three general winning ports 1502 that are allowed to be received, a first start port 1504 that is arranged immediately below a predetermined position of the role-side rolling surface 1402 in the center role 1400 and that is capable of receiving game balls at all times, A game ball can be received in accordance with the result of the normal lottery that is placed under the starting port 1504 and entered by the gate sensor 3012 when the game ball enters the gate receiving port 1404 of the center accessory 1400 and is detected by the gate sensor 3012. Alternatively, the second starting port 1506 that cannot be received, the large winning port 1510 that is disposed below the second starting port 1506 and that is horizontally long and opens in a rectangular shape, and the large winning port 1 10 substantially opening and closing piece 1512 capable of opening and closing plate of a rotatably axially supported by winning opening 1510 along the lower end of, and an attacker solenoid 1518 for opening and closing the opening and closing piece 1512.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, the back unit 2000 in the game board 4 comes into contact with the rear surface of the game panel 600 and can be attached to the rear surface of the game panel 600, and has substantially the same shape as the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. A back unit base 2100 having an opening 2102, a stage member 2200 supported on the lower side and the front side of the opening 2102 in the back unit base 2100, and a swinging body supported on the right side and the front side of the opening 2102 in the back unit base 2100. A unit 2300, a traversing body unit 2500 disposed behind the stage member 2200 and the oscillating body unit 2300 and capable of closing the opening 2102 of the back unit base 2100; It is an open box shape and the liquid crystal display device 640 is placed on the rear wall. A back case 2150 having an opening 2152 having substantially the same shape as the display screen and attached to the back unit base 2100, and a peripheral control board box 2050 supported below the traversing body unit 2500 and behind the back unit base 2100. And mainly. The stage member 2200 in the back unit 2000 is provided with a stage start port 2220 at substantially the center in the left-right direction.

  In the game board 4 of this embodiment, the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 1410 of the center accessory 1400 are supplied from the warp outlet 1412 to the stage member 2200 of the back unit 2000. Then, the game ball supplied to the stage member 2200 rolls on the stage member 2200, and if it is not received by the stage start port 2220, it is discharged onto the accessory-side rolling surface 1402 of the center accessory 1400, An accessory is released into the game area 605 after rolling on the rolling surface 1402.

  In the game board 4 (pachinko machine 1) of this example, the general winning port 1502, the first starting port 1504, the second starting port 1506, the big winning port 1510 in the attacker unit 1500, and the stage starting port 2220 in the back unit 2000 are received. The received game balls are detected by a general winning port sensor 2110, a first start port sensor 2112, a second start port sensor 1522, a count sensor 1524, and a stage start port sensor 2114, respectively. Depending on the game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the pachinko machine 1, the game balls are received in the first start port 1502, the second start port 1504, and the stage start port 2220, and the first start port sensor 2112, the second start port sensor 1522, and the stage start port. When detected by the sensor 2114, a predetermined special lottery result is drawn, and the open / close piece 1512 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern according to the special lottery result (for example, “big hit”, “small hit”, etc.). The winning opening 1510 can be received.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 74, the status indicator 1800 in the game board 4 of the present example is disposed on the outer side of the game area 605 and below the front component member 601 on the right side of the out port 606. 1504 and the first special symbol display 1802 variably displayed when the game ball is received at the stage start port 2220, and the second special symbol variably displayed when the game ball is received at the second start port 1506 The display 1804, the normal symbol display 1806 in which the variation display is started when the game ball enters the gate entrance 1404, the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804 are displayed during the variation display. A first special symbol memory number display 1808 for displaying the number of memories for which the start of variable display is suspended when a game ball is received at one start port 1504 or stage start port 2220; The second special symbol memory that displays the number of memories for which the start of the variable display is suspended when the game ball is received at the second starting port 1506 while the one special symbol display 1802 or the second special symbol display 1804 is displaying the variable A number indicator 1810 and a normal symbol memory number indicator 1812 for displaying the memory number for which the start of the variable display is suspended when the game ball enters the gate entrance 1404 while the normal symbol indicator 1806 is displaying the fluctuation. Yes.

  The first special symbol indicator 1802 and the second special symbol indicator 1804 of the status indicator 1800 are each composed of a 7-segment LED, and the first start port 1502 and the stage start port 2220 are selected depending on the combination of the segments. , And a special lottery result by the start winning to the second start port 1504 is suggested. Further, the normal symbol display 1806 is configured by LEDs that can emit light in two colors (red and green in this example), and the normal lottery result that is drawn when the game ball enters the gate entrance 1404 is displayed. It is suggested by the emission color. When a game ball enters the gate entrance 1404 and the normal symbol display 1806 emits light in a color (for example, green) that suggests hitting, the pair of movable pieces 1508 that close the second starting port 1506 has a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the game ball can be received at the second start port 1506 (winning is possible).

  The first special symbol memory number indicator 1808, the second special symbol memory number indicator 1810, and the normal symbol memory number indicator 1812 are each composed of two LEDs, and combinations of lighting and blinking of each LED. Indicates the number of memories reserved (for example, a maximum of four).

  In addition to the first special symbol memory number indicator 1808 and the second special symbol memory number indicator 1810, the status indicator 1800 includes a first start port 1504, a stage start port 2220, and a second start port 1506. When the open / close piece 1512 that opens and closes the big prize opening 1510 of the attacker unit 1500 is a “big hit” that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the number of rounds of the open / close piece 1512 (number of rounds) ) And a small hit indicator 1816 composed of one LED that lights up when the special lottery result is “small hit”. The round indicator 1814 includes three LEDs, and can display, for example, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, or “15R big hit” depending on the position of the LED to be lit. ing.

  Further, the status indicator 1800 displays the special lottery results drawn based on the start winnings to the first start port 1504, the stage start port 2220, and the second start port 1506, as "probability short-term win" ”,“ Short time reduction ”, or when the gaming state becomes“ Short time change ”state,“ Probability change ”state, or“ Short time ”state, it further includes a probability change / time reduction indicator consisting of one LED that lights in a predetermined color. Yes. This probability change / short time indicator 1818 is red when, for example, a special lottery result “Short per probability change time” is drawn or when the gaming state becomes “short time of probability change”, and as a special lottery result, ”Is drawn or when the gaming state is“ probably changed ”, the color is green, and when the special lottery result is“ Lots per hour ”, or when the gaming state is“ Time saving ”, the color is orange. The special lottery result, the game state, and the like can be displayed by lighting and flashing each.

[Center character, attacker unit, and side member]
The configuration of the center accessory 1400, the attacker unit 1500, and the side member 1600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82A is a perspective view of the center accessory, the attacker unit, and the side member viewed from the front, and FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the center accessory, the attacker unit, and the side member viewed from the rear. FIG. 83 is a side view of the center accessory as viewed from the direction of arrow A in FIG.

  First, as shown in the figure, the center accessory 1400 is a front part 1400a that projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 600, and a plate that extends outward from the rear end of the front part 1400a and contacts the front surface of the game panel 600. And a rear portion 1400c that extends outwardly from the flange portion 1400b and is inserted into the opening portion 600a. The game board 4 includes a flange portion 1400b having a shape and an outer periphery substantially extending along the inner periphery of the opening portion 600a of the gaming panel 600. The game area 605 in FIG. This center accessory 1400 is formed in a frame shape as a whole, and visually recognizes an effect image or the like displayed on the traversing body unit 2500 or the liquid crystal display device 640 in the back unit 2000 from the front (player side) through the frame. Be able to.

  The center accessory 1400 is provided with an accessory-side rolling surface 1402 on the inner peripheral lower surface in the frame of the front portion 1400a, in which a game ball can roll in the left-right direction and can be released to the front side. . This accessory-side rolling surface 1402 is formed such that both left and right ends are raised, and the embankment 1402a having a predetermined height disposed on the front end side except for the lowest position is the lowest. And a curved concave portion 1402b that extends in a fan shape in the left-right direction from the rear end toward the front end. When the game ball is supplied onto the accessory-side rolling surface 1402, it rolls in the left-right direction while being prevented from being released to the front side by the bank portion 1402a, and from the recess 1402b with a very high probability. It is released to the front side.

  Further, on the left outer periphery of the front portion 1400a of the center accessory 1400, there are a gate entrance 1404 that opens toward the game area 605 and allows a game ball in the game area 605 to enter, and below the gate entrance 1404. A gate outlet 1406 that opens into the game area 605, a gate passage 1408 that connects the gate inlet 1404 and the gate outlet 1406, and a gate that is disposed in the gate passage 1408 and that can detect a game ball that has entered the gate inlet 1404 A sensor and a warp inlet 1410 that opens toward the inside of the game area 605 below the gate outlet 1406 and into which a game ball can enter are provided. A game ball that has entered the gate entrance 1404 from within the game area 605 is detected by the gate sensor, and then is discharged from the gate exit 1406 into the game area 605 again through the gate passage 1408.

  Further, the center accessory 1400 includes a warp outlet 1412 that opens below the warp inlet 1410 and opens into the left inner peripheral frame of the rear portion 1400c, and a warp passage 1414 that connects the warp inlet 1410 and the warp outlet 1412. In addition. The game balls that have entered the warp inlet 1410 are discharged from the warp outlet 1412 through the warp passage 1414. By passing through the warp passage 1414, the game balls in the game area 605 are centered in the center role 1400. It can be moved into the frame.

  Further, on the upper outer periphery of the front portion 1400a of the center accessory 1400, a guide shelf 1416 inclined substantially linearly so as to have a lower left end on the left side from a substantially horizontal center, and on a right side from a substantially center in the left and right direction. And an arc-shaped outer peripheral wall 1418 extending substantially along the outer periphery of the game area 605 to the lower end of the game area 605. When the game ball driven into the upper portion of the game area 605 by the player's operation flows down substantially left on the center in the left-right direction, the game ball is guided to the left side of the center accessory 1400 by the guide shelf 1416 and left on the center accessory 1400 The opportunity to flow down the game area 605 and enter the gate entrance 1404, the warp entrance 1410, etc. is obtained. On the other hand, when the game ball flows down on the outer peripheral wall 1418 on the substantially right side in the left-right direction, it passes between the outer peripheral wall 1418 and the outer periphery of the game area 605 and is guided to the lower end of the game area 605 at once. You can not enjoy the movement.

  As shown in the figure, a plurality of protrusions 1418a are provided at predetermined intervals on the outer peripheral wall 1418 of the center accessory 1400, and the game ball that has flowed down along the outer peripheral wall 1418 at the lower portion of the outer peripheral wall 1418 is provided. A speed reduction part 1420 for reducing the speed is provided. The speed reduction portion 1420 includes a transparent front plate 1420a that extends outward from the front end of the outer peripheral wall 1418 and has a substantially fan shape along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral wall 1418. The front plate 1420a, The outer peripheral wall 1418 and the flange portion 1400b form a flow path through which a game ball can pass. Further, as shown in FIG. 83, the speed reduction portion 1420 has a protrusion extending in a direction substantially perpendicular to the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral wall 1418 at a position facing the rear surface of the front plate 1420a and the front plate 1420a in the flange portion 1400b. A plurality of strips 1420 b are provided alternately along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral wall 1418. The game balls that have flowed down along the outer peripheral wall 1418 are brought into contact with the alternately arranged ridges 1420b by the speed reducing portion 1420, whereby the flow formed by the outer peripheral wall 1418, the front plate 1420a, and the flange portion 1400b. It can flow down the road in a zigzag to reduce the flow speed. Accordingly, the game ball that has flowed down along the outer peripheral wall 1418 is decelerated by the speed reduction portion 1420 and enters the out port 606, and the game ball with momentum passes through the out port 606 and is the attacker unit. It is possible to prevent the 1500 or the side member 1600 from crashing into a portion protruding forward and being damaged.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the center accessory 1400 is arranged in the right frame portion and arranged in the center of the crescent-shaped main decorative body 1422 along the arc-shaped outer peripheral wall 1418, and is rotated in the approximate center of the upper frame portion. It further includes a petal-like rotating decorative body 1424 that is made possible. Although not shown in the figure, the main decorative body 1422 in the center accessory 1400 has a surface member 1422a on which a predetermined logo characterizing the concept of the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is formed, and a rear surface member 1422a arranged on the rear surface. A main decorative board 3126 (see FIG. 108) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a lens member (not shown) that is disposed between the main decorative board 3126 and the surface member 1422a and diffuses light from the LEDs. The surface member 1422a of the main decorative body 1422 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing the LEDs on the main decorative board 3126 to emit light.

  In addition, the rotational decoration body 1424 in the center accessory 1400 is formed in a petal shape and is supported by a petal decoration body 1424a that is rotatably supported around an axial center extending in the front-rear direction, and the rotational axis of the petal decoration body 1424a There is provided a petal motor 3128 to be driven (see FIG. 108) and a rotating body decoration board 1424b which is disposed on the rear side of the petal decoration body 1424a and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The rotating decoration body 1424 is configured such that the petal decoration body 1424a is rotationally driven by the petal motor 3128 according to the game situation and the like, and the LED of the rotating body decoration board 1424b is appropriately caused to emit light to thereby decorate the petals. The body 1424a can be decorated with light emission. Although not shown in detail, the rotating decorative body 1424 includes a motor gear that is rotated by a petal motor, a driven gear that meshes with the motor gear, a pulley gear that has a driving pulley that rotates integrally with the driven gear, and a petal. A petal pulley that rotates integrally with the decorative body 1424a, and a belt that is wound around the driving pulley of the petal pulley and the pulley gear are provided. The rotational driving of the petal motor 3128 is performed by the petal decoration via the gear, the pulley, and the belt. It is transmitted to the body 1424a.

  Further, the center accessory 1400 further includes a sub-decoration body 1426 disposed near the main decoration body 1422 below the accessory-side rolling surface 1402. As shown in the drawing, the sub-decoration body 1426 is an image of a bridge over a river. 1426a, and a bill portion 1426b simulating a bill such as a flower card. The tag portion 1426b in the sub-decoration body 1426 includes a rectangular frame body 1426c, a white plate-like display portion 1426d that closes the inside of the frame body 1426c and has translucency, and a rear side of the display portion 1426d. An arc-shaped first partition wall 1426e disposed substantially at the center in the up-down direction and having a raised center in the left-right direction, and a cylindrical second partition wall 1426f disposed above the first partition wall 1426e are provided (FIG. 105). (See (a)). As will be described in detail later, the bill portion 1426b appropriately turns on the LED of the stage decoration substrate 2012 arranged on the rear side, thereby causing the display portion 1426d to display “no pattern”, “芒”, “芒 to moon”. The three types of symbols can be displayed.

  In addition, the center accessory 1400 is disposed inside the right frame portion (main decoration body 1422) at the approximate center in the vertical direction, and can detect an object located within a predetermined range on the front surface of the game area 605. A sensor 1428 is further provided. The object detection sensor 1428 includes a light emitting unit 1428a that emits detection light including invisible light such as infrared rays in a predetermined forward direction, and a reflected light of the detection light that is disposed on the upper side of the light emitting unit 1428a and emitted from the light emitting unit 1428a. And a light receiving unit 1428b that can detect the player's hand moving up and down within a predetermined range in front of the game area 605. This object detection sensor 1428, for example, enables the detection of the object detection sensor 1428 to be effective in a predetermined gaming state, and also urges the liquid crystal display device 640 to move the hand up and down in front of the game area 605. Displaying images and detecting the hand moved by the player in front of the game area 605 is an opportunity to perform a predetermined effect, and enhances the interest by allowing the player to participate in the game effect. It is to be made.

  Next, as shown in the figure, the attacker unit 1500 includes a front portion 1500a that projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 600, and a plate that extends outward from the rear end of the front portion 1500a and contacts the front surface of the game panel 600. And a main body 1500c that protrudes rearward from the flange 1500b and can be inserted into a corresponding opening 600a in the game panel 600, and a role-side rolling surface 1402 of the center accessory 1400. Located on the underside. In the front portion 1500a of the attacker unit 1500, as described above, the three general winning holes 1502 in which the game balls can be received at all times, and the discharge balls 1420 in the center accessory 1400 are arranged immediately below the game balls. The first starting port 1504 that can be received, and a game ball that is arranged below the first starting port 1504 and enters the gate receiving port 1404 in the center accessory 1400 and is detected by the gate sensor, and is selected by lottery. According to the normal lottery result, a second starting port 1506 that can accept or cannot accept game balls is provided.

  The attacker unit 1500 includes a pair of movable pieces 1508 whose upper ends are free ends on the left and right sides of the second starting port 1506, and a position where the free ends of the pair of movable pieces 1508 are close to each other and away from each other. When the movable piece 1508 is in a substantially upright state (a state in which the free ends are close to each other), a pair of movable pieces is provided. Due to 1508 and the first start port 1506, the game ball cannot be received into the second start port 1506. On the other hand, when the upper ends (free ends) of the pair of movable pieces 1508 are separated from each other in a direction away from each other, the game ball can be received into the second start port 1506. Further, by expanding the pair of movable pieces 1508, it is possible to guide the game ball toward the second starting port 1506 by the movable piece 1508, and the probability of receiving the game ball with respect to the size of the second starting port 1506. Has become high.

  Also, the attacker unit 1500 is disposed below the second start opening 1506, and is supported by a large payout opening 1510 that is horizontally long and opened in a rectangular shape, and is rotatably supported substantially along the lower end of the big win opening 1510. A plate-shaped opening / closing piece 1512 capable of opening / closing the winning opening 1510 and an attacker solenoid 1518 (see FIG. 82B) for opening / closing the opening / closing piece 1512 are provided. The opening / closing piece 1512 is pivotally supported so that the lower side extending in the left-right direction is rotated about the rotation axis. When the opening / closing piece 1512 is in a substantially vertical state, the grand prize winning opening 1510 is closed, and the opening / closing piece is opened. By turning so that the upper side of 1512 moves forward, the grand prize opening 1510 is opened, and the game ball flowing down by the back surface of the opening / closing piece 1512 can be guided to the big prize opening 1510 side. It can be done. It should be noted that the special winning opening 1510 is normally closed by the opening / closing piece 1512 and cannot be received.

  Further, the attacker unit 1500 is provided with a plurality of guide pieces 1514 capable of guiding the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 1400 to the center side of the game area 605. Although not shown in the figure, the attacker unit 1500 includes an attacker unit decoration board 3130 (see FIG. 104) having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface thereof. The vicinity of 1502 can be illuminated and decorated.

  In addition, the attacker unit 1500 is provided with a guide rod 1520 for guiding the game balls received in the general winning opening 1502 and the first start opening 1504 to the back unit 2000 disposed on the rear side. The main body 1500c of the attacker unit 1500 includes a second start port sensor 1522 that detects a game ball received in the second start port 1506, and a count sensor 1524 that detects a game ball received in the big prize port 1510. The game balls received in the second start opening 1506 and the big prize opening 1510 are detected by the second start opening sensor 1522 and the count sensor 1524 and then released downward from the lower part of the main body 1500c. It is like that.

  Subsequently, as shown in the drawing, the side member 1600 includes a front portion 1600a that projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 600, and a plate that extends outward from the rear end of the front portion 1600a and contacts the front surface of the game panel 600. And a rear portion 1600c that extends rearward from the flange portion 1600b and can be inserted into a predetermined opening 600a in the game panel 600, and is provided on the left side of the center accessory 1400 in the game area 60. In addition, it is arranged on the upper side of the attacker unit 1500 substantially along the outer periphery of the game area 605. A front shelf 1600a of the side member 1600 is provided with a guide shelf 1602 capable of guiding the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 1400 to the center side in the left-right direction. Further, the side member 1600 is formed of a member that is partially translucent, and emits light by light from the LED mounted on the side decorative substrate 2010 provided in the back unit 2000 behind the side member 1600. It can be decorated.

[Previous components and game panel]
The configuration of the front component member 601 and the game panel 600 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 84A is a perspective view seen from the front in a state where the front structural member and the gaming panel are assembled, and FIG. 84B is a perspective view seen from the rear in the state where the front structural member and the gaming panel are assembled. is there.

  As described above, the front component member 601 in the game board 4 of the present example includes the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 that define the outer periphery of the game area 605 and guide the game ball in the game area 605. The game panel 600 is made of a wood plywood having a predetermined thickness, and includes a center opening 1400, an attacker unit 1500, and a through opening 600a through which the side member 1600 is inserted and fixed. These openings 600a have a shape substantially in line with the outer shape of the center accessory 1400 to be inserted and fixed. Note that a through opening 600 a is also formed at a position corresponding to the out port 606.

  A front component member 601, a center accessory 1400, an attacker unit 1500, and a side member 1600 are attached to the front surface of the game panel 600. In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 600 at a position corresponding to the game area 605. Further, a rear unit 2000 and a board substrate holder 623 are attached to the rear surface of the game panel 600.

[Back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 2000 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 85 is a front view of the back unit. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the front after disassembling each main configuration, and FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the exploded view of FIG. 87 as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view in which each member attached to the back unit base in the back unit is exploded and seen from the front, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view in which the exploded perspective view of FIG. 89 is seen from the rear. is there.

  The back unit 2000 in the game board 4 of this example is in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 600 and can be attached to the rear surface of the game panel 600 as shown in the figure, and has substantially the same shape as the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. A back unit base 2100 having an opening 2102; a stage member 2200 having a stage start port 2220 supported by a lower portion of the opening 2102 on the front side of the back unit base 2100; and a right side of the opening 2102 on the front side of the back unit base 2100. A swinging unit 2300 to be supported, and a transparent plate-like partition plate 2104 which is disposed behind the stage member 2200 and the swinging unit 2300 and closes the opening 2102 of the back unit base 2100 (see FIGS. 89 and 90). A traversing body unit 2500 disposed on the rear side of the partition plate 2104, and a traversing body unit And a back case 2150 attached to the back unit base 2100 that has an opening 2152 that is substantially the same shape as the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 on the rear wall. I have. In this example, a back box 621 is formed by the back unit base 2100 and the back case 2150.

  Further, the rear unit 2000 has a peripheral control board box 2050 attached to the lower rear portion of the back unit base 2100 and enclosed therein with a peripheral control board 3100 (see FIG. 78), and a lateral side of the peripheral control board box 2050. And a panel relay terminal board 1352 that relays the main control board 1350 in the main control board box 624 and the peripheral control board 3100 in the peripheral control board box 2050 and various sensors for detecting game balls. . The back unit 2000 is attached to the rear side of the back case 2150 and is connected to the peripheral control board 3100 and has a resistor board 2154 in which resistors are integrated with respect to the circuit of the peripheral control board 3100, and the back case 2150. Further, a peripheral control board 3100 attached to the rear side and a traversing body relay board 2156 that relays connection between the drive motors 2614, 2654, 2714, 2754 in the traversing body unit 2500 are further provided.

  The back unit 2000 includes a side decorative board 2010 fixed to the front side of the back unit base 2100 on the rear side of the attacker unit 1500 and the side member 1600, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface. It further includes a stage decoration substrate 2012 that is fixed to the front side of the back unit base 2100 on the rear side of the decoration body 1426 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface thereof. By appropriately emitting the LEDs of the side decoration board 2010 and the stage decoration board 2012, the attacker unit 1500, the side member 1600, the sub decoration body 1426 of the center accessory 1400, and the like can be decorated with light emission. .

  Further, the back unit 2000 detects a general winning port sensor 2110 that detects a game ball received in the general winning port 1502 in the attacker unit 1500 and a gaming ball received in the first start port 1504 in the attacker unit 1500. A first start port sensor 2112 and a stage start port sensor 2114 for detecting a game ball received in the stage start port 2220 of the stage member 2200. These sensors 2110, 2112, and 2114 are provided on the back unit base 2100. It is supported. In addition, a magnetic sensor 2116 is attached to the back unit base 2100 of the back unit 2000 at a position behind the first start port 1504 in the attacker unit 1500, and this magnetic sensor 2116 allows the attacker unit 4 from the front side of the game board 4. The magnetism of the magnet brought close to 1500 can be detected.

  As shown in the figure, the back unit base 2100 in the back unit 2000 has a substantially rectangular outer shape, a rectangular opening 2102 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the center, and the rear surface of the game panel 600 at a predetermined position on the outer periphery. A fixing portion 2106 for mounting and fixing to the rear side of the touching game panel 600 is provided. Further, the back unit base 2100 is received by the general winning port 1502 and the first start port 1504 in the attacker unit 1500 and guided to the rear side of the game panel 600 by the guide bar 1520, or the stage start of the stage member 2200. A plurality of guide paths 2108 are provided for receiving the game balls received in the mouth 2220 and releasing them downward. Each of the plurality of guide paths 2108 is provided with a corresponding sensor 2110, 2112, 2114, and a game ball flowing through each guide path 2108 can be detected. In addition, each guiding path 2108 is formed so as to be able to suppress an increase in the distribution speed of the circulating game balls.

  Further, the stage member 2200 in the back unit 2000 is arranged at a position higher than the accessory-side rolling surface 1402 in the center accessory 1400 so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction and can be released to the front side. The first back-side rolling surface 2202, and the first back-side rolling surface 2202 and the accessory-side rolling surface 1402 are lower than the first back-side rolling surface 2202 and higher than the accessory-side rolling surface 1402. And a second back-side rolling surface 2204 that is arranged at a position and that allows the game ball to roll in the left-right direction and to be released to the front side. In this example, as shown in FIG. 79 and the like, the warp outlet 1412 of the center accessory 1400 is disposed so as to open to the left end of the first back-side rolling surface 2202, and the warp inlet is entered from within the game area 605. The game ball that has entered 1410 is supplied to the first back-side rolling surface 2202 of the stage member 2200.

  Each of the first back-side rolling surface 2202 and the second back-side rolling surface 2204 is formed in a wave shape with the left and right ends being the highest, and the substantially center in the left-right direction being raised. Further, the first back-side rolling surface 2202 and the second back-side rolling surface 2204 are the lowest with the bank portions 2202a and 2204a having a predetermined height disposed on the front end side excluding the lowest portion. The portion is provided with curved concave portions 2202b and 2204b having a low front end side and extending in a fan shape in the left-right direction from the rear end to the front end. Further, as shown in the drawing, a concave portion 2202c, which has a predetermined width and decreases toward the rear, is provided at a substantially top portion of the first back-side rolling surface 2202 that is raised substantially in the center in the left-right direction. A stage start port 2220 that can receive a game ball is provided at the rear end. This stage member 2200 is supplied so that game balls that are not received in the stage start port 2220 are supplied from the second back side rolling surface 2204 to the role side rolling surface 1402 of the center role 1400 disposed forward. It has become.

  As shown in the figure, the first back-side rolling surface 2202 of the stage member 2200 has a width in the front-rear direction that is wide at both the left and right ends, and a width that is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball at the center side from the left and right ends. Further, on the rear side of the narrow portion, a shelf portion 2206 is provided that is raised by a substantially constant amount with respect to the first back-side rolling surface 2202. Due to the presence of the shelf 2206, the stage member 2200 has a three-stage rolling surface in which a first back-side rolling surface 2202 and a second back-side rolling surface 2204 are added to the player. It can be shown and the stage can be shown widely.

  In addition, the stage member 2200 is formed of a material having translucency including transparency, and the LED mounted on the surface of the stage decoration substrate 2012 attached to the rear end of the stage member 2200. Can be appropriately decorated with light emission.

  Further, a transparent plate-like partition plate 2104 (see FIGS. 89 and 90) is disposed on the rear side of the stage member 2200, that is, between the stage member 2200 and the traversing body unit 2500. 2104 can prevent the game ball from entering the traversing body unit 2500 from the stage member 2200, and can prevent the game ball from entering the traversing body unit 2500 and causing a malfunction. It has become.

[Oscillator unit]
The configuration of the oscillator unit 2300 in the back unit 2000 of the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 91A is a perspective view of the oscillating body unit viewed from the front, FIG. 91B is a front view of the oscillating body unit, and FIG. 91C is an enlarged perspective view showing the oscillating mechanism in the oscillating body unit. It is.

  As shown in the figure, the oscillating body unit 2300 in the back unit 2000 is rotatable about a plurality of oscillating bodies 2310 having an external shape simulating a lantern and an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A swing mechanism 2320 that pivotally supports and moves the swing body 2310 in a predetermined direction, a swing body unit base 2330 that holds the swing mechanism 2320, and a swing mechanism 2320 that is fixed to a predetermined position of the swing body unit base 2330 An oscillating body relay board 2340 that relays electrical connection with the control board 3100 is mainly provided. The oscillating body unit 2300 of this example includes three oscillating mechanisms 2320 that pivotally support two oscillating bodies 2310 in the vertical direction. The first oscillating mechanism 2320a, the second oscillating mechanism 2320b, The three swing mechanisms 2320c are arranged in this order.

  As shown in the figure, the swing mechanism 2320 in the swing body unit 2300 includes a swing body solenoid 2322 having a plunger 2322a supported by the swing body unit base 2330 and capable of moving forward and backward, and a plunger 2322a in the swing body solenoid 2322. The first actuating member 2324 can be rotated about a predetermined axis extending in the front-rear direction by the advancement and retraction of the first and second members, and the first actuating member 2324 can be rotated about a predetermined axis extending in the front-rear direction along with the rotation of the first flange member 2324. A second operating member 2326 that pivotally supports the rocking body 2310, a rocking body decoration board 2328 that is attached to the second operating member 2326 and is disposed on the rear side of the rocking body 2310 that is pivotally supported and on which the LED is mounted; It has.

  The first actuating member 2324 in the swing mechanism 2320 is formed in a rod shape as a whole, and has a shaft support portion 2324a that is pivotally supported on the swing body unit base 2330 at one end and the other end opposite to the shaft support portion 2324a. A slit-like transmission portion 2324b extending in the longitudinal direction, and a connecting portion 2324c disposed between the transmission portion 2324b and the shaft support portion 2324a to which the tip of the plunger 2322a of the oscillator solenoid 2322 is connected. Further, the second actuating member 2326 in the swing mechanism 2320 supports the transmission pin 2326a that can be inserted into the slit-like transmission part 2324b in the first actuating member 2324 and the transmission pin 2326a on one end side in a predetermined direction. A transmission rod 2326b that extends to the shaft, a shaft support portion 2326c that is disposed on the other end side of the transmission rod 2326b and is rotatably supported with respect to the oscillator unit base 2330, and a direction in which the transmission rod 2326b extends from the shaft support portion 2326c. Is provided with an action rod 2326d extending in different directions, and an oscillating body support portion 2326e disposed at the tip of the action rod 2326d and capable of supporting the two oscillating bodies 2310 at a predetermined distance apart from each other. 2326b and action rod 2326d are formed in a substantially L shape.

  As shown in the figure, the swing mechanism 2320 has a shaft support portion 2324a of the first operating member 2324 supported on the swing body unit base 2330 on the right side of the swing body solenoid 2322 in a front view, and the first operating member 2324. The first actuating member 2324 is disposed so that the transmission portion 2324b is positioned on the left side of the oscillator solenoid 2322 below the shaft support portion 2324a. On the other hand, the second actuating member 2326 and the first actuating member 2324 are arranged on the left side, and the shaft supporting part 2326c of the second actuating member 2326 is substantially the same height as the shaft supporting part 2324a of the first actuating member 2324. The pivot unit base 2330 is pivotally supported. In this state, the transmission pin 2326a of the second actuation member 2326 is inserted into the transmission portion 2324b of the first actuation member 2324, and the action rod 2326d of the second actuation member 2326 is substantially vertically upward from the shaft support portion 2326c. It extends to stand up.

  Note that the two oscillating bodies 2310 that are pivotally supported by the oscillating mechanism 2320 are pivotally supported at different positions in the front-rear direction by the oscillating body support portion 2326e of the second actuating member 2326 so as to overlap half in the left-right direction. In addition, the left swing member 2310 is pivotally supported so as to be slightly higher. Further, a rocking body decoration board 2328 is fixed to the rear side of the rocking body support part 2326e in the second operating member 2326, and the rocking body 2310 can be appropriately decorated with light emission by the LEDs mounted on the rocking body decoration board 2328. It is like that.

  In this oscillator unit 2300, the plunger 2322a of the oscillator solenoid 2322 normally protrudes downward, so that the action rod 2326d of the second operating member 2326 is substantially upright, and a plurality of oscillators 2310 is a position hidden behind the main decorative body 1422 in the center accessory 1400, and is a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. On the other hand, when the plunger 2322a moves upward by energizing the oscillator solenoid 2322, the first actuating member 2324 rotates clockwise around the shaft support portion 2324a as the plunger 2322a moves, and the first The second actuating member 2326 rotates counterclockwise about the shaft support part 2326c via the transmission pin 2326a of the second actuating member 2326 inserted into the transmitting part 2324b of the actuating member 2324.

  As a result, the working rod 2326d of the second operating member 2326 rotates so as to fall to the left, and the swinging body 2310 supported by the swinging body support portion 2326e at the tip of the working rod 2326d is moved from the rear side of the main decoration body 1422. It moves to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 640 and moves to a position where it can be seen by the player (see FIG. 107). At this time, since each oscillating body 2310 is pivotally supported, the oscillating body 2310 oscillates for a while by the inertial force even after the driving of the oscillating body solenoid 2322 is stopped. In addition to being able to entertain, it is possible to attract the player's attention strongly.

[Campus unit]
The configuration of the traversing body unit 2500 in the back unit 2000 of the gaming machine 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit traversing body unit disassembled into a front traversing body driving unit, a rear traversing body driving unit, and a lower rail unit, and FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the perspective view from the back. FIG. 94 is a front view of the traversing body unit, and FIG. 95 is a rear view of the traversing body unit. FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the traversing body unit with a part of the front traversing body drive unit omitted. FIG. 97A is a perspective view of the front traversing body drive unit with a part of the front lower drive unit omitted, and is a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view which abbreviate | omitted and looked after. FIG. 98 is a perspective view seen from the front with a part of the front upper drive unit in the front traversing body drive unit omitted. FIG. 99 is a front view of the rear traversing body drive unit, and FIG. 100 is a rear view showing the rear traversing body drive unit with a part thereof omitted. 101 is a perspective view seen from the front with a part of the rear lower body drive unit omitted in the rear traversing body drive unit, and FIG. 102 is a part of the rear upper body drive unit omitted in the rear traverse body drive unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front.

  As shown in the figure, the traversing unit 2500 in the back unit 2000 of the present embodiment traverses a plurality of bowl-shaped traversing bodies 2510 in the left-right direction and arranges the plurality of traversing bodies 2510 in a predetermined arrangement, thereby providing a liquid crystal display device. The front surface of 640 can be covered with a traversing body 2510 (see FIG. 74 and the like). A plurality (four) of the traversing bodies 2510 in the traversing body unit 2500 are arranged on the upper side of the traversing body 2510, extend in the left-right direction, and are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction and the columnar upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail Guided in the left-right direction by 2520b. Each of the upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b is configured such that two traversing bodies 2510 are guided. The two front traversing bodies 2512 guided by the upper front rail 2520a and the upper and rear rails. A traversing body 2510 is constituted by two rear traversing bodies 2514 guided by 2520.

  Note that the length of the upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b is substantially the same as the horizontal length (width) of the traversing body unit 2500, and the horizontal length of the traversing body 2510 ( The width is 5 to 6 times (about 5.6 times). Incidentally, in this example, the horizontal width of the liquid crystal display device 640 (the width of the display screen) is about 0.7 times the total width of the game area 605, and the width of the traversing body 2510 However, it is about 0.25 times the width of the liquid crystal display device 640 (the width of the display screen).

  The traversing body unit 2500 supports the upper front rail 2520a and drives the two front traversing bodies 2512 to traverse in the left-right direction, and is disposed on the rear side of the front traversing body driving unit 2600. A rear traversing body drive unit 2700 that supports the rail 2520b and drives the two rear traversing bodies 2514 to traverse in the left-right direction, and the front traversing body 2512 and the rear traversing traversed by the front traversing body driving unit 2600 and the rear traversing body driving unit 2700. A lower rail unit 2800 for guiding the lower end of the body 2514 in the left-right direction. The front traversing body drive unit 2600 and the rear traversing body drive unit 2700 in the traversing body unit 2500 are arranged side by side so as to be substantially in contact with each other in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 78). Further, the front traversing body drive unit 2600, the rear traversing body drive unit 2700, and the lower rail unit 2800 are supported by the back case 2150, respectively.

  First, the traversing body 2510 in the traversing body unit 2500 includes a main body portion 2510a formed in a frame shape, a plate-shaped closing plate 2510b for closing the rear end of the main body portion 2510a, and an upper portion of the main body portion 2510a, as shown in the figure. And a plate-like lower guide portion 2510d protruding downward from the lower end of the main body portion 2510a. The guide connecting portion 2510c of the traversing body 2510 is disposed between a pair of ring-shaped insertion rings 2510e through which the upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b can be inserted at both ends in the left-right direction, and the insertion rings 2510e. Four guide rollers 2510f that are in contact with the upper and lower ends of the front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b and rotatably supported by the guide connecting portion 2510c, and the traversing body drive units 2600 and 2700 are arranged above the guide rollers 2510f. And a connecting portion 2510g connectable to the transverse belts 2624, 2664, 2724, 2764.

  The traversing body 2510 is arranged such that the axis of the pair of insertion rings 2510e passes through the approximate center in the front-rear direction of the main body 2510a (the traversing body 2510). The four front rollers 2510a A traversing body 2510 guided by the upper rear rail 2520b is guided in a substantially vertical state. In addition, as shown in the figure, the four guide rollers 2510f are each provided with a pair of guide rollers 2510f that are vertically opposed so as to sandwich the upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b, respectively, in the vicinity of the insertion ring 2510e. Yes. That is, the pair of guide rollers 2510f are arranged at positions as far as possible in the left-right direction in the guide connecting portion 2510c, and the traversing body 2510 is guided without rattling.

  In this example, the rear traversing body 2514 includes a semicircular decorative portion 2510h provided substantially at the center in the vertical direction of the frame disposed near the center of the game area 605 in the main body portion 2510a, and the decorative portion 2510h. A traversing board decorative board 2511 provided with LEDs, and a traversing board decorating board 2511 and a central relay terminal plate 2808 of the lower rail unit 2800 are electrically connected to each other to provide a flexible flat cable-like wiring member. 2150i. Thereafter, the traversing body 2514 can appropriately decorate the decoration portion 2510h with the LED of the traversing body decoration substrate 2511. In this example, the closing plate 2510b of the traversing body 2514 is a transparent plate, and the liquid crystal display device 640 positioned on the rear side through the traversing body 2510 can be viewed from the player side. .

  In this example, the guide connecting portion 2510c of the left front traversing body 2512 and the right rear traversing body 2514 extends longer than the other traversing bodies 2512 and 2514, and the front lower drive unit 2610 There is provided a passage groove 2510j through which the transverse belt 2624 or the transverse belt 2724 of the rear lower drive unit 2710 can pass (see FIGS. 98 and 102), and a connecting portion 2510g is disposed above the passage groove 2510j. Has been. Through the passage groove 2510j formed in the left front traversing body 2512 and the right rear traversing body 2514, the left front traversing body 2512 and the right rear traversing body 2514 are connected to the traverse belt 2624 and the rear of the front lower drive unit 2610. Contact with the transverse belt 2724 of the lower drive unit 2710 can be avoided.

  Further, the traversing body 2510 is provided with a detection piece 2510k that protrudes downward from the lower end of the lower guide portion 2510d. In the traversing body 2514, it is arranged at the approximate center of the lower guide portion 2510d.

  The front traversing body drive unit 2600 in the traversing body unit 2500 of the present embodiment includes one upper front rail 2520a that supports two front traversing bodies 2512 so as to traverse in the left-right direction, as shown in FIGS. A front lower drive unit 2610 that supports and drives a front traversing body 2512 (front traversing body right 2512R) disposed on the right side in a front view and a front lower drive unit 2610 disposed on the upper side of the front lower drive unit 2610 and on the left side in a front view. And a front upper drive unit 2650 for driving the front traversing body 2512 (front traversing body left 2512L) arranged in the left-right direction.

  The front lower drive unit 2610 in the front traversing body drive unit 2600 is disposed above the right end portion of the lower base plate 2612 and a lower plate plate 2612 that holds both ends of the upper front rail 2520a and extends in the left-right direction. Front right drive motor 2614 having a rotation shaft arranged to extend, drive gear 2616 rotating integrally with the rotation shaft of front right drive motor 2614, driven gear 2618 rotating in mesh with drive gear 2616, and driven A driving pulley 2620 that rotates integrally with the gear 2618, a driven pulley 2622 that is disposed near the left end of the lower base plate 2612 on the opposite side of the driving pulley 2620, and is wound around the driven pulley 2622 and the driving pulley 2620. A traversing belt 2624, and a right front traversing body 2 at a predetermined position of the traversing belt 2624. Connecting portion 2510g is connected and fixed in 12 (2512R).

  The front lower drive unit 2610 includes a plate-like shaft support member 2626 (see FIG. 96) fixed to the upper surface of the right end portion of the lower base plate 2612 and rotatably supporting the driven gear 2618 and the drive pulley 2620. A right case member 2628 (see FIG. 87, etc.) which is formed in a box shape whose lower surface is closed by a support member 2626, houses the drive gear 2616, the driven gear 2618, and the drive pulley 2620 and has the front right drive motor 2614 attached to the upper surface. And the like.

  Further, the front lower drive unit 2610 is disposed in a ring of a traverse belt 2624 wound around a drive pulley 2620 and a driven pulley 2622 and is held by the lower base plate 2612 so as to be slidable in the left and right directions. A driven pulley support member 2630 that rotatably supports the pulley 2622, a tension spring 2632 that urges the driven pulley support member 2630 to move in a direction opposite to the drive pulley 2620, and an end of the tension spring 2632 on the drive pulley 2620 side And a spring holding member 2634 fixed to the lower base member 2612. In the front lower drive unit 2610, the driven pulley 2622 is urged away from the drive pulley 2620 by the urging force of the tension spring 2632, and a predetermined tension is applied to the traverse belt 2624 by the urging force. It has become.

  As shown in the figure, the front lower drive unit 2610 has an upper front rail 2520a supported on the lower side of the lower base plate 2612, a drive gear 2616, a driven gear 2618, a drive pulley 2620, a driven pulley 2622, and a traverse. A belt 2624 is disposed on the upper side of the lower base plate 2612. In addition, the lower base plate 2612 of this example is a highly rigid one using a press-molded metal plate having a predetermined thickness. It can be firmly supported without being deformed or deformed.

  On the other hand, the front upper drive unit 2650 in the front traverse body drive unit 2600 is disposed above the lower base plate 2612 and extends in the left-right direction, and the right end is fixed to the upper surface of the right case member 2628 in the front lower drive unit 2610. Upper base plate 2652, front left drive motor 2654 disposed on the upper surface of the left end portion of upper base plate 2652 and having a rotation shaft arranged to extend downward, and integrally rotated with the rotation shaft of front left drive motor 2654 Driving gear 2656, a driven gear 2658 that rotates in mesh with the driving gear 2656, a driving pulley 2660 that rotates integrally with the driven gear 2658, and the right end of the upper base plate 2652 on the opposite side of the driving pulley 2660 in the left-right direction. It is wound around a driven pulley 2662 arranged in the vicinity, a driven pulley 2661 and a driving pulley 2660. Row belt 2664 has a connecting portion 2510g is connected and fixed in front of the left to a predetermined position of the transverse belt 2664 transverse member 2512 (2512L).

  The front upper drive unit 2650 includes a plate-like shaft support member 2666 (see FIG. 96) fixed to the upper surface of the left end portion of the lower base plate 2612 and rotatably supporting the driven gear 2658 and the drive pulley 2660, and a shaft. It is formed in a box shape whose lower surface is closed by the support member 2666 and is formed at substantially the same height as the right case member 2628 in the front lower drive unit 2610 and accommodates the drive gear 2616, the driven gear 2618 and the drive pulley 2620. And a left case member 2668 (see FIG. 87 and the like) on which the left end portion of the upper base plate 2652 is placed and fixed.

  Further, the front upper drive unit 2650 is disposed in a ring of a traverse belt 2664 wound around a drive pulley 2660 and a driven pulley 2662, and is held by the upper base plate 2652 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. A driven pulley support member 2670 that rotatably supports the pulley 2662, a tension spring 2672 that urges the driven pulley support member 2670 to move in a direction opposite to the drive pulley 2660, and an end of the tension spring 2672 on the side of the drive pulley 2660 And a spring holding member 2674 that holds the portion and is fixed to the upper base member 2652. In the front upper drive unit 2650, the driven pulley 2662 is urged away from the drive pulley 2660 by the urging force of the tension spring 2672, and a predetermined tension is applied to the traversing belt 2664 by the urging force. It has become.

  In the front upper drive unit 2650, as shown in the figure, a drive gear 2656, a driven gear 2658, a drive pulley 2660, a driven pulley 2662, and a traversing belt 2664 are disposed below the upper base plate 2652. In addition, the upper base plate 2652 of this example is a highly rigid one using a press-molded metal plate of a predetermined thickness, and the driving pulley 2660, the driven pulley 2662, etc. are rattled or deformed. Without being able to support it firmly. Furthermore, the length of the upper base plate 2652 in the left-right direction is shorter than the length of the upper front rail 2520a.

  As shown in the figure, the front traversing body drive unit 2600 of the present example includes a right case member 2628, a left case member 2668, and left and right case members 2628 and 2650 that are disposed at both ends in the left-right direction. It is arranged and fixed substantially parallel to the vertical direction by a support member 2602 arranged at the approximate center of the direction. In addition, the distance between the drive pulleys 2620 and 2660 and the driven pulleys 2622 and 2662 in the front lower drive unit 2610 and the front upper drive unit 2650 is substantially the same, and is about the width of the traversing body 2510 in the left-right direction. The interval is four times and the interval is about 0.8 times the length of the upper front rail 2520a.

  Further, in the front traversing body drive unit 2600, the drive pulley 2620 in the front lower drive unit 2610 is arranged near the right end of the upper front rail 2520a, and the drive pulley 2660 in the front upper drive unit 2650 is left end of the upper front rail 2520a. In the front lower drive unit 2610 and the front upper drive unit 2650, the horizontal range of the horizontal body 2510 is offset to the right side and the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. . That is, the right front traversing body 2512 (2512R) traversed by the front lower drive unit 2610 can move from the right end of the upper front rail 2520a to the vicinity of the left end, and is traversed by the front upper drive unit 2650. The left front traversing body 2512 (2512L) can move from the left end of the upper front rail 2520a to the vicinity of the right end.

  Next, the rear traversing body drive unit 2700 in the traversing body unit 2500 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99 to FIG. A rear lower drive unit 2710 that supports the rail 2520b and drives a rear traversing body 2514 (rear traversing body left 2514L) disposed on the left side in a front view in the left-right direction, and a front surface disposed on the upper side of the rear lower drive unit 2710. And a rear upper drive unit 2750 that drives the rear traversing body 2514 (the rear traversing body right 2514R) arranged on the right side when viewed from the left and right.

  The rear lower drive unit 2710 in the rear traversing body drive unit 2700 is disposed above the left end of the lower base plate 2712 and a plate-like lower base plate 2712 that holds both ends of the upper rear rail 2520b and extends in the left-right direction. A rear left drive motor 2714 having a rotary shaft arranged to extend, a drive gear 2716 that rotates integrally with the rotary shaft of the rear left drive motor 2714, a driven gear 2718 that rotates in mesh with the drive gear 2716, and a driven A driving pulley 2720 that rotates integrally with the gear 2718, a driven pulley 2722 that is disposed near the right end of the lower base plate 2712 on the opposite side of the driving pulley 2720, and is wound around the driven pulley 2722 and the driving pulley 2720. And a transverse belt 2724 on the left side at a predetermined position of the transverse belt 2724. Connecting portion 2510g is connected and fixed in 14 (2514L).

  The rear lower drive unit 2710 includes a plate-like shaft support member 2726 (see FIG. 101) fixed to the upper surface of the left end portion of the lower base plate 2712 and rotatably supporting the driven gear 2718 and the drive pulley 2720. A left case member 2728 (FIG. 92, etc.) that is formed in a box shape whose lower surface is closed by a support member 2726, accommodates a drive gear 2716, a driven gear 2718, and a drive pulley 2720 and has a rear left drive motor 2714 attached to the upper surface. And the like.

  Further, the rear lower drive unit 2710 is disposed in a ring of a traverse belt 2724 wound around a drive pulley 2720 and a driven pulley 2722 and is held by the lower base plate 2712 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. A driven pulley support member 2730 that rotatably supports the pulley 2722, a tension spring 2732 that urges the driven pulley support member 2730 to move in a direction opposite to the drive pulley 2720, and an end of the tension spring 2732 on the drive pulley 2720 side. And a spring holding member 2734 which holds the portion and is fixed to the lower base member 2712. Thereafter, the lower drive unit 2710 is urged in a direction in which the driven pulley 2722 is separated from the drive pulley 2720 by the urging force of the tension spring 2732 so that a predetermined tension is applied to the traverse belt 2724 by the urging force. It has become.

  The rear lower drive unit 2710 has an upper rear rail 2520b supported on the lower side of the lower base plate 2712, a drive gear 2716, a driven gear 2718, a drive pulley 2720, a driven pulley 2722, and a traverse as shown in the figure. A belt 2724 is disposed on the upper side of the lower base plate 2712. In addition, the lower base plate 2712 of this example has high rigidity using a press-molded metal plate having a predetermined thickness, and the upper rear rail 2520b, the driving pulley 2720, the driven pulley 2722, and the like are loose. It can be firmly supported without being deformed or deformed.

  On the other hand, the rear upper drive unit 2750 in the rear traverse body drive unit 2700 is disposed above the lower base plate 2712 and extends in the left-right direction, and the left end is fixed to the upper surface of the left case member 2728 in the rear lower drive unit 2710. Upper base plate 2752, rear right drive motor 2754 having a rotation shaft disposed on the upper surface of the right end portion of upper base plate 2752 and extending downward, and rotating integrally with the rotation shaft of rear right drive motor 2754 Driving gear 2756, a driven gear 2758 that rotates in mesh with the driving gear 2756, a driving pulley 2760 that rotates integrally with the driven gear 2758, and the left end of the upper base plate 2752 on the opposite side in the left-right direction. It is wound around a driven pulley 2762, a driven pulley 2762, and a driving pulley 2760 disposed in the vicinity. Row belt 2764 has a connecting portion 2510g of right rear transverse member 2514 (2514R) is connected and fixed to a predetermined position of the transverse belt 2764.

  The rear upper drive unit 2750 includes a plate-like shaft support member 2766 (see FIG. 102) that is fixed to the upper surface of the right end portion of the lower base plate 2712 and rotatably supports the driven gear 2758 and the drive pulley 2760. It is formed in a box shape whose lower surface is closed by the support member 2766 and is formed at substantially the same height as the left case member 2728 in the rear lower drive unit 2710 and accommodates the drive gear 2716, the driven gear 2718 and the drive pulley 2720. And a right case member 2768 (see FIG. 92 and the like) on which the right end portion of the upper base plate 2752 is placed and fixed.

  Further, the rear upper drive unit 2750 is disposed in a ring of a traverse belt 2764 wound around a drive pulley 2760 and a driven pulley 2762 and is held by the upper base plate 2752 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. A driven pulley support member 2770 that rotatably supports the pulley 2762, a tension spring 2772 that urges the driven pulley support member 2770 to move in a direction opposite to the drive pulley 2760, and an end of the tension spring 2772 on the drive pulley 2760 side And a spring holding member 2774 which holds the portion and is fixed to the upper base member 2752. In the rear upper drive unit 2750, the driven pulley 2762 is urged away from the drive pulley 2760 by the urging force of the tension spring 2772, and a predetermined tension is applied to the traverse belt 2764 by the urging force. It has become.

  In the rear upper drive unit 2750, as shown in the figure, a drive gear 2756, a driven gear 2758, a drive pulley 2760, a driven pulley 2762, and a traverse belt 2764 are disposed below the upper base plate 2752. In addition, the upper base plate 2752 of this example has high rigidity using a press-molded metal plate having a predetermined thickness, and the driving pulley 2760, the driven pulley 2762, etc. are rattled or deformed. Without being able to support it firmly. Furthermore, the length of the upper base plate 2752 in the left-right direction is shorter than the length of the upper rear rail 2520b.

  As shown in the figure, the rear traversing body drive unit 2700 includes a left case member 2728, a right case member 2768, and left and right case members 2728 and 2750 arranged at both ends in the left-right direction. A support member 2702 (see FIGS. 99 and 100) disposed substantially in the center of the direction is disposed and fixed substantially parallel to the vertical direction. The intervals between the drive pulleys 2720 and 2760 and the driven pulleys 2722 and 2762 in the rear lower drive unit 2710 and the rear upper drive unit 2750 are substantially the same interval, and are approximately the same as the lateral width of the traversing body 2510. The distance is four times as long as the distance between the upper rear rail 2520b and the distance about 0.8 times.

  Further, in the rear traversing body drive unit 2700, the drive pulley 2720 in the rear lower drive unit 2710 is disposed near the left end of the upper rear rail 2520b, and the drive pulley 2760 in the rear upper drive unit 2750 is the right end of the upper rear rail 2520b. In the rear lower drive unit 2710 and the rear upper drive unit 2750, the horizontal range of the horizontal body 2510 is offset to the left and right with respect to the center in the left-right direction. . That is, the left rear traversing body 2514 (2514L) traversed by the rear lower drive unit 2710 can move from the left end of the upper rear rail 2520b to the vicinity of the right end, and is traversed by the rear upper drive unit 2750. The right rear traversing body 2514 (2514R) can move from the right end of the upper rear rail 2520b to the vicinity of the left end.

  Note that the drive motors 2614, 2654, 2714, and 2754 in the traversing body unit 2500 of this example are stepping motors that can specify the rotational position, and the peripheral control board 3100 rotates the rotational position, that is, the traversing body 2510. The traverse position (movement position) of the traverse body is feedback-controlled, and the origin is set by detecting the corresponding open position sensors 2810, 2811, 2812, 2813 of the detection piece 2510k of each traversing body 2510. It is like that.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the lower rail unit 2800 in the traversing body unit 2500 of the present embodiment has a length in the left-right direction that is substantially the same as the upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b. The lower guide body 2510d of the traversing body 2510 can be inserted between the box-like lower rail body 2802 open at the top and rear and the lower rail body 2802 and the inner side of the front end of the lower rail body 2802. A plate-shaped middle rail 2804 that forms a gap and a rear end member 2806 that closes the rear end of the lower rail main body 2802. The rear end member 2806 is divided into two at the approximate center in the left-right direction.

  The lower rail unit 2800 includes a front right open position sensor 2810 that can detect the detection piece 2510k when the right front traversing body 2512 in the traversing body unit 2500 is in the open position at a predetermined position on the bottom of the lower rail main body 2802. The front left open position sensor 2811 capable of detecting the detection piece 2510k when the left front traversing body 2512 is in the open position and the rear right opening capable of detecting the detection piece 2510k when the right rear traversing body 2514 is in the open position. The position sensor 2812 and the rear left open position sensor 2813 capable of detecting the detection piece 2510k when the left rear traversing body 2514 is in the open position and the detection piece 2510k can be detected when the right rear traversing body 2514 is in the closed position. Rear right closed position sensor 2814 and rear left closed position which can detect the detection piece 2510k when the left rear traversing body 2514 is in the closed position. A sensor 2815 further includes a.

  The front right open position sensor 2810 and the front left open position sensor 2811 are respectively disposed at predetermined positions between the inside of the front end of the lower rail body 2802 and the middle rail 2804. Further, the rear right open position sensor 2812, the rear left open position sensor 2813, the rear right closed position sensor 2814, and the rear left closed position sensor 2815 are respectively disposed at predetermined positions between the middle rail 2804 and the rear end member 2806. ing.

  Further, the lower rail unit 2800 includes a front right opening position sensor 2810, a front left opening position sensor 2811, a rear right opening position sensor 2812, a rear left opening position sensor 2813, a rear right closing position sensor 2814, a rear left closing position sensor 2815, In addition, the wiring member 2510j in the rear traversing body 2514 is electrically connected, and further includes a central relay terminal plate 2808 disposed substantially at the center of the rear end of the lower rail body 2802. Each sensor 2810, 2811, 2812, 2813, 2814, 2815, etc. is connected to the peripheral control board 3100 by this central relay terminal plate 2808.

  In the lower rail unit 2800, the lower guide portion 2510d of the front traversing body 2512 is inserted between the inner side of the front end of the lower rail body 2802 and the middle rail 2804, whereby the lower end of the front traversing body 2512 moves in the front-rear direction. The front traversing body 2512 can be guided in the left-right direction in a state where the above is restricted. Further, the lower rail unit 2800 is attached to the back case 2150 so that the lower guide portion 2510d of the rear traversing body 2512 can be inserted between the middle rail 2804 and the lower edge of the opening 2152 in the back case 2150. A gap can be formed, and thus the rear traversing body 2514 can be guided in the left-right direction in a state where the lower end of the rear traversing body 2514 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. ing.

  The traversing body unit 2500 of the present embodiment is configured to move each traversing body 2510 in the left-right direction independently by traversing each drive motor 2614, 2654, 2714, 2754 with the above-described configuration. Can be done. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 74 and the like, the two rear traversing bodies 2514 in the rear traversing body drive unit 2700 are brought into contact with each other at substantially the center in the left-right direction, and the two By positioning the front traversing body 2512 (2512R, 2512L) on the left and right outer sides of the two rear traversing bodies 2514 (2514R, 2514L) so as to slightly overlap both ends of the rear traversing body 2514 in front view, The body 2510 can cover the front side of the liquid crystal display device 640. In this example, each traversing body 2510 is arranged as described above so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. In the state where the four traversing bodies 2510 cover the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640, the rear traversing body 2512 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction and the front traversing body 2514 is disposed outside the rear traversing body 2514 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the traversing body 2510 arranged at the center is positioned away from the player side, and it is possible to suppress giving a sense of blockage to the player.

  Further, the traversing body unit 2500 includes a right front traversing body 2512 (2512R) and a rear traversing body 2514 (2514R) at the right end of the upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b, and a left front traversing body 2512 (2512L). The rear traversing body 2514 (2514L) is positioned at the left end portions of the upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b, respectively, so that each traversing body 2510 does not substantially overlap the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 when viewed from the front. The liquid crystal display device 640 can be exposed to the player (see FIGS. 106 and 108).

  Further, in the front traversing body drive unit 2600 in the traversing body unit 2500, the front lower driving unit 2610 causes the right front traversing body 2512 (2512R) to pass from the right end of the upper front rail 2520a beyond the center in the left-right direction. The left front traversing body 2512 (2512L) moves from the left end of the upper front rail 2520a to the opposite side (right side) across the center in the left-right direction. Each front traversing body 2512 can move in the left-right direction within a wide range of the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640. Since the two front traversing bodies 2512 are guided by one upper front rail 2520a, the right or left front traversing body 2512 moves over the other front traversing bodies 2512 to the opposite side in the left-right direction. I can't do that.

  Also in the rear traversing body drive unit 2700 in the traversing body unit 2500, the rear lower driving unit 2710 causes the left rear traversing body 2514 (2514L) to extend from the left end of the upper rear rail 2520b beyond the center in the left-right direction (on the opposite side ( And the rear upper drive unit 2750 moves the right rear traversing body 2514 (2514R) from the right end of the upper rear rail 2520b to the opposite side (left side) beyond the center in the left-right direction. Each rear traversing body 2514 can move in the left-right direction within a wide range of the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640. Since the two rear traversing bodies 2514 are guided by one upper rear rail 2520b, the right or left rear traversing body 2514 moves over the other rear traversing bodies 2514 to the opposite side in the left-right direction. I can't do that.

  As described above, each traversing body 2510 can move independently in the left-right direction, so that it is possible to cover the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 other than the above combinations (for example, FIG. 114). The game state or the like may be suggested by the combination of the traversing body 2510, and the player is entertained not only by the movement of the traversing body 2510 but also by the covering state of the liquid crystal display device 640. It can control that it falls.

<Control configuration with main board and peripheral control board>
A detailed control configuration by the main board 3000 and the peripheral control board 3100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. FIG. 103 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration around the main board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 104 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration around the peripheral control board in the pachinko machine. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate connection and direction of the signal.

  The control of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is broadly divided into a group of main boards 3000 including a main control board 1350 and a payout control board 1186 and a group of peripheral control boards 3100. The group of main boards 3000 controls gaming operations (winning detection, winning judgment, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and the group of peripheral control boards 3100 has stage operations (light emitting decoration, movable effects, sound output, liquid crystal) Display etc.).

  As shown in FIG. 103, the main control board 1350 of the main board 3000 includes a CPU 3002 as a central processing unit, a ROM 3004 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 3006 as a readable / writable memory. The CPU 3002 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 3004 and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral control board 3100 and the payout control board 1186. The RAM 3006 temporarily stores information such as various data and input signals generated in various processes executed by the main control board 1350. The main control board 1350 is connected to the power supply board 3010 via the relay terminal board 625, the payout control board 1186, and the power supply relay terminal board 3008, so that operating power is supplied from the power supply board 3010. ing.

  The input interface of the main control board 1350 includes a gate sensor 3012 that detects a game ball that has entered the gate entrance 1404 via the panel relay terminal board 1352, and a general prize opening that detects a game ball that has won the general prize opening 1502. The sensor 2110, the first start port sensor 2112 for detecting the game ball won in the first start port 1504, the second start port sensor 1522 for detecting the game ball won in the second start port 1506, and the grand prize port 1510 were won. A count sensor 1524 for detecting a game ball, a stage start port sensor 2114 for detecting a game ball won in the stage start port 2220, and an all winning port winning number detection sensor 2520 for counting the number of winnings for all winning ports. It is connected. Although not shown in FIG. 103, a magnetic sensor 2116 that detects unauthorized magnetism approaching the game board 4 via the panel relay terminal board 1352 is also connected.

  In addition, an operation sensor 3016 for detecting an operation state of an operation handle portion 461 operated by a player for driving a game ball into the game area 605 via a relay terminal board 625 is provided as an input interface of the main control board 1350. A body frame opening switch 3018 for detecting the opening state of the body frame 3 and a door frame opening switch 3020 for detecting the opening state of the door frame 5 are also connected.

  On the other hand, the output interface of the panel relay terminal board 1352 opens and closes a start opening solenoid 1516 that opens and closes a pair of movable pieces 1508 that can open and close the second start opening 1506, and an opening and closing piece 1512 that can close the prize winning opening 1510. An attacker solenoid 1518 to be driven is connected, and a drive signal is output from the main control board 1350. The output interface of the panel relay terminal board 1352 includes a normal symbol display 1806, first and second special symbol displays 1802 and 1804, a normal symbol memory number display 1812, and a first symbol via the status display board 3022. And the second special symbol memory number display units 1808 and 1810 are connected, and from the main control board 1350, the normal symbol display unit 1806 provided in the status display unit 1800 and the first and second special symbol display units 1802 and 1804 are connected. It is possible to output a drive signal to the like.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 1186 includes a CPU 3024 as a central processing unit, a ROM 3026 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 3028 as a readable / writable memory. The payout control board 1186 then processes the command signal input from the main board 1350 and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 and the firing motor 695 connected to the firing control board 3030. Accordingly, the payout motor 815 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal, and the launch motor 695 can fire the game ball according to the drive signal.

  The payout control board 1186 is connected to a ball break switch 778 that detects that there are no more game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720. Based on the detection of the ball break switch 778, the player In addition, the ball side is notified to the hall side (hall computer). The payout control board 1186 is connected to a full tank switch 916 for detecting that the game ball stored in the storage unit 381 of the dish unit 300 is full. Based on this, a notification that “please take out the game ball from the storage part” is made.

  In addition, bi-directional communication is performed between the main control board 1350 and the payout control board 1186 via respective input / output interfaces. For example, when the main board 1350 transmits a prize ball command, payout is made in response thereto. An ACK signal is returned from the control board 1186 to the main control board 1350.

  Further, an external terminal board 3032 is connected to the main control board 1350 and the payout control board 1186, and the winning state to the start opening 1504, 1506, 2220, the big winning opening 1510, etc., the fluctuation state of the normal symbol / special symbol, etc. Various information such as a gaming state based on each lottery result is output to a hall computer or the like provided in the gaming facility.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104, the peripheral control board 3100 has electronic components such as a CPU 3102, a ROM 3104, a RAM 3106, and the like, and a predetermined effect control program can be executed by these electronic components. . In addition, the peripheral control board 3100 is provided with a ROM 3108 that stores a sound source that is the basis of voice and music, and a sound source IC 3110 that outputs sound and music according to the production content based on the sound source stored in the ROM 3108. It has been. Note that communication is performed in only one direction between the input / output interface and the input interface between the main board 3000 and the peripheral control board 3100, and the main control board 1350 to the peripheral control board 3100. Even if the command is sent, the reverse is not performed. Also, power for operation is supplied from the power supply board 3010 to the peripheral control board 3100 via the power supply relay terminal board 3008.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 78, the peripheral control board 3100 of this example is enclosed in the peripheral control board box 2050 and disposed inside the board substrate holder 623, and cannot sufficiently dissipate heat. Since there is a possibility, among the electronic components constituting the electronic circuit of the peripheral control board 3100, a position where the plurality of resistors are separated from the peripheral control board 3100 and sufficient heat dissipation can be secured (rear case 2150). The resistor board 2154 having a plurality of resistors is connected in both directions. As a result, the temperature rise on the peripheral control board 3100 can be suppressed, and the occurrence of problems in the effect control related to the game due to the heat effect of the CPU 3102 and the like can be prevented.

  The peripheral control board 3100 is connected to a liquid crystal display control board 3112 that controls display of effect images on the liquid crystal display device 640. A liquid crystal display device 640 is connected to the liquid crystal display control board 3112, the command signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 3100 is processed by the liquid crystal display control board 3112, and a drive signal is output to the liquid crystal display device 640. To do. More specifically, the liquid crystal display control board 3112 includes a CPU 3114, a RAM 3116, a ROM 3118, a VDP 3120, and an image ROM 3122.

  The CPU 3114 of the liquid crystal display control board 3112 receives the command signal sent from the peripheral control board 3100 via the input / output interface and performs arithmetic processing based on the command to control the VDP 3120. The RAM 3116 provides a work area for the CPU 3114 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 3118 holds a program for the CPU 3114 (for display control).

  A VDP (video display processor) 3120 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 640. A register is provided in the VDP 3120, and it is possible to hold the operation mode of the VDP 3120, setting information of various display functions, and the like. Then, the CPU 3114 rewrites various information held in the register, whereby the display mode in the liquid crystal display device 640 can be variously changed. The image ROM 3122 is a non-volatile memory for storing various image data, and stores bitmap image data for various display designs, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the peripheral control board 3100 and the liquid crystal display control board 3112 with each input / output interface. The liquid crystal display control board 3112 is also supplied with operating power from the power supply board 3010 via the peripheral control board 3100 and the power supply relay terminal board 3008.

  The peripheral control board 3100 is connected to a door frame decoration lamp 3124 provided in the door frame 5, a speaker 163, and the like via a frame decoration relay terminal plate 290. From the peripheral control board 3100, these lamps are connected. A drive signal is output to the speaker 163 and the like. The peripheral control board 3100 is connected to operation buttons 330 including a left button 330a, a middle button 330b, and a right button 330c arranged on the front surface of the door frame 5 via a frame decoration relay terminal plate 290, respectively. The operation signal of each operation button is input.

  Further, the peripheral control board 3100 emits light from the main decoration board 3126 for illuminating and decorating the main decoration body 1422 in the center accessory 1400, the petal motor 3128 for rotating the rotation decoration body 1424 in the center accessory 1400, and the rotation decoration body 1424. Rotating body decoration board 1424b to be decorated, Attacker unit decoration board 3130 to illuminate and decorate the attacker unit 1500, Side decoration board 2010 to illuminate and decorate the side decoration body 1600, and the sub decoration body 1426 in the stage member 2200 and the center accessory 1400 emit light. A stage decoration substrate 2012 to be decorated is connected. Then, by outputting a driving signal from the peripheral control board 3100 to the petal motor 3128, the petal motor 3128 can be driven to rotate the rotating decoration body 1424. Also, the peripheral control board 3100 outputs a driving signal to the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, 2010, 2012, thereby appropriately driving the LEDs to emit light (light emission effect). Be able to.

  In addition, an object detection sensor 1428 is bidirectionally connected to the peripheral control board 3100. The light emission unit 1428a of the object detection sensor 1428 emits light and receives a detection signal from the light reception unit 1428b in a predetermined gaming state. In this way, it is possible to detect a player's hand moving up and down within a predetermined range in front of the game area 605.

  Further, a swing body solenoid 2322 and a swing body decoration board 2328 are connected to the peripheral control board 3100 via a swing body relay board 2340, and drive signals are output to the swing body solenoid 2322 and the swing body decoration board 2328. Thus, the plurality of oscillating bodies 2310 are oscillated by driving the oscillating body solenoid 2322, or the LEDs mounted on the oscillating body decoration board 2328 are driven to emit light to decorate the plurality of oscillating bodies 2310. Can be done.

  Further, the front right drive motor 2614, the front left drive motor 2654, the rear left drive motor 2714, and the rear right drive motor 2754 in the traversing body unit 2500 are bidirectionally connected to the peripheral control board 3100 via the traversing body relay board 2156. They are connected to output drive signals to the drive motors 2614, 2654, 2714, 2754, and to receive rotational position information from the encoders of the drive motors 2614, 2654, 2714, 2754. Thereby, the rotational drive of each drive motor 2614, 2654, 2714, 2754 is feedback-controlled, and the traversing position (movement position) of the front traversing body 2512 and the rear traversing body 2514 can traverse in the left-right direction with high accuracy. It is like that.

  Further, a traverse decoration board 2511 is connected to the peripheral control board 3100 via a central relay terminal board 2808. By outputting a drive signal to the LEDs mounted on the traverse decoration board 2511, The decorative portion 2510h of the traversing body 2514 can be decorated with light emission. Further, the peripheral control board 3100 has a front right open position sensor 2810, a front left open position sensor 2811, and a rear right open position sensor 2812 arranged on the lower rail unit 2800 of the traversing body unit 2500 via the central relay terminal plate 2808. The rear left open position sensor 2813, the rear right closed position sensor 2814, and the rear left closed position sensor 2815 are connected. Based on the detection signals input from the position sensors 2810, 2811, 2812, 2813, 2814, 2815. The drive motors 2614, 2654, 2714, and 2754 are controlled.

[Main production operations]
Main effect operations using the above-described configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 118. FIG. 105 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the sub decoration body in the center accessory, and FIG. FIG. 106 is a front view of the game board with the traversing body fully opened, and FIG. 107 is a front view of the game board showing the traversing body fully opened and the swinging body exposed and swung. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the movement of the traversing body from the state in which a plurality of traversing bodies cover the front surface of the liquid crystal display device to the exposed (fully opened) state, and FIG. 109 is the same as FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the motion which coat | covers the front surface of a liquid crystal display device with a several different traversing body. FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing a movable range of a traversing body, and FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a movement in which one traversing body in the front-rear direction overtakes the other traversing body, FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of movement in which traversing bodies arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction cross each other. Further, FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the movement of covering the front surface of the liquid crystal display device with a plurality of traversing bodies different from FIG. 108 and FIG. 109, and FIG. 114 is a diagram of the liquid crystal display device with a plurality of traversing bodies. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the further different motion which coat | covers a front surface. FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the movement of the traversing body from the state of FIG. 114 (K) until the liquid crystal display device is fully opened. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the movement of the traversing body in a state where the front surface of the liquid crystal display device is covered, and FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the movement of the traversing body in contact with each other. FIG. 118 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the movement of three traversing bodies arranged at predetermined intervals on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device.

  First, the operation of the sub decoration body 1426 in the center accessory 1400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 105 (a), the sub decoration body 1426 in the center accessory 1400 includes a bill portion 1426b simulating a flower card. The bill portion 1426b includes a rectangular frame body 1426c and a frame body 1426c. A white plate-like display portion 1426d that closes the inside of the frame and has translucency, and an arc-shaped first partition wall that is arranged at the approximate center in the vertical direction on the rear side of the display portion 1426d and has a high horizontal center. 1426e and the cylindrical 2nd partition 1426f arrange | positioned above the 1st partition 1426e. Further, the bill portion 1426b in the sub decoration body 1426 is attached to the game board 4, and a part of the stage decoration board 2012 in the back unit 2000 is desired on the rear side. Then, by appropriately emitting the corresponding LED provided on the stage decoration substrate 2012, the display unit 1426d inside the frame body 1426c in the tag unit 1426b displays “no pattern”, “芒” and “ It is possible to display the three symbols of “Moon and Moon”.

  Specifically, by turning on or turning off all the LEDs on the stage decoration substrate 2012 arranged on the rear side of the display unit 1426d in the bill unit 1426b, as shown in FIG. As shown, a “no pattern” bill portion 1426b can be used. The LED corresponding to the bill portion 1426b is a color LED capable of emitting various colors other than white. Depending on the color to be lit, not only the white “no pattern” but also the colored “no pattern” It is possible to display various effects by changing what is suggested by the color.

  On the other hand, the LEDs below the arc-shaped first partition 1426e in the bill portion 1426b are not turned on (turned off), and all the LEDs above the first partition 1426e are turned on in the same color (for example, white). As a result, the symbol “芒” as shown in FIG. Further, in this state, by changing the emission color of the LED above the first partition 1426e between the inside and the outside of the second partition 1426f, as shown in FIG. Can be displayed (for example, the inside of the second partition wall 1426f emits light in white and the outside in red).

  As described above, by appropriately emitting the LED disposed on the rear side of the bill portion 1426b in the sub decorative body 1426, a plurality of types of symbols can be displayed on the display portion 1426d. In addition to being able to display an appropriate symbol according to the gaming state and the lottery result by winning a game ball to each start port 1504, 1506, 2220, etc., the expectation for the game is enhanced by the displayed symbol It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  Next, the operation of the oscillator unit 2300 in the back unit 2000 will be described. In the normal gaming state, the swinging unit 2300 is located on the rear side (immediately after) of the main decorative body 1422 in the center accessory 1400, and is difficult to see from the player side. Yes. As shown in the figure, the rocking body 2310 in the rocking body unit 2300 is partially visible from the player side. Therefore, when the rocking body 2310 that is stationary enters a predetermined gaming state, It becomes possible to think that it comes out to the position where it can be seen, and when the rocking body 2310 moves, the rocking body 2310 can have a sense of expectation. Can be suppressed.

  The oscillating body unit 2300 of this example includes an oscillating mechanism 2320 including a first oscillating mechanism 2320a, a second oscillating mechanism 2320b, and a third oscillating mechanism 2320c, which respectively support two oscillating bodies 2310. . When the swing body solenoid 2322 included in the first swing mechanism 2320a, the second swing mechanism 2320b, and the third swing mechanism 2320c is driven according to the gaming state, each swing supported by the swing body solenoid 2322 is driven. The moving body 2310 moves from the rear side of the main decoration body 1422 to the front surface side of the liquid crystal display device 640 and moves to a position where it can be seen by the player, as shown in FIG. Since each of them is pivotally supported, even after the drive by the oscillating body solenoid 2322 is stopped, the oscillating body 2310 oscillates for a while due to the inertial force, and the oscillating body 2310 can be more enjoyed by the oscillating body 2310. As well as being able to attract the player's interest.

  Next, the operation of the traversing body unit 2500 in the back unit 2000 will be described. The traversing body unit 2500 includes four traversing bodies 2510 that are disposed on the rear side of the center accessory 1400 and on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 640 and can traverse in the left-right direction. The traversing body unit 2500 includes four traversing bodies 2510 that are divided into two in front and rear, and the front traversing body 2512 (front traversing body right 2512R and front traversing body left 2512L) arranged in the front side in the left-right direction. A front traversing body drive unit 2600 that traverses the front traversing body drive unit 2600 to be traversed and the rear traversing body 2514 (the rear traversing body right 2514R and the rear traversing body 2514L) disposed rearward of the front traversing body 2512. And. Each traversing body 2510 (2512, 2514) is moved out of the frame of the center accessory 1400 by the front traversing body drive unit 2600 and the rear traversing body drive unit 2700, and becomes invisible to the player. Move (transverse) between (invisible area A2) and a position (visible area A1) that is positioned in front of the liquid crystal display device 640 and visible to the player within the frame of the center accessory 1400. Can be done.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 108A, the traversing bodies 2510 (2512, 2514) in the traversing body unit 2500 are arranged so that the rear traversing bodies 2514R, 2514L are in contact with each other at the approximate center in the left-right direction. The front traversing bodies 2512R and 2512L are arranged at positions where they contact each other on the left and right sides of the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L. One traversing body 2510 covers the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640, that is, a plurality of traversing bodies 2510 are closed.

  Then, from the state in which the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is closed by the four traversing bodies 2510, first, the drive motors 2714 and 2754 of the rear traversing body drive unit 2700 are driven to rotate in appropriate directions, and the left rear traversing body left 2514L is moved to the left side and the right rear traversing body right 2514R is moved to the right side at substantially the same time (see (a) in the figure). When the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are moved to positions so as to substantially overlap the front traversing bodies 2512R and 2512L, the driving motors 2614 and 2654 of the front moving body driving unit 2600 are further driven to rotate in an appropriate direction, and the right front The traversing body right 2512R is moved to the right side, and the left front traversing body left 2512L is moved to the left side. As a result, the right and left front traversing bodies 2512R and 2512L and the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L move in a state where they overlap each other (see FIG. 9C).

  Thereafter, when the detection pieces 2510k of the traversing bodies 2512R, 2512L, 2514R, and 2514L are detected by the corresponding open position sensors 2810, 2811, 2812, and 2813, the respective drive motors 2614, 2654, 2714, and 2754 are turned on. Stop. Thereby, the front traversing bodies 2512R and 2512L and the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L move outward from the frame (viewable area A1) of the center accessory 1400 and do not overlap the front of the liquid crystal display device 640 (not visible). Area A2), that is, a state in which a plurality of traversing bodies 2510 are opened, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 is completely exposed (opened) to the player side. See).

  Incidentally, as an operation of each traversing body 2510 in which the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is closed from the traversing body 2510 to a fully opened state, for example, FIG. It is good also as operation | movement like the example shown in. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109, first, the front of the liquid crystal display device 640 is closed by the four traversing bodies 2510 (see FIG. 109A). The drive motors 2614, 2654, 2714, and 2754 are driven to rotate in appropriate directions, the right front traversing body right 2512R and the rear traversing body right 2514R are moved rightward, and the left front traversing body left 2512L and the rear traversing body left 2514L are moved. The left and right directions are moved substantially simultaneously and moved so that the traversing body 2510 opens left and right from the center in the left and right direction (see (a) in the figure). First, when the detection pieces 2510k of the front traversing bodies 2512R and 2512L are detected by the front right open position sensor 2810 and the front left open position sensor 2811, respectively, the front right drive motor 2614 and the front left drive motor 2654 are stopped. (See (c) in the figure). Thereafter, the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are further moved, and when the detection pieces 2510k of the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are detected by the rear right open position sensor 2812 and the rear left open position sensor 2813, respectively, the rear left drive motor 2714 Then, the rear right drive motor 2754 is stopped (see (D) in the figure). As a result, the front traversing bodies 2512R and 2512L and the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are moved from the frame of the center accessory 1400 to the outside so that the plurality of traversing bodies 2510 are opened, and the display of the liquid crystal display device 640 is performed. The screen can be completely exposed to the player side.

  Although illustration is omitted, a state in which the liquid crystal display device 640 is exposed (a state in which the plurality of traversing bodies 2510 are opened) to a state in which the liquid crystal display device 640 is covered with the traversing body 2510 (a state in which the plurality of traversing bodies 2510 are closed). In this case, first, the traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L may start traversing to the closed position, and then the front traversing bodies 2512R and 2512L may start traversing to the closed position. The body 2512R, 2512L and the rear traversing body 2514R, 2514L may be started to traverse to the closed position substantially simultaneously.

  By the way, in the traversing body unit 2500 according to the present embodiment, each traversing body 2510 can traverse between the left and right invisible areas A2 and the visible area A1 independently. It is possible to traverse from the impossible area A2 to the opposite side across the center in the left-right direction in the visible area A1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110, for example, when focusing on one traversing body 2510 (right rear traversing body right 2514R in the figure), the rear traversing body right 2514R (in the invisible area A1 on the right side) (See (A) in the figure) is moved leftward (see (B) and (C) in the figure), and within the left unrecognizable area A2 on the opposite side across the center in the horizontal direction of the visible area A1. The rear traversing body 2514R can be moved until it comes into contact with the right end of the rear traversing body left 2514L (see FIG. 4D). The above-mentioned range is set as the maximum range, and the other traversing bodies 2510 have the same maximum range. Can be moved within.

  In the example shown in FIG. 111, two traversing bodies 2510 arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction move in the same direction, and one traversing body 2510 attaches to and traverses the other traversing body 2510. This is an example. In this example, a front traversing body right 2512R and a rear traversing body right 2514R are arranged in the right invisible area A2, and a front traversing body left 25121L and a rear traversing body left 2514L are arranged in the left invisible area A2, respectively. In this state, the rear traversing body right 2514R starts moving leftward at a predetermined speed from the invisible area A2 on the right side. Then, when substantially the entire rear traversing body right 2514R enters the viewable area A1, the front traversing body right 2512R starts moving in the left direction (see FIG. 5A). At this time, the moving speed of the front traversing body right 2512R is set to be higher than the moving speed of the rear traversing body right 2514R (see FIG. 5A).

  As described above, since the moving speed of the front traversing body right 2512R is faster than that of the rear traversing body right 2514R, the rear traversing body right 2514R and the front traversing body right 2512R are approximately in the front-rear direction. It becomes a state where they coincide with each other, and the traversing bodies 2514R and 2512R instantaneously overlap each other (see (c) in the figure). From this state, the rear traversing body right 2514R and the front traversing body right 2512R move leftward, and due to the speed difference between them, the front traversing body right 2512R protrudes to the left of the rear traversing body right 2514R, The traversing body right 2512R overtakes the rear traversing body right 2514R (see FIG. 5D). Thereafter, the front traversing body right 2512R that has overtaken the rear traversing body right 2514R comes into contact with the right end of the front traversing body left 2512L arranged in the left invisible area A2, and the movement is stopped and the rear traversing The body right 2514R arrives at the front traversing body right 2512R that has stopped first, and stops (see (v) in the figure).

  In this manner, the front traversing body right 2512R arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction can be moved so as to overtake the rear traversing body right 2514R, and one traversing body 2510 pulls out the other traversing body 2510. As a result, the player can be surprised and the movement of the traversing body 2510 can be enjoyed, and the player can have a sense of expectation, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. In this example, the front traversing body right 2512R and the rear traversing body right 2514R are shown as examples. However, the front traversing body left 2512L and the rear traversing body left 2514L may be used, or the front traversing bodies 2512R and 2512L and the rear traversing body may be used. The bodies 2514R and 2514L may be appropriately combined. Further, although the front traversing body 2512 is shown to overtake the rear traversing body 2514, the rear traversing body 2514 may overtake the front traversing body 2512.

  Next, the example of FIG. 112 is an example in which two traversing bodies 2510 arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction move in different directions and cross. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 112, first, the front traversing body right 2512R and the rear traversing body right 2514R are respectively arranged in the right invisible area A2, and the front traversing body left 25121L in the left invisible area A2. In addition, the rear traversing body left 2514L is arranged, and the traversing bodies 2510 are opened left and right so that the liquid crystal display device 640 is completely exposed (see FIG. 5A). In this state, the front traversing body left 2512L in the left invisible area A2 starts moving to the right, and the rear traversing body right 2514R in the right invisible area A2 starts to move to the left (at substantially the same speed). (See Figure (a)).

  Then, the front traversing body left 2512L and the rear traversing body right 2514R substantially overlap each other in the front-rear direction at the substantially center in the left-right direction in the viewable area A1, and then the front traversing is performed. The body left 2512L further moves to the right side, and the rear traversing body right 2514R further moves to the left side, and shifts from the overlapped state to the separated state (see FIG. 4D). Thereafter, the movement stops so that the front traversing body left 2512L is in contact with the left end of the front traversing body right 2512R disposed in the right invisible area A2, and the rear traversing body right 2514R is moved to the left invisible area A2. The movement stops so as to come into contact with the right end of the traversing body left 2514L (see (v) in the figure).

  In this manner, the front traversing body left 2512L and the rear traversing body right 2514R arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction can be operated to cross each other within the viewable area A1, and are separated from each other in the left-right direction. By crossing the one traversing body 2510 and the other traversing body 2510, a dynamic motion can be imparted to the traversing body 2510, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Next, the example of FIG. 113 is an example of movement different from that of FIG. 108 and FIG. 109 described above in the operation of covering (closing) the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 with the four traversing bodies 2510. In this example, first, as shown in FIG. 113A, the rear traversing body right 2514R from the right invisible area A2 is arranged in the left invisible area A2 in the visible area A1. It is in a state where it is substantially in contact with the right end of the body left 2514L (the same state as FIG. 110 (d)). When a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 to 30 seconds) elapses from this state, the rear traversing body right 2514R and the rear traversing body left 2514L start to move to the right at the same speed, and the rear traversing body When the left frame of the left 2514L substantially coincides with the right frame of the front traversing body left 2512L in the front-rear direction, the movement is stopped (see FIG. 5A). With this movement, the rear traversing body right 2514R and the rear traversing body left 2514L move as if they were attached to each other, and the rear traversing body right 2514R is pushed by the rear traversing body left 2514L, or The movement is such that the rear traversing body right 2514R pulls out the rear traversing body left 2514L. Further, as shown in the drawing, the left half of the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is covered with the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L.

  Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds to 30 seconds) elapses from the above state, a rear traversing body right 2514R, a rear traversing body left 2514L, and a front traversing body left 2512L are respectively displayed. At the same time, it starts to move to the right at the same speed, and when the position where the rear traversing body right 2514R and the rear traversing body left 2514L contact each other reaches the approximate center in the left-right direction of the viewable area A1, the movement stops, and the liquid crystal display device 640 Approximately 3/4 of the front surface of the front is covered with the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L and the front traversing body left 2512L (see FIG. 5C). Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds to 30 seconds) elapses from this state, the front traversing body right 2512R arranged in the invisible area A2 on the right side starts moving in the left direction, and the front traversing body When the left frame of the right 2512R is substantially coincident with the right frame of the rear traversing body right 2514R stopped in the viewable area A1, the movement of the front traversing body right 2512R is stopped, and the four traversing bodies 2510 cause the liquid crystal display device 640 to move. The front surface is covered (closed) (see FIG. 4D).

  A series of operations as shown in FIG. 113 enables the stage body 2510 to perform stage effects such that the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is covered step by step. This makes it possible for a player to have a sense of expectation for a game and to enhance his expectation.

  The next example in FIG. 114 is an example of a different movement from the above-described example in the operation of covering (closing) the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 with four traversing bodies 2510. In this example, the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is completely exposed, the front traversing body right 2512R and the rear traversing body right 2514R are in the right invisible area A2, and the front traversing body left 2512L and the rear in the left invisible area A2. From the state in which the traversing body left 2514L is disposed (see (A) in the figure), the rear traversing body right 2514R starts to move leftward (see (A) in the figure). Then, when the rear traversing body right 2514R reaches a position where it substantially contacts the right end of the rear traversing body left 2514L disposed in the left invisible area A2, the movement stops, and the rear traversing body right 2514R It will be in the state arrange | positioned at the left end of visually recognizable area | region A1 (refer the same figure (c)). This state is the same as the state shown in FIGS. 110 (D) and 113 (A).

  From this state, this time, the front traversing body left 2512L arranged in the invisible area A2 on the left side starts to move rightward so as to cross the front side of the rear traversing body right 2514R (see FIG. See), when the right end of the front traversing body left 2512L reaches a position that is substantially in contact with the left end of the front traversing body right 2512R arranged in the invisible area A2 on the right side, the movement stops and the front traversing body left 2512L will be in the state arrange | positioned at the right end of visual recognition area | region A1 (refer the same figure (e)). That is, the rear traversing body right 2514R and the front traversing body left 2512L are arranged at the left end of the visible area A1 and the right end of the visible area A1, respectively. In the above-described operation, the rear traversing body right 2514R and the front traversing body left 2512L are moved over time, but they are simultaneously moved and crossed at substantially the center as in the example of FIG. You may do it.

  Then, from the state in which the rear traversing body right 2514R and the front traversing body left 2512L are arranged at the left and right ends of the visible area A1, the rear traversing body right 2514R and the rear traversing body left 2514L are simultaneously moved to the right at the same speed. When the right end of the rear traversing body right 2514R reaches the center in the left-right direction of the visually recognizable area A1, the respective movements are stopped (see (f) in the figure). Thereafter, the front traversing body left 2512L and the front traversing body right 2512R are simultaneously moved to the left at the same speed, and the left end of the front traversing body left 2512L reaches approximately the center in the left-right direction of the viewable area A1, and the left frame Is substantially coincident with the right frame of the rear traversing body right 2514R, the respective movements are stopped, and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is completely covered (closed) by the four traversing bodies 2510 (see FIG. )).

  In this example, the movements in (e) to (g) in the figure are such that two transverse bodies 2510 appear so as to cover the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640, as in the example of FIG. 113 described above. As the traversing body 2510 appears one by one, it is possible to express a greater movement compared to the movement of covering the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 step by step, and the player can be more entertained. Yes. In this example, unlike the examples in FIGS. 108 and 113 described above, two back traversing bodies 2514 are arranged on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the viewable area A1, as shown in the figure. The two front traversing bodies 2512 are arranged on the right side from the center in the left-right direction of the viewable area A1, and the state of covering the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is clearly different, which is special for the player. It can be made to recognize that it is in a state.

  The subsequent example of FIG. 115 is an example of the operation of completely exposing the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 from the state of FIG. As shown in FIG. 115A, the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are arranged on the left side in the viewable area A1, and the front traversing bodies 2152R and 2512L are arranged on the right side to completely cover the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640. In this state, the front traversing body right 2512R and the rear traversing body right 2514R are simultaneously started to move to the right at substantially the same speed, and the front traversing body left 2512L and the rear traversing body left 2514L are approximately Start moving to the left simultaneously at the same speed (see (a) in the figure). By this movement, the front traversing body right 2512R enters the right invisible area A2, the rear traversing body left 2514L enters the left invisible area A2, and the front traversing body left 2512L and the rear traversing body right 2514R. Move in the front-rear direction substantially at the center in the left-right direction in the visible area A1.

  Then, when the rear traversing body 2514L that moves to the left and the front traversing body right 2512R that moves to the right move into the left and right invisible areas A2, the movement of the respective traversing bodies 2514L and 2512R stops. . On the other hand, the front traversing body left 2512L and the rear traversing body right 2514R, which overlap at substantially the center of the viewable area A1, move the front traversing body left 2512L further to the left and the rear traversing body right 2514R further to the right. (Refer to (c) in the same figure), and gradually shift from the partially overlapped state (see (D) in the same figure). Thereafter, the front traversing body left 2512L enters the left invisible area A2 and the rear traversing body right 2514R enters the right invisible area A2, respectively (see (e) in the figure), and the front traversing body left 2512L and the rear When the traversing body right 2514R moves into the left and right invisible areas A2, the movement of the traversing bodies 2512L and 2514R stops, and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is completely exposed (opened). (See (f) in the figure).

  In this example, since the two transverse bodies 2512L and 2514R in the center are separated after being crossed, the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is completely exposed. The movement is completely different from the movement in the example in which each traversing body 2510 is divided to the left and right at the approximate center in the left and right direction of the area A1, so that the player's attention can be strongly attracted and entertained. It has become. In this example, first, the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are arranged on the left side in the viewable area A1, and the front traversing bodies 2152R and 2512L are arranged on the right side to completely cover the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640. However, the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L may be disposed from the center to the right side, and the front traversing bodies 2512R and 2512L may be disposed from the center to the left side.

  Next, the example of FIG. 116 is an example of the movement of each traversing body different from the above-described example in a state where the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is covered. In this example, as in the above-described FIG. 108A and the like, the two rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are arranged at substantially the center of the viewable area A1, and the front traversing bodies 2512L are arranged to the left and right of the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L. , 2512R are arranged, and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is completely covered (see FIG. 4A). In this state, as shown in the figure, the four traversing bodies 2510 are arranged so as to be substantially in contact with each other in the left-right direction, and in this state, the four traversing bodies 2510 are simultaneously moved in the same direction at substantially the same speed (same as above). (See Figure (a) or (c)). Accordingly, the four traversing bodies 2510 arranged in the left-right direction are aligned and moved in the same direction, so that the player can be surprised. Further, only the left end of the liquid crystal display device 640 whose front surface is covered can be exposed, or only the right end can be exposed.

  The example of FIG. 117 is an example of movement in a state where two traversing bodies 2510 are substantially in contact with each other, and here, a description will be given in a state where the two back traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are in contact with each other. In FIG. 6A, the left lateral body left 2514L and the rear lateral body right 2514R move from the left and right invisible areas A2 to the right and left, respectively, at the substantially horizontal center of the visible area A1, respectively. In this state, the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are stopped so as to be in contact with each other. From this state, the two rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are simultaneously moved in the same direction at substantially the same speed (see FIG. See c)). As a result, the two traversing bodies 2510 stick together and move, and the traversing body 2510 whose appearance has increased by sticking moves in the left-right direction, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It has become.

  The two traversing bodies 2510 attached may be moved in the left-right direction only in the viewable area A1, or may be moved in the left-right direction so that at least a part enters the invisible area A2. You may do it. In this example, two traversing bodies 2510 using two rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are shown, but two front traversing bodies 2512R and 2512L may be used, or the front traversing body 2512 and the rear traversing body 2512 may be used. One body 2514 may be used at a time.

  Further, the example of FIG. 118 is an example of the arrangement of the traversing bodies 2510 in the viewable area A1, and in this example, the left and right front traversing bodies 2512L and 2512R are arranged near both left and right ends in the viewable area A1, respectively. In addition, the rear traversing body right 2514R arranged in the invisible area A2 on the right side is arranged in the approximate center of the visible area A1, and the front traversing bodies 2512L and 2512R and the rear traversing Each traversing body 2510 is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the body right 2514R and the left-right direction (see FIG. 5C). In this example, most of the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 can be covered by the three traversing bodies 2512L, 2512R, and 2514R arranged in the viewable area A1, and the three traversing bodies. The rear liquid crystal display device 640 faces the gap between 2512L, 2512R, and 2514R. Although not shown in detail, the three traversing bodies 2512L, 2512R on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 are arranged so that the three traversing bodies 2512L, 2512R, 2514R and the three operation buttons 330 are associated with each other. , 2514R are displayed at respective positions corresponding to the predetermined guidance, so that the guidance is displayed on the three traversing bodies 2512L, 2512R, 2514R, and the three operation buttons 330 are displayed. It is possible to prompt one of the operations.

  Although detailed illustration and description are omitted, when the moving effect of the traversing body 2510 shown in FIG. 108 to FIG. 118 is given, the liquid crystal display device 640 is subjected to a predetermined motion in accordance with the movement of the traversing moving body 5210. An effect image is displayed, and not only the movement of the traversing body 2510 but also the effect image displayed together with the movement of the traversing body 2510 can entertain the player.

<Game contents>
The game content in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference mainly to FIGS. 119 to 135. FIG. 119 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board, and FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the peripheral control board. FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a normal lottery result effect image that suggests a lottery result by a start winning prize. 122 (B1) to (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect in which only one traversing body appears in the lottery result notice effect, and (C) is an effect different from (B1) to (B4). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example, (D1)-(D3) is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the further different production. (E1) to (E2) in FIG. 123 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effects in which two adjacent traversing bodies appear in the lottery result notice effect and one large previous effect image is displayed, (F1) to (F1) F2) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect in which two traversing bodies appear sequentially in the lottery result notice effect, and (G1) to (G4) are examples showing effects different from (F1) to (F2). FIG. 124 (H1) to (H4) are explanatory views showing examples of effects further different from (F1) to (F2) in FIG. 123, and (I1) to (I4) are (H1) to (H4). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect different from.

  Also, (J1) to (J4) in FIG. 125 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effects further different from (F1) to (F2) in FIG. 123, and (K1) to (K4) in the lottery result notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect which three traversing bodies appear sequentially. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of effects different from (K1) to (K4) in FIG. 127 (M1) to (M4) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of effects in which four traversing bodies appear in sequence and cover the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, and (N1) to (N4) are (M1) to (M1) It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the effect different from (M4). FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect different from the example of FIG. 127. FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect further different from the examples of FIGS. 127 and 128.

  Further, FIG. 130 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a lottery result special notice effect. FIG. 131 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a lottery result special notice effect different from FIG. 132 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect using a rampant body in the reach development effect, and FIG. 133 is an explanatory diagram showing a reach development effect following FIG. 132. 134 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of reach development effects different from the examples of FIGS. 132 and 133, and FIG. 135 is an explanatory diagram showing reach development effects following FIG. FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the reach development notice effect that notifies the development effect following the reach.

  First, a functional configuration relating to game effect control on the main control board 1350 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 119 and the like. Note that a functional configuration relating to payout of game balls will be omitted. In the main control board 1350 of this example, various game controls, performance controls, and the like are implemented by executing a predetermined program stored in advance in the ROM 3004 by the CPU 3002. When a game ball detection signal is input from the gate sensor 3012 to the main control board 1350, a normal random number generating means 3050 for generating a predetermined normal random number that becomes a lottery result for the normal symbol, and the generated normal random number are determined in advance. The normal symbol hold storage means 3052 that temporarily stores data in accordance with the above conditions, and the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal random number stored and executed by the normal symbol hold storage means 3052 is stored in the ROM 3004. A normal symbol variation pattern selecting means 3054 for selecting from the normal symbol variation pattern table, a normal symbol display control means 3056 for variably displaying the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1806 based on the selected normal symbol variation pattern, and a normal symbol. The normal random number (normal When the selection result is “ordinary hit”, the start opening / closing control means 3058 for driving the start opening solenoid 1516 to expand the pair of movable pieces 1508 and the normal figure random number stored in the normal symbol storage section 3052 And a normal symbol memory number display control means 3060 for causing the normal symbol memory number display unit 1812 to display the number as a memory number.

  The normal symbol hold storage means 3052 described above generates a predetermined number of normal random numbers (for example, four) generated by the detection signal of the game ball from the gate sensor 3012 while the normal symbol display control means 3056 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. ) And the execution of the stored normal random number is suspended until the normal symbol can be displayed in a variable manner.

  Further, on the main control board 1350, a detection signal detected by the first start port sensor 2112 by the start winning to the first start port 1504, or detected by the stage start port sensor 2114 by the start winning to the stage start port 2220. First special random number generation means 3062 for generating a predetermined first special random number that becomes a first special lottery result for the first special symbol based on the detected signal, and the first special random number generation means 3062 generated by the first special random number generation means 3062 A first special symbol hold storage means 3064 for temporarily storing the special random number according to a predetermined condition, and a first special random number corresponding to the first special random number stored and executed by the first special symbol hold storage means 3064 A first special symbol variation pattern selection for selecting a special symbol variation pattern from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in the ROM 3004 in advance. Means 3066 and first special symbol display control means 3068 for variably displaying the first special symbol of the first special symbol indicator 1802 based on the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selected by the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection means 3066. And a first special symbol memory number display control means 3070 for displaying the number of the first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation memory means 3064 as a memory number on the first special symbol memory number display 1808. ing.

  Further, the main control board 1350 has a predetermined second lottery result for the second special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the second start port sensor 1522 by the start winning to the second start port 1506. A second special random number generating means 3072 for generating a special random number; a second special symbol holding storage means 3074 for temporarily storing the second special random number generated in the second special random number generating means 3072 according to a predetermined condition; A second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the second special random number stored and stored in the second special symbol storage means 3074 is selected from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in the ROM 3004 in advance. Based on the second special symbol variation pattern selection unit 3076 and the second special symbol variation pattern selection unit 3076 selected by the second special symbol variation pattern selection unit 3076 The second special symbol display control means 3078 for variably displaying the second special symbol of the two special symbol display 1804, and the second special random number stored in the second special symbol storage means 3074 as the stored number. Second special symbol memory number display control means 3080 to be displayed on the special symbol memory number display 1810 is provided.

These first special symbol storage unit 3064 and second special symbol storage unit 3074 are:
When the first and second special symbol display control means 3068 and 3078 cannot newly display the special symbol such as when the first and second special symbols are variably displayed, the first start port sensor 2112 and the stage start port sensor The first special random number and the second special random number triggered by the detection signal from the 2114 and the second start port sensor 1522 are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, four each), and the special symbols can be displayed in a variable manner. The execution of the first special random number and the second special random number stored up to is suspended.

  Further, the main control board 1350 stores the first special random number (first special lottery result) and the second special random number (second special random number) stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 3064 and the second special symbol hold storage unit 3074. An advantageous gaming state generating means 3082 for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous based on a special lottery result), and an opening / closing piece 1512 for closing the special prize opening 1510 based on an instruction from the advantageous gaming state generating means 3082 A prize winning opening / closing control means 3084 for controlling the driving of the attacker solenoid 1518 so as to open / close in a predetermined pattern is provided.

  Further, the main control board 1350 has a first special random number or a second special random number (first special symbol variation pattern or second special symbol variation pattern) in which an advantageous gaming state is generated by the advantageous gaming state generation means 3082, Fluctuation pattern table changing means 3086 for changing the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table is further provided. For example, the variation pattern table changing unit 3086 changes the variation pattern in which an advantageous gaming state occurs to a variation pattern table (for example, a high probability variation pattern table) selected with a higher probability than the normal variation pattern table ( So-called probability variation), changing to a variation pattern table with a shorter variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol than the normal variation pattern table (for example, a time shortening variation pattern table) (so-called time reduction), The probability is changed to a variation pattern table (for example, a probability variation time variation pattern table) having a high probability of occurrence of an advantageous gaming state and a special symbol having a shorter variation time (so-called probability variation / short variation pattern table).

  Further, the main control board 1350 includes a normal symbol variation pattern, a first symbol variation pattern, a second symbol variation pattern, and a first special symbol memory number corresponding to the normal random number, the first special random number, and the second special random number. Based on the second special symbol memory number and the like, command generation means 3088 for generating a command for predetermined control such as a production command, and command transmission for transmitting the command generated by the command generation means 3088 to the peripheral control board 3100 Means 3090.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control board 3100 has a command receiving means 3150 for receiving a control command transmitted from the main control board 1350, and an effect pattern stored in the ROM 3104 based on the command received by the command receiving means 3150. Control by the effect pattern selection means 3152 for selecting the game, the effect control means 3154 for controlling a predetermined game effect presented to the player based on the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection means 3152, and the effect control means 3154 Motors 2614, 2654, 2714, 2754 for driving the four traversing bodies 2510, a petal motor 3128 for rotating the petal decoration body 1424a of the rotating decoration body 1424, and three swing bodies for swinging the swing body 2310. Moveable by driving solenoid 2322 as appropriate Controlled by a movable effect control means 3156 and an effect control means 3154 that can control the output, and controlled by an effect image control means 3158 and an effect control means 3154 that can control an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. Light emission effect control capable of controlling the light emission effect performed by turning on / flashing LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 1426b, 2010, 2012, 2328, 2511, 3124, 3126, 3130 and emitting light in various colors. Means 3160 and effect sound control means 3162 that is controlled by the effect control means 3154 and can drive a speaker 163 to control a predetermined effect sound.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 3100, the object detection sensor 1428 can accept or cannot accept the object detection by the effect control means 3154 that controls the effect according to the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection means 3152. An accepting unit 3164, and an operation accepting unit 3166 that can accept or cannot accept the operation signal of the operation button 330 (330a, 330b, 330c) by the effect control unit 3154 that controls the effect according to the selected effect pattern. I have.

  Further, on the peripheral control board 3100, a pre-effect image control means 3158a for controlling a pre-effect image corresponding to the frame-shaped main body 2510a of the traversing body 2510 arranged on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640, and the liquid crystal display device 640 The post-effect image control means 3158b for controlling the post-effect image over the entire screen, and appropriate effects (for example, white-out / white-in, black-out / black-in, wipe processing) Effect control means 3158c for performing mosaic processing, blurring, image rotation, image deformation, effect line insertion, and the like, and the front effect image, the rear effect image, the effect, and the like at appropriate positions of a plurality of layers in the effect image And image synthesizing means 3158d for arranging and synthesizing them. The effect image control means 3158 is constituted by the front effect image control means 3158a, the rear effect image control means 3158b, the effect control means 3158c, the image composition means 3158d, and the like.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment configured as described above, the player rotates the operation handle portion 461 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5, whereby the storage portion 381 of the dish unit 300 is operated. The game balls stored in the game game 605 are driven into the upper part of the game area 605 disposed on the front surface of the transparent game panel 599, and the game with the game balls is started. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 605 flows down in the game area 605 on the upper left side or the right side of the center accessory 1400 depending on the driving strength. Note that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 461, and the game ball can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 605, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 599 with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When a game ball driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 1400 flows down from the left and right sides to the guide shelf 1416 of the center accessory 1400, the guide shelf 1416 moves to the left area of the center accessory 1400. It is induced. When a game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 1400 enters the gate entrance 1404 opened on the left side surface of the center accessory 1400 and is detected by the gate sensor 3012, the main control board is based on the detection signal. At 1350, the ordinary random number generating means 3050 generates an ordinary random number as the ordinary lottery result. Based on the normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1806 in the status indicator 1800 is variably displayed (the normal symbol display 1806 made of one LED emits light alternately in red and green) A normal symbol extracted based on a normal random number (normal lottery result) extracted after a lapse of time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) is stopped (the normal symbol display 1806 emits red or green light). The normal symbol variation display is performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table.

  Specifically, if the selected random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped (the normal symbol display 1806 emits green light), and the selected normal random number is a “normal lose” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol display 1806 emits red light). Then, when the normal symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 1508 that close the second start port 1506 expands for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), and the first A game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 1506.

  The fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 1508 at the second start port 1506 may be changed according to a special random number (special lottery result) described later. When “short time per hour (including normal short time per hour, high probability per short time, etc.)” is extracted as the lottery result), the variation time or the expansion time may be changed to a short time. Specifically, the normal pattern variation pattern table for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern by the normal symbol variation pattern selection unit 3054 is changed (replaced) with a different table by the variation pattern table changing unit 3086, and then selected. It can be easily changed.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, on the upper side of the center accessory 1400, an area where a game ball can flow is provided from the center to the left side in the left-right direction, but the right side from the center follows the outer periphery of the game area 605. An arc-shaped area extending downward is provided, and when a game ball enters this area, the game ball is sent to the lower side of the center accessory 1400 without obtaining an opportunity to enter the gate entrance 1404 or the warp entrance 1410. As a result, the chances are reduced and the movement of the game ball becomes less enjoyable. Therefore, the player plays the game by appropriately adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 461 so that the game ball flows down from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the center accessory 1400 to the left side. It is possible to prevent the game from being reduced by reducing the game operation such that the player is strongly driven and entertaining the game by operating the operation handle portion 461 of the pachinko machine 1.

  By the way, in this example, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 3012 while the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1806 while the normal symbol is changing, the normal symbol that is changing is stopped and the normal random number generating means 3050 first stops. Until the result of the generated / extracted normal random number is confirmed, the normal random number extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 3012 is temporarily stored by the normal symbol storage unit 3052 and the display is held. The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of holdings) is displayed on a normal symbol storage number display 1812. This normal symbol memory number display 1812 is composed of two LEDs, and suggests the number of memories depending on the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four Memorize and display. When the number of memories exceeds 4, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 3012 is discarded.

  In addition, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 and has flowed down the left side of the center bonus 1400 is played below the center bonus 1400 by the guide shelf 1602 of the side member 1600 and the guide piece 1514 of the attacker unit 1500. It comes to be brought to the center side of. When a game ball wins a general winning opening 1502 arranged below the center bonus 1400 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 2110, the main control board 1350 pays out a payout control board 1186 based on the detection signal. The payout control board 1186 controls the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 in accordance with the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are stored in the storage unit 381. To be paid out.

  Note that the game ball that is driven into the game area 605 does not win any of the general winning opening 1502, the first starting opening 1504, the second starting opening 1506, the stage starting opening 2220, and the big winning opening 1510. The game area 605 is provided at the lower center in the left-right direction and is discharged from the out port 606 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins the general winning port 1502, the first starting port 1504, the second starting port 1506, or the big winning port 1510, the winning game ball is returned to the gaming area 605. The game board 4 is discharged to the lower rear side.

  On the other hand, when a game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 1400 enters the warp inlet 1410 that opens to the left side surface of the center accessory 1400, the first backside roll in the stage member 2200 of the back unit 2000 is performed via the warp passage 1414. It is supplied to the moving surface 2202. Then, the game ball supplied onto the first back-side rolling surface 2202 rolls on the first back-side rolling surface 2202 in the left-right direction, and is discharged forward from the recess 2202b, so that the second back-side rolling surface. 2204 is supplied. The game ball also rolls in the left-right direction on the second back-side rolling surface 2204 and is released onto the front accessory-side rolling surface 1402 from the recess 2204b. When the game ball supplied to the stage member 2200 enters the stage start port 2220 disposed on the rear side from the central recess 2202c on the first back-side rolling surface 2202, and enters the stage start port sensor 2114, the main ball A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage unit 381 via the control board 1350 and the like.

  When the game ball supplied to the stage member 2200 is not received in the variable receiving port 2220, the game ball is moved onto the accessory-side rolling surface 1402 of the center accessory 1400 disposed on the front side of the second back-side rolling surface 2204. After being supplied and rolled on the accessory-side rolling surface 1402 in the left-right direction, it is discharged from the recess 1402b into the game area 605. The concave portion 1402b of the accessory-side rolling portion 1402 is disposed immediately above (on the upper side of) the first starting port 1504, and a game ball released from the concave portion 1402b is highly likely to reach the first starting port 1504. It is supposed to be accepted. Therefore, even when the game ball supplied to the stage member 2200 is not received into the stage start port 2220, it is received from the recess 1402b of the accessory-side rolling unit 1402 and is received into the first start port 1504. There is a possibility, it is possible to keep the sense of expectation for acceptance and suppress the decline of interest. When a game ball is received by the first start port 1504 and detected by the first start port sensor 2112, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball unit 800 via the main control board 1350 and the like. Is paid out to the storage unit 381.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the first start port 1504, the second start port 1506, and the big winning port 1510 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, so that the concave portion 1402b of the accessory-side rolling surface 1402 is provided. The game ball released from the first start port 1504 or the like is received with high probability, and when the second start port 1506 or the big prize opening 1510 can be received, the game ball is released into the release port 1420 or the recess. Since it is highly likely that it will be accepted when released from 1402b, not only the first start opening 1504 but also the second start opening 1506 and the big prize opening 1510 are expected to have an expectation regarding the acceptance of the game balls. It can be raised.

  By the way, when the game ball enters the gate entrance 1404 and is detected by the gate sensor 3012 and “normal hit” is drawn as a normal lottery result, as described above, a pair of movable pieces that close the second start port 1506 When the game ball is received by the second start port 1506 and detected by the second start port sensor 1522 when 1508 is expanded for a predetermined time and can be won, the main control board 1350 and the like are Accordingly, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage unit 381.

  On the main control board 1350, a game ball wins the first start port 1504, the second start port 1506, and the stage start port 2220, and the first start port sensor 2112, the second start port sensor 1522, the stage start port. When detected by the sensor 2114, the first special random number generator 3062 generates and extracts a predetermined first special random number at the first start port 1504 and the stage start port 2220, and the second special random number is generated at the second start port 1506. A predetermined second special random number is generated and extracted by means 3072, respectively. Then, based on the extracted special random number, it is extracted after the display of variation of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1802 or second special symbol display 1804 of the status indicator 1800 is started. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result. In the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner suggesting “big hit”, the opening / closing piece 1512 of the attacker unit 1500 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game) occurs, and a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 1510 during that time, so that more game balls can be obtained. When one game ball wins the big prize opening 1510, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage unit 381.

  The first start port 1504, the second start port 1506, and the stage start port 2220 also display the first special symbol display 1802 and the second symbol as well as the normal symbol variation display due to the game ball entering the gate entrance 1404. When the special symbol is variably displayed on the two special symbol indicators 1804 or the special symbol such as the big hit game as the special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball wins the start opening 1504, 1506, 2220. The first start port sensor 2112, the second start port sensor 1522, and the stage start port sensor 2114 detect the first start port sensor 2112, the second start port until the special symbol variation display becomes possible. The first special symbol or the second special random number extracted based on the detection signals from the sensor 1522 and the stage start port sensor 2114 is used as the first special symbol. The display is stored by the storage unit 3064 or the second special symbol storage unit 3074, and the display thereof is held. The number of the stored special random numbers is stored in the first special symbol storage number display 1808 or the second It is displayed on a special symbol memory number display 1810. Each of the first special symbol memory number display 1808 and the second special symbol memory number display 1810 is composed of two LEDs, and suggests the memory number by the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. In addition, when the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random number is discarded.

  Further, in the main control board 1350, the first special random number extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 2112, the second start port sensor 1522, and the stage start port sensor 2114 and the special random number of the second special random number are stored in advance. By comparing with a predetermined random number determination table (also referred to as a special symbol variation pattern table) that has been determined, it is determined whether the special random number is “lost”, “small hit”, or “big hit” As for “big hit”, it is also determined whether it is “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, or “15R big hit”. In addition, the random number determination table is also used to discriminate such as “short hit per probability change”, “probability per hit”, “short hit per hour”, “short per hit during probability change”, and the like.

  Then, the first special random number and the second special random number extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game ball to the first start port 1504, the second start port 1506, and the stage start port 2220 (the special lottery result) In the case of “small hit”, the main control board 1350 opens and closes the open / close piece 1512 of the attacker unit 1500 in an open state for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). Is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice).

  On the other hand, if the extracted first special random number or second special random number is “big hit”, the main control board 1350 opens the open / close piece 1512 of the attacker unit 1500 for a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds). ) Or an open / close pattern that closes the open / close piece 1512 when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls satisfy any of the conditions for winning the prize winning opening 1510, one round of the open / close pattern Are repeated a predetermined number of times (the number of predetermined rounds), 2 rounds for “2R big hit”, 5 rounds for “5R big hit”, 15 rounds for “15R big hit”, respectively. Repeatedly, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. Note that, after the end of the predetermined number of rounds, with regard to “big hit”, the random number determination table is exchanged with a high-probability time / short table or the like according to the extracted special random number.

  In addition, if the extracted first special random number or second special random number (special lottery result) is "probable per win", "short per hour", or "short per hour during probable change", the advantageous gaming state related to that "win" ends Then, the special pattern fluctuation pattern table used in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection means 3066 and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection means 3076 is changed by the fluctuation pattern table changing means 3086 according to the special lottery result. ing. Specifically, when the special lottery result is “probable hit”, the change pattern table changing means 3086 creates a special symbol change pattern table in which the probability of selecting “small hit” or “big hit” is high. change. Further, when the special lottery result is “shorter per hour”, the variation pattern table changing means 3086 changes the special symbol variation pattern table so that the variation time of the special symbol is shorter than the normal time. Further, when the special lottery result is “short win at probability change”, the fluctuation pattern table changing means 3086 makes the probability of selecting “small hit” or “big hit” high and the fluctuation time of the special symbol is normal. Change to a special symbol variation pattern table that is shorter than the time. By changing the special symbol variation pattern table by the variation pattern table changing means 3086, the normal game state is changed to the probability variation state, the time short state, or the probability variation time short state, or the probability variation state, the time short state, or the probability variation time short state. It is possible to change to a normal gaming state.

  In this example, the special pattern is changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times to 20 times after the normal special symbol fluctuation pattern table is changed from the normal special symbol fluctuation pattern table to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for time variation or time reduction by the fluctuation pattern table changing means 3086. (150 times) When the variation is displayed, the normal special symbol variation pattern table is restored. In addition, when “small hit”, “big hit” or the like is drawn in the probability changing state or the short time state, the probability changing state or the short time state can be further continued.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special random number generation means 3062 and the second special random number generation means 3072 are obtained by starting winning of the game balls to the first start opening 1504, the stage start opening 2220, and the second start opening 1506. The first special symbol display 1808 and the second special symbol display 1810 of the status indicator 1800 are variably displayed in accordance with the first special random number and the second special random number generated / extracted in (according to the special lottery result). In addition, in the liquid crystal display device 640, a lottery result effect image is displayed as a lottery result effect suggesting a special lottery result according to a special random number (special lottery result).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121, in the liquid crystal display device 640, each symbol is displayed in a state where a series of symbol rows composed of a plurality of different symbols is displayed in three rows in the horizontal direction (see FIG. 121 (A1)). The change display of the column is started (see (A2) and (A3) in the figure), and then stopped in sequence (see (A4) to (A7) in the figure). When stopped (see (A8) in the same figure), the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the stopped symbols (left left symbol ZL, middle middle symbol ZC, right right symbol ZR) (Special lottery result) is suggested to the player side. That is, according to the special lottery result by the start winning, an effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result after a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed is displayed. Since the symbols ZL, ZC, and ZR displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 are larger and easier to see than the special symbols of the first and second special symbol indicators 1808 and 1810, generally, a player uses a liquid crystal display device. Attention is paid to the symbols ZL, ZC, and ZR displayed on the screen 640, so that the variation display of the symbols ZL, ZC, and ZR and various effect images can be enjoyed.

  In this lottery result effect, a “lottery result notice effect” for notifying the special lottery result during the variable display of a plurality of symbol sequences can be performed according to the lottery special lottery result. This “lottery result notice effect” may be a predetermined character appearing directly on the liquid crystal display device 640 or indirectly through the main body frame 2510a of the traversing body 2510, or a display effect is displayed by the sub decoration body 1426, or The possibility that the special lottery result is “winning” or “losing” by appropriately driving the rotating decoration body 1424, the rocking body 2310, and the four traversing bodies 2510 (also referred to as an expected value). Can be recognized by the player.

  Further, in the lottery result effect, as one of the lottery result effect images in which a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed, the symbols ZL, ZC, which are stopped and displayed while leaving one variable symbol sequence (mainly the central symbol sequence). There is a “reach effect image” as a “reach effect” displayed so that the combination of ZRs can satisfy a specific condition (an advantageous game state such as “big hit game”) (for example, an effect as shown in FIG. 121) Image), and the special lottery result on which this “reach effect image” is displayed includes “per reach” and “reach lose”. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 121 (A5) to (A7), when the left and right symbols ZL and ZR become the same pattern and become “reach”, the respective symbols ZL and ZR emit light (see FIG. 121A). (Refer to (A6)), it is made clear to the player that it has become “reach”.

  Further, there is also a “reach development effect image” as a “reach development effect” that is displayed so as to be connected to the “reach effect” and that displays the remaining symbols that are variably displayed after the reach display. Further, prior to the “reach development effect”, there is also a “reach development notice image” as a “reach development notice effect” for notifying the development after “reach”. Further, the liquid crystal display device 640 can display not only an effect image related to the start prize (lottery result effect image) but also a “hit game effect image” as a “hit game effect” displayed during the “hit” game. It is said that. Even during these effects, the traversing body 2510 and the like are appropriately driven in accordance with the special lottery result so that a movable effect is performed.

  Note that the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 1808 and the second special symbol display 1810 is directly controlled by the main control board 1350 (see FIG. 103). The variation display of the symbols ZL, ZC, ZR on the liquid crystal display device 640 is performed by the peripheral control board 3100 and the liquid crystal display control board 3112 based on a command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 1350 to the peripheral control board 3100. To be controlled. As a result, the variation display of the symbols ZL, ZC, ZR on the liquid crystal display device 640 that is particularly noticed by the player is controlled by the peripheral control board 3100 and the like, so that the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 1350 In response to a certain command, a plurality of patterns ZL, ZC, ZR can be prepared in advance, and the patterns ZL, ZC, ZR in the liquid crystal display device 640 can be increased. In addition, the “big hit game effect” displayed during the “big hit” game is controlled by the peripheral control board 3100 and the like, and various pattern effects are prepared in advance. This makes it possible to increase the display pattern of the effect image and the movable pattern of the movable effect by the traversing body 2510 without increasing the processing load on the main control board 1350, and the pachinko machine that makes the player more entertained and less likely to get bored. 1 can be set.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the symbols in the symbol row indicating the special lottery result displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 include general symbols (for example, a predetermined color) (for example, , “One”, “two”, “four”, “six”) and special symbols (for example, “three”, “five”, “seven”, “gold”) that have colors different from general symbols When the result of the special lottery is “probable per win”, “short per hour”, or “short per hour during probable change”, a combination of symbols consisting only of general symbols is displayed in a stopped manner. In other words, when an advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit” gaming state, “small hit” gaming state, etc.) is generated by a combination of symbols of general symbols only, the gaming state after the “big hit” gaming is changed to a probable state or a short time. The state is changed (or continued) so that the player can recognize that the probable state, the short time state, etc. are started (or continued).

[Lottery result notice effect]
Next, the “lottery result notice effect” in the lottery result effect of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be specifically described. This “lottery result notice effect” is based on a special random number (special lottery result) generated by the start winning at the start ports 1504, 2220, 1506 (the special lottery result) by the effect pattern selection means 3152 in a predetermined effect pattern table. When the variable display of the three symbol sequences displayed on the liquid crystal display means 640 is started, for example, a predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. By making it appear, before the special lottery result is suggested (before all the symbol sequences are stopped and displayed), the expected value for “big hit” is recognized by the player by the appearing character. As a result, the variation display of the symbols ZL, ZC, ZR is sharpened to make the lottery result effect difficult to get tired, and the lottery result effect can enhance the expectation and entertain the game.

  In the “lottery result notice effect”, not only the lottery result notice effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display means 640 but also the traversing body 2510 and the like are appropriately moved, and the main body of the traversing body 2510 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. In addition to displaying the front effect image in which the image appears to be displayed on the unit 2510a, there is also an effect of displaying the rear effect image arranged behind the previous effect image. Examples of the “lottery result notice effect” using the body 2510 include an effect pattern as shown in FIGS. 122 to 131.

  First, in the example of the lottery result notice effect shown in FIGS. 122 (B1) to (B4), first, the variable display of the three symbol sequences stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 as a post-effect image is started. One traversing body 2510 arranged in the invisible area A2 on the right side is a predetermined character (here, a first character C1 deformed of a female tradesman) as a pre-production image in the main body frame 2510a of the traversing body 2510. ) Is displayed and moved into the viewable area A1 so that the right end of the traversing body 2510 is substantially in contact with the right end of the viewable area A1 (see (B1) in the figure). Then, after the traversing body 2510 is stopped at the position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 second to 2 seconds), the traversing body 2510 is moved into the invisible area A2 on the right side, and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 ( All traversing bodies 2510 are excluded from the visible area A1). Thereafter, as a lottery result presentation, the left symbol sequence, the right symbol sequence, and the central symbol sequence are sequentially stopped and displayed in order, and a combination of symbols ZL, ZC, and ZR suggesting a special lottery result is displayed (see FIG. B2) to (B4)). In this lottery result notice effect, the appearance of one traversing body 2510 on which the character is displayed can increase the player's expectation, and the expected value (possibility of “big hit”) depends on the character displayed. Can be guessed. On the other hand, in the lottery result notice effect shown in FIG. 122C, the character is displayed from the left invisible area A2 to the position substantially in contact with the invisible area A2, contrary to the example of (B1). This is an example in which one traversed body 2510 appears.

  In addition, the lottery result notice effect shown in FIGS. 122 (D1) to 122 (D3) shows a predetermined character from the invisible area A2 on the right side in a state where all the traversing bodies 2510 are not arranged in the visible area A1. One traversing body 2510 displayed in the main body frame 2510a is similar to the movement of the traversing body 2510 shown in FIG. 110. The left end of the traversing body 2510 crosses the front of the effect display device 640 and the left end of the visible area A1. After moving to the viewable area A1 so that the position is substantially in contact with the image, after stopping for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 second to 2 seconds), it is moved again to the invisible area A2 on the right side. It is something to be made. FIGS. (D1) to (D3) show an example in which one traversing body 2510 appears from within the invisible area A2 on the right side, but conversely, one from within the invisible area A2 on the left side. A traversing body 2510 may appear. As a result, the traversing body 2510 on which the character is displayed moves greatly from the right end to the left end, so that a dynamic impression can be given to the player and the player can be entertained. It can be estimated that the expected value is higher than those in the examples of the diagrams (B1) and (C).

  Further, the lottery result notice effect shown in FIGS. 123 (E1) and 123 (E2) is that in the example of FIGS. 121 (B1) and 121 (C), one traversing body 2510 appears in the visible area A1. From one invisible area A2, a predetermined character as a previous effect image displayed in the main body frame 2510a of the two traversing bodies 2510 is brought into a state where the two traversing bodies 2510 are connected to each other. Is displayed so as to be one image, and moved into the viewable area A1 so as to be in a position that is substantially in contact with the end on the same side as the invisible area A2 arranged in the viewable area A1, After stopping at that position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 second to 2 seconds), it is moved again into the original invisible region A2. In the same figure (E2), the character displayed on the two traversing bodies 2510 displays a second character C2 (a deformed villain) different from the first character C1. The characters displayed in E1) and (E2) can be arbitrary. As a result, two traversing bodies 2510 arranged in contact with each other appear, and the character is displayed larger as the previous effect image, so that the visual impact is increased and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It has become. In addition, in this example, although the thing which moves to the position which touches substantially the edge of visible region A1 on the same side as the invisible region A2 where the traversing body 2510 is arrange | positioned was shown, (D1)-( Similarly to the example of D3), it may be moved to a position so as to be substantially in contact with the opposite end of the visually recognizable area A1.

  In addition, the lottery result notice effect shown in FIGS. 123 (F1) to 123 (F2) is as follows. First, as in FIG. 122 (B1), one traversing body 2510 is placed from the invisible region A2 on the right side with its main body frame 2510a. In a state in which a predetermined character (here, the first character C1) is displayed, it is moved so as to be in a position that is substantially in contact with the right end of the viewable area A1 (see (F1) in the figure). Subsequently, in a state in which a character (here, the second character C2) different from the character displayed on the preceding traversing body 2510 is displayed on the main body frame 2510a from the left invisible area A2, the visible area After moving for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 second to 2 seconds) in such a state as to move to a position that is substantially in contact with the left end of A1, each traversing body 2510 is invisible. It is moved into the area A2. Thus, after one traversing body 2510 displaying the first character C1 appears from one side, one traversing body 2510 displaying the second character C2 appears from the other side, so the traversing body is displayed in two stages. A character appears at the same time as 2510, so that the player can be entertained and the expectation of the game can be enhanced. In this example, the traversing body 2510 first appears from the invisible area A2 on the right side. However, the traversing body 2510 may first appear from within the invisible area A2 on the left side.

  Further, the lottery result notice effect shown in FIGS. 123 (G1) to 123 (G4) is similar to FIG. 122 (B1). First, one traversing body 2510 is placed in the body frame 2510a from the invisible area A2 on the right side. In a state where a predetermined character (here, the first character C1) is displayed, the position is moved so as to be substantially in contact with the right end of the viewable area A1 (see (G1) in the figure). Subsequently, one traversing body 2510 displaying a character (in this case, the second character C2) different from the character displayed on the traversing body 2510 from the right invisible area A2 is displayed in the visible area A1. The liquid crystal display device 640 is moved so as to cross the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 so as to be in a position that is substantially in contact with the left end on the opposite side (left side) (see FIGS. (G2) and (G3)). And when predetermined time (for example, 0.3 second-2 second) passes, each traversing body 2510 will move into the invisible area A2 which was initially arrange | positioned. Thus, in a manner similar to the example of FIG. 111, the traversing body 2510 displaying the second second character C2 moves over the traversing body 2510 displaying the first first character C1. Therefore, the movement can be made more dynamic as compared with the movements shown in FIGS. (F1) to (F2), so that the player can be entertained and the expectation can be enhanced. Here, an example is shown in which two traversing bodies 2510 appear sequentially from within the invisible area A2 on the right side, but conversely, two traversing bodies 2510 appear sequentially from within the invisible area A2 on the left side. You may do it.

  In addition, the lottery result notice effects shown in FIGS. 124 (H1) to (H4) are the same as the traversing bodies 2510 arranged in the left and right invisible areas A2, one at a time, in the opposite visible area A1. It moves across the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 so as to be in contact with the end, and each traversing body 2510 has different characters (in this case, the second character C2 and the third character deforming the bad merchant). The character C3) is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 second to 2 seconds) has elapsed, each traversing body 2510 moves into the invisible area A2 where it was initially placed. is there. The movement of the traversing body 2510 in this effect is the same as the movement shown in FIG. 112, and the traversing bodies 2510 arranged in the left and right invisible areas A2 cross each other into the visible area A1 one by one. As a result of the movement, the player can feel more dynamic and entertain the player.

  In addition, the lottery result notice effect shown in FIGS. 124 (I1) to (I4) is, first, one traversing body 2510 in which a predetermined character (here, the first character C1) is displayed from the invisible area A2 on the right side. However, after moving to a position in the viewable area A1 so as to be substantially in contact with the left end of the viewable area A1 so as to cross the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 (see (I1) and (I2) in the figure), the left side One traversing body 2510 displaying a character (in this case, the second character C2) different from the character displayed on the preceding traversing body 2510 from within the invisible area A2 of the image exceeds the previous traversing body 2510 and is liquid crystal. Move to a position in the viewable area A1 so as to be substantially in contact with the right end of the viewable area A1 so as to cross the front surface of the display device 640 (see (I3) and (I4) in the figure), and then Constant time (e.g., 0.3 seconds to 2 seconds) has elapsed, in which the transverse member 2510 of each is moved to the first invisible were located region A2. As a result, the traversing bodies 2510 that alternately appear from the left and right invisible areas A2 alternate dynamic movements that cross the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640, respectively, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It has become.

  Furthermore, the lottery result notice effect shown in FIGS. 125 (J1) to 125 (J4) is for the one traversing body 2510 on which a predetermined character (here, the first character C1) is displayed from the invisible area A2 on the right side. The liquid crystal display device 640 is moved to a position across the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 so as to be substantially in contact with the left end of the visible area A1 (see (J1) and (J2) in the figure). Subsequently, after displaying one traversing body 2510 arranged in the invisible area A2 on the left side, a character (here, the second character C2) different from the character displayed on the previous traversing body 2510 is displayed. The traversing body 2510 displaying the second character C2 in the right direction together with the traversing bodies 2510 being substantially in contact with each other so as to push the previous traversing body 2510 to the center in the left-right direction is visible in the visible area A1. Move to a position that is substantially in contact with the left end (see (J3) in the figure). Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 second to 2 seconds) elapses, each traversing body 2510 is moved into the invisible region A2 that is initially arranged. As a result, the traversing body 2510 on which the first character C1 is displayed moves dynamically across the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 and then is pushed by the traversing body 2510 on which the second character C2 is displayed. The player can be surprised. In this example, the traversing body 2510 that appears first is made to cross the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 as in the example shown in FIGS. 122 (C1) to (C4). In the same manner as in the example shown in (2), after moving to a position that is substantially in contact with the end of the visible area A1 on the same side as the invisible area A2 side that is initially arranged, in the invisible area A2 on the same side You may make it be extruded by the arranged traversing body 2510. FIG.

  125 (K1) to (K4), the lottery result notice effect is first given in the same manner as the examples shown in FIGS. 124 (I1) to (I4). One traversing body 2510 on which a character (here, the first character C1) is displayed is moved to a position in the viewable area A1 so as to substantially contact the left end of the viewable area A1 so as to cross the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640. (See (K1) in the figure). Subsequently, one traversing body 2510 on which a character (here, the second character C2) different from the character displayed on the traversing body 2510 on the left side from the invisible area A2 is displayed. And is moved to a position in the visible region A1 that substantially contacts the right end of the visible region A1 so as to cross the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 (see (K2) and (K3) in the figure). Then, the traversing body 2510 on which a different character (here, the third character C3) is displayed from within the invisible area A2 on the right side is pushed out to the center by the traversing body 2510 on which the second character C2 is displayed. Then, in a state where the respective traversing bodies 2510 are substantially in contact with each other, they are moved together in the right direction until the rear traversing body 2510 is in a position substantially in contact with the right end of the viewable area A1 (see (K4) in the figure). Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 second to 2 seconds) elapses, each traversing body 2510 is moved into the invisible region A2 that is initially arranged. Thereby, since the three traversing bodies 2510 appear in steps, the player can be entertained and the expectation for the game can be further enhanced. Note that the direction in which each traversing body 2510 appears may be opposite to each other.

  In addition, the lottery result notice effect shown in FIGS. 126 (L1) to (L8) is, first, one traversing body in which a predetermined character (here, the first character C1) is displayed from the invisible area A2 on the right side. 2510 moves into the viewable area A1 so as to be in a position substantially in contact with the right end of the viewable area A1 (see (L1) in the figure), and from the invisible area A2 on the right side, One traversing body 2510 on which a character (here, the second character C2) different from the character displayed on 2510 is displayed exceeds the traversing body 2510 on which the first character C1 is displayed and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640. Is moved to a position substantially in contact with the left end of the viewable area A1 (see (L2) and (L3) in the figure). Subsequently, one traversing body 2510 on which a different character (here, the third character C3) is displayed and a traversing body 2510 on which the second character C2 is displayed are pushed out from the invisible area A2 on the left side. In addition, the traversing body 2510 displaying the second character C2 is moved together to a position where the traversing body 2510 displaying the first character C1 is substantially in contact (L4 and L5 in the figure). See). Then, in a state where the three traversing bodies 2510 are substantially in contact with each other, the left symbol ZL is stopped and displayed on the layer on the left side of the characters C1, C2, and C3, with the left varying symbol row displayed. (See the figure (L6)). Thereafter, each traversing body 2510 is moved into the invisible region A2 that was initially arranged, and then sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the right symbol row and the central symbol row to indicate a special lottery result ZL, ZC and ZR are displayed (see (L7) and (L8) in the figure). This also makes it possible to entertain the player in the same manner as described above.

  Further, in the lottery result notice effect shown in FIGS. 130 (M1) to (M4), the two traversing bodies 2510 are connected to each other from the invisible area A2 on the right side and the two traversing bodies 2510 are connected to each other. A predetermined character (here, the first character C1) is displayed so as to be one image in the main body frame 2510a, and a position that is substantially in contact with the right end of the viewable area A1 (such as being connected to each other) The left end of the traversing body 2510 is moved together (a position at which the left end of the traversing body 2510 is arranged at the approximate center in the left-right direction) (see (M1) in the figure). Subsequently, in the invisible area A2 on the left side on the opposite side, the two traversing bodies 2510 are similarly connected to each other, and the main body frame 2510a of the two traversing bodies 2510 forms one image. A different character (in this case, the second character C2) is displayed, and a position that is substantially in contact with the left end of the viewable area A1 (the right end of the traversing body 2510 that is connected to each other is arranged at the approximate center in the left-right direction) To the position where the first character C1 is substantially in contact with the displayed traversing body 2510), and the four traversing bodies 2510 cover the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 (see FIG. (See (M2) in the figure). In that state, the left symbol ZL is stopped and displayed after the symbol sequence fluctuating on the left side is displayed on the layer in front of the characters C1 and C2 (see (M3) in the figure). Thereafter, each traversing body 2510 is moved into the invisible area A2 that was initially arranged, and then sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the right symbol row (see (M4) in the figure) and the central symbol row. The symbols ZL, ZC and ZR indicating the special lottery result are displayed. As a result, the characters C1 and C2 are displayed largely by the two traversing bodies 2510, and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is covered and closed by the four traversing bodies 2510. In addition to being more surprised, the player's expectation can be further enhanced.

  In addition, the lottery result notice effect shown in FIGS. 127 (N1) to (N4) is obtained by displaying one traversing body 2510 displaying a predetermined character (here, the first character C1) from the invisible area A2 on the right side. After being moved so as to be substantially in contact with the right end of the viewable area A1 (see (N1) in the figure), it was displayed on the previous traversing body 2510 from within the invisible area A2 on the left side. One traversing body 2510 displaying a character different from the character (here, the second character C2) is moved so as to be in a position substantially in contact with the left end of the viewable area A1 (N2 in the figure). reference). Subsequently, the traversing body 2510 displaying the second character C2 after further displaying a different character (here, the third character C3) on the one traversing body 2510 arranged in the invisible area A2 on the left side. In which the traversing bodies 2510 displaying the third character C3 in the right direction together with the traversing bodies 2510 are substantially in contact with each other so as to push out to the center in the left-right direction. (See (N3) in the figure). Thereafter, one traversing body 2510 is moved from the right invisible area A2 to the left so as to push the traversing body 2510 on which the first character C1 is displayed to the left side, and at the same time, each traversing body 2510 is moved. The characters C1, C2, and C3 in the previous effect image displayed on the main body frame 2510a are deleted, and the left symbol row and the right symbol row that are changing are sequentially displayed and stopped (see (N4) in the same figure). The When the left and right symbol sequences are stopped and displayed, each traversing body 2510 is moved into the invisible area A2 that is initially positioned, and the middle symbols that are changing are displayed and stopped and displayed. A combination of symbols ZL, ZC, ZR suggesting the lottery result is displayed. As a result, three different characters C1, C2, and C3 appear in a stepwise manner together with the traversing body 2510, and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is covered by the four traversing bodies 2510. It is possible to increase the power and give a strong impact.

  Further, the lottery result notice effect shown in FIGS. 128 (O1) to (O6) is an example in which the example shown in FIGS. 125 (J1) to (J3) is further multi-staged (step-up), and FIG. (N1) to (N4) are modified patterns of the example, and first, one traversing body 2510 in which a predetermined character (here, the first character C1) is displayed from the invisible area A2 on the right side. The liquid crystal display device 640 is moved to a position across the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 so as to be substantially in contact with the left end of the viewable area A1 (see (O1) and (O2) in the figure). Subsequently, after displaying one traversing body 2510 arranged in the invisible area A2 on the left side, a character (here, the second character C2) different from the character displayed on the previous traversing body 2510 is displayed. The traversing body 2510 displaying the second character C2 in the right direction together with the traversing bodies 2510 substantially in contact with each other so as to push the traversing body 2510 displaying the first character C1 to the center in the left-right direction. It is moved until it reaches a position substantially in contact with the left end of the visually recognizable area A1 (see (O3) in the figure). Then, from within the invisible area A2 on the left side, one traversing body 2510 displaying a different character (here, the third character C3) and two traversing displaying the first character C1 and the second character C2 respectively. The body 2510 is moved to the visually recognizable area A1 so as to be pushed rightward (see (O4) in the figure). Thereafter, one traversing body 2510 is moved from within the invisible area A2 on the right side so as to substantially contact the right end of the traversing body 2510 on which the first character C1 is displayed, and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is moved by the four traversing bodies 2510. And the characters C1, C2, and C3 displayed on each traversing body 2510 are erased, and the left symbol row and the right symbol row that are changing are sequentially displayed and stopped (FIG. (O5)). See). When the left and right symbol sequences are stopped and displayed, each traversing body 2510 is moved into the invisible area A2 that is initially positioned, and the middle symbols that are changing are displayed and stopped and displayed. A combination of symbols ZL, ZC, ZR suggesting the lottery result is displayed (see (O6) in the figure). Even in this manner, three different characters C1, C2, and C3 appear in a stepwise manner together with the traversing body 2510, and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is covered by the four traversing bodies 2510. It can be increased step by step and can have a strong impact.

  The lottery result notice effects shown in FIGS. 129 (P1) to (P8) are further different examples of the patterns covering the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 with the four traversing bodies 2510 shown in FIG. The traversing bodies 2510 displaying different characters (here, the third character C3 from the right side and the second character C2 from the left side), respectively, from the left and right unrecognizable areas A2 are almost simultaneously and opposite one by one. Is moved across the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 so as to be positioned so as to be substantially in contact with the end of the visible region A1 (see (P1) to (P4) in the figure). Further, the traversing bodies 2510 are moved from the left and right invisible areas A2 one by one into the visible area A1, and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is covered with the four traversing bodies 2510. A predetermined character (in this case, the first character C1) that is one image is displayed on the two traversing bodies 2510 in the center (see (P5) and (P6) in the figure). Here, the operation of the traversing body 2510 from the same figure (P4) to the previous figure (P5) and the front effect images of the characters C1, C2C3, etc. will be described in detail. From the state of FIG. The traversing body 2510 arranged in the area A2 enters the visible area A1 so as to push the traversing body 2510 displaying the adjacent second character C2 and third character C3 to the center side of the visible area A1. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 640 fixes the second character C2 and the third character C3 displayed at both ends of the viewable area A1 as the previous effect image without following the moving traversing body 2510, and is fixed at the position as it is. When the two left and right traversed bodies 2510 that have been extruded are in contact with each other at substantially the center and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is covered by the four traversing bodies 2510, The first character C1 is displayed on the two traversing bodies 2510 in the center, and by performing this operation quickly (for example, between 0.1 seconds and 0.5 seconds), the traversal displaying the previous effect image is displayed. It is difficult to notice that the body 2510 has been replaced. When the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is covered with the four traversing bodies 2510, the characters C1, C2, and C3 displayed on the traversing bodies 2510 are deleted to display the changing left symbol row and to stop display. (Refer to FIG. 7 (P7)). After that, each traversing body 2510 is moved into the invisible region A2 where it is initially positioned, and the right symbol row and the middle symbol row that are changing are displayed (see (P8) in the same figure) and sequentially stopped and displayed. Thus, a combination of symbols ZL, ZC, ZR suggesting a special lottery result is displayed. Even in this manner, three different characters C1, C2, and C3 appear in a stepwise manner together with the traversing body 2510, and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is covered by the four traversing bodies 2510. It can be increased step by step and can have a strong impact.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state becomes the “probability change” state, the “short time” state, or the “probability short time” state, the four traversing bodies 2510 are arranged in the visible area A1 in a predetermined arrangement. In addition, the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is covered, and three symbol rows suggesting a special lottery result are displayed in a variable manner and sequentially stopped on the main body frame 2510a of each traversing body 2510. It has become. That is, by displaying a lottery result effect image in which three symbol rows fluctuate in a state where the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is covered with four traversing bodies 2510, the current gaming state is “probably changed”. It is possible to recognize a gaming state such as “” or “short time”. The lottery result notice announcement effect is performed when the game state is normal, whereas the lottery result special notice effect is performed when the game state is “probability change” or “short time”. There is also a result announcement effect.

  The lottery result special notice effects shown in FIGS. 130 (Q1) to (Q8) are performed in the gaming state such as “probability change” or “short time” as described above. When the three symbol sequences start to be displayed in a state where the front surface of the display device 640 is covered (see (Q1) and (Q2) in the same figure), “chance time” is displayed on the layer before each varying symbol sequence. ”Are displayed for a short time, and the two transverse bodies 2510 arranged in the center are moved away from each other so as to overlap the transverse bodies 2510 arranged on the left and right sides, and the liquid crystal display device 640 In the center, an image (special notice effect image) in which the pattern row in which the pattern P1 of “small”, “medium”, “large”, and “super” are arranged in order around the vertical axis is rotated (varied) is displayed (Q3 in the figure). reference). At the same time, the translucent handprint H is displayed on the layer before the pattern row, and the player touches the screen in the main body frame 2510a of the left and right traversing bodies 2510 so that the player matches his hand with the handprint H. A guidance image to that effect is displayed (see (Q4) in the figure), and the detection signal from the object detection sensor 1428 can be received for a predetermined time by the object detection reception means 3164. Thereafter, when an object (such as a player's hand) is detected by the object detection sensor 1428 within a predetermined time, the rotation of the pattern row during the variable display is stopped to display the predetermined pattern P, and the back of the pattern P1 is illuminated. The player is made aware that the pattern P1 has been determined (see (Q5) and (Q6) in the figure). In addition, when the object detection sensor 1428 does not detect an object within a predetermined time, the pattern row is similarly stopped and displayed. When an object is not detected, the pattern P1 that is the same as or lower than that at the time of detection is stopped and displayed. When the pattern P1 is confirmed, the pattern P1 is reduced and moved to the right end of the screen and displayed on the foremost layer (see (Q7) in the figure), and then the two traversing bodies 2510 that overlap each other are displayed. After moving to the center and covering the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 again with the four traversing bodies 2510, the three symbol rows in the variable display are displayed, and the special lottery result is displayed by sequentially stopping the display. A combination of suggested patterns ZL, ZC, ZR is displayed (see (Q8) in the figure). As a result, the player is encouraged to touch the screen with his / her hand so that the player can perform a distinctly different operation from the normal game in which a game ball is shot. In addition to being able to get bored, it is possible to entertain players.

  Further, the lottery result special notice effect shown in FIGS. 131 (R1) to (R8) is first in a state where the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is covered with four traversing bodies 2510 (see FIG. 131 (R1)). When the three symbol rows start to be displayed in a variable manner, one traversing body 2510 moves into the invisible area A2, and then the three traversing bodies 2510 in the visible area A1 are arranged at predetermined intervals ( 118 (C), and three option images P2 of “waiter”, “love”, and “wish” are displayed on the main body frame 2510a of each traversing body 2510 as the previous effect images (R2 in FIG. 118). ) And (R3)). Further, on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 640, in addition to the three option images P2, a guidance display for prompting the user to operate any one of the operation buttons 330 is displayed, and the operation accepting unit 3166 is used for a predetermined time. An operation signal from the operation button 330 can be received. When any of the operation buttons 330 is operated during a predetermined time (for example, the left button 330a in this case), the three traversing bodies 2510 in the viewable area A1 are moved into the invisible area A2, respectively. At the same time, an option image P2 (for example, “waiter” here) corresponding to the operated operation button 330 is displayed in the center (see (R4) and (R5) in the figure), and then the option image P2 ( A fortune-telling image (for example, “Do not come Sueyoshi” here) is displayed so as to be replaced with “Waiting” (see (R6) in the figure). Thereafter, the traversing body 2510 displaying the symbols ZL and ZR stopped and displayed in a combination suggesting the special lottery result from the left and right invisible areas A2 is visible so as to cover the entire front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640. If the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is covered with the four traversing bodies 2510 after being moved into A1 (see (R7) in the same figure), the middle symbol ZC in the center can be surely seen. Thereby, since the player is presented with an effect of selecting and operating one of the three operation buttons 330, the player can be made to perform an operation different from the normal game. It is possible to make it difficult to get bored with accenting the game.

  In the game state such as “probability change” or “short time”, as shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, the picture P1 reduced and displayed in the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal cover device 640 is almost always displayed on the frontmost layer. Thus, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not it is almost time for a “big hit”. Further, the reduced-displayed pattern P1 is changed by the lottery result special notice effect shown in FIG. 130, and the time of “big hit” is closer (“small”, “medium”, “large”). It is possible to entertain the player depending on whether or not the pattern P1 suggests that the “big hit” time is close in the order of “super”.

[Reach development production]
Next, an example of “reach development effect” in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be specifically described. “Reach development effect” satisfies the combination that the combination of the symbols that are displayed with the two symbol sequences stopped among the three symbol sequences that are displayed in a variable display is in an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “big hit” gaming state) After a possible symbol combination state (generally, the left symbol ZL and the right symbol ZR are stopped and displayed with the same symbol), the variation display of the last symbol sequence that is variably displayed is This is an effect that displays different variations. In the example shown in FIGS. 132 and 133 (S1) to (S16) as an example of the “reach development effect”, first, among the three symbol sequences that are variably displayed, the symbols ZL and ZR with the same symbol sequence on the left and right When the last symbol row (center symbol row) stops at a symbol ZC different from the other symbols ZL and ZR after being “reach” (see (S1) in the same figure)) See S2)), and each of the traversing bodies 2510 is viewed from the left and right invisible areas A2 so as to approach each other with a predetermined pattern (for example, Saaya-shaped pattern here) displayed as a front effect image. The movement is started into the area possible A1 (see (S3) in the figure). If the left and right symbols ZL and ZR are hidden by the pattern as the previous effect image displayed on the main body frame 2510a by the two traversing bodies 2510 that appear from the left and right (see (S4) in the figure), The same design as the design ZL, ZR hidden in the layer in front of the design is displayed as the front effect image, and the design ZL, ZR suggesting “reach” is transferred to the traversing body 2510, The middle symbol ZC displayed at the center is sandwiched between the two traversing bodies 2510 (see (S5) in the figure).

  Then, since the two traversing bodies 2510 are in contact with each other at substantially the center, the middle symbol ZC is hidden by the two traversing bodies 2510 (see (S6) in the figure). Thereafter, the two traversing bodies 2510 that are in contact with each other move in directions away from each other, so that the next changed middle symbol ZC appears between the two traversing bodies 2510, and the middle symbol ZC that has appeared appears as a left symbol. It is held between two traversing bodies 2510 displaying ZL and the right design ZR, and a movable effect and an image effect are performed as to whether or not the middle design ZC is sandwiched between the two traversing bodies 2510 and crushed (S7). (See (S11)). After that, when the middle symbol ZC is crushed by the two traversing bodies 2510, the middle symbol ZC that has become invisible changes to the next symbol, and the middle symbol ZC in which the two traversing bodies 2510 fluctuate away from each other again appears. The operation of sandwiching the middle symbol ZC is repeated a predetermined number of times. In the final operation, the middle symbol ZC sandwiched between the two traversing bodies 2510 is not crushed, but the two traversing bodies 2510 further move away from each other and move into the left and right invisible areas A2. Then, the symbols ZL and ZR displayed on the two traversing bodies 2510 move from the previous effect image to the rear effect image, and the position is fixed without following the movement of the traversing body 2510 (the same figure). (See (S12) to (S15)). The left and right symbols ZL and ZR and the middle symbol ZC are displayed in the size of symbols ZL, ZC and ZR in the symbol sequence at the start of variation, and the combination of symbols ZL, ZC and ZR suggesting a special lottery result Will be displayed. Thereby, it is made to fluctuate on both sides of the fluctuating middle symbol ZC by the two traversing bodies 2510 to which the symbols “Leach” are transferred, compared with the effect of only the effect image, Since the three-dimensional traversing body 2510 is movable together, it is possible to make the variation of the symbol sequence more realistic, attract the player's interest strongly, and entertain the player. It has become.

  Next, the “reach development effect” shown in (T1) to (T16) of FIGS. 134 and 135 will be described in detail later, but after becoming “reach”, the left and right symbols ZL, After the ZR is reduced to the upper left and right sides and displayed on the frontmost layer, the front of the liquid crystal display device 640 is once covered by the four traversing bodies 2510, and then all the traversals The body 2510 is moved into the invisible area A2 (see (T1) and (T2) in the figure). Subsequently, from within the left and right invisible areas A2, the transverse bodies 2510 each displaying a large medium symbol ZC that forms a single screen on the main body frame 2510a of the two transverse bodies 2510 can be viewed so as to approach each other. It is moved to the approximate center of the area A1 (see (T3) in the figure), and the two traversing bodies 2510 are in contact with each other at the approximate center, so that one large medium symbol ZC is displayed. (See (T4) in the figure). Thereafter, the two traversing bodies 2510 displaying the middle symbol ZC are reciprocated in the left-right direction together in a state where they are in contact with each other, and then stopped at the approximate center in the left-right direction (T5 to T9 in the figure). )). Then, when the two traversing bodies 2510 displaying the middle symbol ZC stop at substantially the center of the visible area A1, the center including the displayed middle symbol ZC emits bright light, and the two traversing bodies 2510 slowly It moves in the direction away from each other, and the medium symbol ZC after the change surrounded by light appears between the two traversing bodies 2510 (see (T10) to (T12) in the figure).

  After that, when the two traversing bodies 2510 move into the left and right invisible areas A2, the light that wraps around the middle symbol ZC stops almost simultaneously, and a large middle symbol ZC is displayed as a post-production image (the same figure). (See (T13)). The left and right symbols ZL and ZR displayed in a reduced size at the upper left and right and the middle symbol ZC displayed in an enlarged manner at the center respectively change to a normal size, and the symbols ZL, ZC and ZR suggesting a special lottery result. (See (T14) and (T15) in the figure). In this example, as shown in the drawing, the combination of symbols ZL, ZC, ZR suggesting “big hit” is stopped and displayed, and thereafter an image for recognizing that it is “big hit” (T16 in the figure). ”) Is displayed and a“ hit ”game is started according to the special lottery result. As a result, after entering the “reach” state, two traversing bodies 2510 to which the middle symbol ZC is transferred appear and display a large middle symbol ZC while slowly moving in the left-right direction to move to the next middle symbol ZC. Is displayed, so that it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by the large medium symbol ZC which fluctuates.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after reaching the “reach” state, various “reach development effects” as described above are prepared in advance, and “reach development effects” directly after “reach”. There is a case where a “reach development notice effect” that allows a player to clearly recognize that a “reach” will develop after a “reach” is performed. The “notice effect” will be specifically described. 136 (U1) to (U8), the example of the reach advance notice effect is that after all the traversing bodies 2510 are arranged in the invisible area A2 and reach the “reach” state ( U1)), all the symbols ZL, ZC, ZR are again displayed in a variable manner, and the main characters (here, the first character C1 and the pachinko machine 1 in the layer behind the symbols ZL, ZC, ZR) are displayed. The main character of the story, which is the concept of, is deformed and a special character C0 etc.) is displayed (see (U2) in the figure).

  Then, as the variation display of the symbols ZL, ZC, ZR becomes faster, the images in which many light particles appear are overlapped, and the light particles converge as a bundle, and at the same time, the right and left cannot be visually recognized. The traversing body 2510 displaying a predetermined pattern (here, Saaya-shaped pattern) as the previous effect image is moved from within the area A2 so as to cover the entire front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 ((U3) to ( See U5)). Then, images that become one image (here, a silhouette image of a predetermined character) are sequentially displayed on the main body frame 2510a of the four traversing bodies 2510 (see (U6) to (U8) in the figure), and thereafter Subsequently, the “reach development effect” as described above will be performed. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the “reach” will surely develop, and to make the possibility that the special lottery result will be “big hit” very high, so that the expectation for the game can be increased. It has become.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, depending on the special lottery result during the above-mentioned “lottery result effect”, “lottery result notice effect”, “reach development effect”, “reach development effect”, etc. The rotating decorative body 1424, the sub decorative body 1426, the swinging body 2310, and the like are appropriately driven to move or emit light, and not only effects by the liquid crystal display device 640 and the traversing body 2510, but also rotation. The effects of the decoration body 1424, the swing body 2310, etc. can also recognize the possibility (expected value) that the special lottery result is a “hit”, increase the expectation of the game, and enjoy the player. You can do it.

  Although not shown, the characters C0, C1, C2, and C3 displayed in the main body frame 2510a of the traversing body 2510 are displayed by the effect image control means 3158 when the traversing body 2510 starts moving. Display control is performed so as to swing once in the opposite direction with respect to the moving direction, and once in the moving direction when stopped, and as a result, the characters C0, C1, C2, and C3 displayed on the traversing body 2510 are as if. It can appear as if inertial force is acting, it can be made more realistic by an image combined with the movement of the traversing body 2510, and it can suppress the delight of the player by delighting the player. It is like that.

  The traversing body 2510 (front traversing body 2512, rear traversing body 2514) in the present embodiment is a movable body of the present invention, and the main body frame 2510a in the traversing body 2510 of the present embodiment is further a window frame of the present invention. In this embodiment, the upper front rail 2520a, the upper rear rail 2520b, and the lower rail unit 2800 correspond to the guide members of the present invention. Further, the first special random number generation means 3062 and the second special random number generation means 3072 in the present embodiment correspond to the lottery means of the present invention.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball that is driven into the game area 605 by the operation of the operation handle portion 461 by the player is received into a prize opening such as the general prize opening 1502, the prize ball A predetermined number of game balls are paid out from the unit 800 (payout unit). Further, when a game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 is received into the first start port 1504, the second start port 1506, the stage start port 2220, etc., a predetermined number of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800. A predetermined special lottery result is drawn by lottery means such as the first special random number generator 3062 and the second special random number generator 3072, and the three symbol sequences are displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display device 640 according to the special lottery result. In addition, each symbol row is stopped sequentially so that the central symbol row is stopped and displayed at the end so that the combination of symbols ZL, ZC, ZR of the stopped symbol sequence becomes a combination that suggests a special lottery result. A lottery result effect image as a post-effect image to be displayed is displayed to allow the player to recognize the special lottery result that has been selected by the player. Then, by generating a “hit” game or the like as an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous according to the result of the special lottery, the player is given an opportunity to pay out more game balls. It can enhance interest. For the combination of symbols ZL, ZC, and ZR in which this advantageous gaming state occurs, the combination of symbols ZL and ZR in the left and right symbol sequences that are stopped and displayed except for the last (center) symbol sequence in the lottery result effect image When the combination of the symbols ZL, ZC, ZR in which the advantageous gaming state occurs can be satisfied (so-called “reach” state), the traversing body 2510 can be visually recognized from within the left and right invisible areas A2. When movement starts so as to approach each other toward the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 that is the area A1, and the transverse body 2510 covers the front surfaces of the left and right symbols ZL and ZR, the main body frame 2510a of the transverse body 2510 is covered. The left and right symbols ZL and ZR stopped and displayed as the front effect images are respectively displayed, and the left and right symbols ZL and ZR stopped and displayed as the rear rear effect images are temporarily deleted. Then, the two traversing bodies 2510 displaying the left and right symbols ZL and ZR that are displayed in a stopped state move toward and away from each other so as to sandwich the middle symbol ZC in the center symbol row that is variably displayed. The middle symbol ZC sandwiched in accordance with the movement of the two traversing bodies 2510 is displayed so as to be elastically deformed, and the two traversing bodies 2510 eventually come into contact with each other, so that they are displayed as a rear effect image. In addition, the medium symbol ZC during the variable display is hidden by the two traversing bodies 2510. In this state, the middle symbol ZC that is being displayed is changed as it is or is changed to a different middle symbol ZC, and the two traversing bodies 2510 that are in contact with each other are moved away from each other so that the rear side variation is displayed. The middle symbol ZC can be visually recognized from the player side, and at the same time, the middle symbol ZC being variably displayed is temporarily enlarged and the middle symbol ZC is variably displayed. When such an operation is repeated at least once and the middle symbol ZC in the variable display is stopped and displayed, the two traversing bodies 2510 in the viewable area A1 move into the invisible area A2, and three in the left-right direction. A special lottery result is suggested by the symbols ZL, ZC, ZR arranged side by side. Thus, since the left and right symbols ZL and ZR stopped and displayed as the previous effect image are displayed on the main body frame 2510a of the traversing object 2510, the three-dimensional traversing body is obtained by changing the previous effect image (symbol). The appearance of 2510 can be greatly changed, the number of types of collaboration effects by combining the traversing body 2510 and the post-production image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 can be increased, and more diverse traversing bodies 2510 and effects. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that embodies a collaboration effect with an image and can suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to difficulty in getting bored.

  In addition, when the two traversing bodies 2510 come into contact with each other again, and the rear middle symbol ZC becomes visible, it is determined whether or not the desired middle symbol ZC in which an advantageous gaming state occurs appears. The excitement and excitement of the player can be enhanced, and the player's interest can be prevented from decreasing.

  In addition, compared with the “reach” effect (a special effect of the lottery result) based only on the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 640 as in the past, the two traversing bodies 2510 displaying a predetermined previous effect image on the main body frame 2510a are the last. Since the middle symbol ZC of the central symbol row that is variably displayed is repeated and held, it is concealed by the two traversing bodies 2510. The production can be shown to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being bored and to reduce the interest of the player by collaborating with the traversing body 2510 and the production image. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine that is greatly differentiated from other pachinko machines.

  Furthermore, the combination of the left and right symbols ZL, ZR of the symbol sequence that is stopped and displayed in the lottery result effect image excluding the last symbol sequence can satisfy the combination of symbols ZL, ZC, ZR in which the advantageous gaming state occurs That is, among the three symbol sequences variably displayed in the lottery result effect image, the left and right symbols ZL, ZR are selected according to the lottery result in which the symbols ZL, ZR of the two symbol sequences are in the “reach” state. Since the two traversing bodies 2510 displaying the symbol are designed to carry out the lottery result special effect that holds the fluctuating symbol ZC and fluctuates, the special result of the lottery result may not be carried out even if it becomes “reach”. The premium feeling for the special results of the lottery results can be increased, and the special effects of the lottery results can be implemented to increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state. Flavor can be suppressed.

  Also, in the lottery result effect image, when the two traversing bodies 2510 start to approach each other so as to sandwich the fluctuating middle symbol ZC after becoming the “reach” state, depending on the player, the lottery result special effect is started. Since it is possible to recognize this, attention can be paid to the movement of the traversing body 2510 after “reach”, and the expectation for the special effect of the lottery result is enhanced, and the interest for the game is prevented from being lowered. Can do.

  Furthermore, the left and right symbols ZL and ZR stopped and displayed on the main body frame 2510a of the two traversing bodies 2510 are displayed, that is, the “reach” symbols ZL and ZR are displayed on the traversing body 2510. Since it becomes possible to make the player strongly aware of the “reach” symbols ZL and ZR, it is always possible to indicate which symbol ZC the variable symbol ZC sandwiched between the two traversing bodies 2510 should be stopped and displayed. It becomes possible to recognize, and it is possible to raise the player's sense of expectation by making the player feel excited by whether or not the middle symbol ZC appearing between the two traversing bodies 2510 is the desired middle symbol ZC. It is possible to entertain and prevent the interest in games from decreasing.

  In the special lottery result, the middle symbol ZC sandwiched in accordance with the movement of the two traversing bodies 2510 is elastically deformed like a rubber bowl, so that the traversing body 2510 and the middle symbol ZC are Despite being arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, when viewed from the player side, it becomes possible to make an illusion that the middle symbol ZC is deformed by being sandwiched between two traversing bodies 2510, It is possible to embody the collaborative production of the movement of the traversing body 2510 that can raise the feeling and appeal to the sensibility of the player and the production image (symbol), and the entertainment for the player is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, after the middle symbol ZC in the middle of the variable display is covered by the two traversing bodies 2510, when the two traversing bodies 2510 are separated from each other and the middle symbol ZC in the variable display appears, the middle symbol ZC is displayed. Once it is displayed larger than normal, the player can be given the illusion that the middle symbol ZC has jumped from between the two traversing bodies 2510, and the player can be surprised. The impact on the variable display of ZC can be increased, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for games due to difficulty in getting bored.

  Furthermore, when the two traversing bodies 2510 that are close to each other so as to sandwich the middle symbol ZC in the middle of the variable display cover the front surfaces of the left and right symbol columns that are stopped and displayed, the left and right symbols ZL and ZR that are displayed and stopped are displayed. Is displayed on each main body frame 2510a as the front effect image, and the left and right symbols ZL and ZR displayed as the rear effect image are erased, so that it is displayed as a stop display to the player. It is possible to make the illusion that the left and right symbols ZL, ZR of the post-production image have moved to the main body frame 2510a of the traversing body 2510, and the player's interest is changed from the post-production image to the front effect image (the traversing body 2510). The traversing body 2510 can be noted and the movement of the traversing body 2510 can be enjoyed.

  Further, when the left and right symbols ZL and ZR that are stopped and displayed are displayed on the main body frame 2510 of the traversing body 2510, the left and right symbols ZL and ZR of the effect image that are stopped and displayed are erased. In addition, even if the traversing body 2510 repeats the approach and separation so as to sandwich the middle symbol ZC during the fluctuation display, the left and right symbols ZL and ZR that are stopped and displayed after the traversing body 2510 are not seen, The left and right symbols ZL, ZR stopped and displayed to the player can be surely transferred to the traversing body 2510, and the left and right symbols ZL, hidden behind the movable traversing body 2510 can be recognized. ZR can prevent the eyes from flickering and feel uncomfortable, and can prevent the interest in games from decreasing.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the specially drawn lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state occurs is suggested when the symbols ZL, ZC, ZR that are stopped and displayed are displayed in a combination of only the general symbols, When the “big hit” game related to the special lottery result is finished, the time of variation (direction time) of the symbols ZL, ZC, ZR becomes “short time” state or “probability change / short time” state shorter than usual, and the liquid crystal display In a state where the entire front surface of the device 640 is covered with four traversing bodies 2510, a lottery result effect image is displayed as a previous effect image on the main body frame 2510a. This gaming state is continued until the lottery result effect image is displayed a predetermined number of times. Then, in the “short time” state, a liquid crystal display is displayed in the center of the viewable area A1 before a plurality of symbol sequences start displaying in a variable manner and all symbol sequences are stopped and displayed according to the special lottery result. The traversing body 2510 moves to the left and right sides within the viewable area A1 so that the device 640 is exposed, and a plurality of images are displayed on the exposed liquid crystal display device 640 variably as a special notice effect image in a direction different from the variation direction of the symbol row. Is displayed on the main body frame 2510a of the left and right traversing bodies 2510, and a guidance image that prompts the player to place the player's hand as an object on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is displayed. When the image of the handprint H as the guide image is displayed so as to overlap the displayed pattern P1, the object detection by the object detection sensor 1428 is received for a predetermined time (for example, between 1 second and 30 seconds). It can become. Thereafter, when the player puts his hand in front of the liquid crystal display device 640 within a predetermined time and is detected by the object detection sensor 1428, the picture P1 displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed on the picture P1 corresponding to the special lottery result. The possibility of an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game) in the lottery result of the lottery (expected value) is suggested to the player, and the display of the special notice effect image ends. On the other hand, if the object detection sensor 1428 detects nothing within the predetermined time, the variably displayed picture P1 is stopped and displayed with the predetermined picture P1, and the display of the special notice effect image is ended. Thus, when the display of the special notice effect image (lottery result special notice effect) ends, the traversing body 2510 moves so as to cover the entire front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640, and the main body frame 2510a of the traversing body 2510 changes. After the plurality of displayed symbol sequences are displayed, they are sequentially stopped and displayed, and all the symbol sequences are displayed in a stopped manner, and the player is informed of the special lottery result drawn by the combination of the stopped symbols ZL, ZC and ZR. A series of effects can be performed. Thus, in the middle of the lottery result suggesting effect that suggests the special lottery result, the guide image is used to prompt the player to place an object such as a hand on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640, and the player can perform a driving operation. Can be operated differently, so that the player can experience a notice effect that is clearly different from the past, can be enjoyed, and various guidance images and patterns P1 (special notice effect images) ) Is displayed, it is possible to provide a variety of types of notice effects, and to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to get tired and can suppress a player's interest in games from being reduced. Can do.

  In the lottery result special notice effect, since a plurality of patterns P1 arranged in an order that can be recognized by the player in the special notice effect image are displayed in a variable manner, an object such as a hand is positioned on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640. Depending on the timing, it is possible to make it seem that the picture P1 to be stopped and displayed can be determined, and by allowing the player to measure the timing, it is possible to concentrate on the special notice effect image and entertain the special notice effect image. It can suppress that the interest with respect to falls. In addition, if the timing is too long and the predetermined time elapses, the object detection will not be accepted, and the lottery result special notice effect will end and it will be a disappointing feeling. A hand etc. can be sent out and it can suppress that a game adds sharpness and interest falls.

  In the lottery result special notice effect, the special notice effect image is displayed at the approximate center in the left-right direction, so that the special notice effect image in which the plurality of patterns P1 fluctuate can be easily seen, and the left and right traversing Since the special notice effect image (picture P1) is displayed as if sandwiched by the body 2510, the special notice effect image can be made conspicuous, and it is suppressed that the interest for the game is reduced by concentrating on the special notice effect image. can do. In addition, guide images are displayed on the left and right sides of the special notice effect image displayed in the center via the main body frame 2510a of the traversing body 2510, that is, the guide images are displayed so as to sandwich the special notice effect image. Even when the player pays attention to the special notice effect image, there is a high possibility that any of the guidance images will be in the field of view, the guidance image can be recognized, and the player can recognize the guidance image on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640. Can be placed in the lottery result special notice effect.

  Also, in the lottery result special notice effect, since the image of the handprint H as the guide image is also displayed on the portion of the liquid crystal display device 640 where the special notice effect image is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to overlook the guide image. Since the player can intuitively recognize that his / her hand should be put out so as to match the bill H, the player can be surely operated, and the player can entertain the game. It can suppress that the interest with respect to falls. In addition, since the image of the handprint H as the guide image is displayed so as to overlap with the special notice effect image, the player can surely see the guide image and can easily participate in the lottery result special notice effect. can do.

  Furthermore, in the lottery result special notice effect, the direction of change of the plurality of patterns P1 in the special notice effect image is different from the direction of change of the plurality of symbol sequences for suggesting the special lottery result. It is possible to easily recognize that the variation display of the pattern P1 and the variation display of the symbol sequence are completely different from each other. The design P1 and the symbols ZL, ZC, ZR are confused with the lottery result effect image. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused because the difference from the notice effect image is not understood, and to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

  In addition, in the lottery result special notice effect, even if an object such as a player's hand is not detected by the object detection sensor 1428 within a predetermined time, the picture P1 is stopped and displayed, so the special notice effect image is completed for the time being. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable feeling that the picture P1 is not determined by ending the plurality of pictures P1 displayed in a variably displayed state as they are, and to enhance the game. Can be suppressed. In addition, in a special lottery result for a single lottery result, the time until the special lottery result is suggested after starting the suggestion of the lottery special lottery result regardless of whether an object is detected within a predetermined time (variation Time) can be set to substantially the same time in any case, so that it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated by making it easy to make an interval for the effect control, and to reduce the load of the effect control. The production control load affects game control (for example, lottery of normal / special lottery results, game ball payout, movement of starter solenoid 1516, attacker solenoid 1518, etc.) and the player's game It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the game.

  Further, before the start of the lottery result special notice effect, the four horizontal bodies 2510 cover the entire front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640. When the lottery result special notice effect is started, the liquid crystal display device 640 is placed on the player side. Since the two traversing bodies 2510 move so that they can be seen directly from the player, the closed traversing body 2510 feels open, and the player can feel that something will happen in the future. A feeling can be heightened. Further, when the lottery result special notice effect is finished, the entire front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is covered again by the four traversing bodies 2510, so that the player recognizes that the lottery result special notice effect is finished and continues the special lottery. It becomes possible to change the consciousness to the suggestion of the result, to make it difficult to get bored with the effect, and to prevent the player from being entertained and the interest in the game from being lowered.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the “short time” state, before the all symbol sequences are stopped and displayed according to the special lottery result, a plurality of symbol sequences start to be changed. In addition, the same number of traversing bodies 2510 as the three operation buttons 330 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the viewable area A1 in a state where different option images P2 are displayed on the main body frame 2510a as the previous effect images, respectively. A lottery result special notice effect that allows the operation of the operation button 330 to be accepted for a predetermined time (for example, between 1 second and 30 seconds) is performed. In this lottery result special notice effect, when the operation button 330 corresponding to the option image P2 is operated within a predetermined time, all the traversing bodies 2510 move into the invisible area A2 and are selected at the approximate center of the liquid crystal display device 640. A fortune-telling image P3 (special notice effect image) related to the selected option image P2 is displayed. On the other hand, if no operation button 330 is operated within a predetermined time, all the traversing bodies 2510 move into the invisible area A2, and the fortune-telling image P3 related to any displayed option image P2 is liquid crystal. It is displayed in the approximate center of the display device 640. Then, the display of the lottery result effect image (fluctuating symbol) is resumed so as to overlap with the displayed fortune-telling image P3, and at the same time, the entire front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is covered with the four traversing bodies 2510. All the displayed symbol sequences are stopped and displayed so that the lottery result can be suggested to the player. Thus, in the lottery result special notice effect, the same number of traversing bodies 2510 as the three operation buttons 330 are displayed in the viewable area A1 in a state where different option images P2 are displayed as the previous effect images on the main body frame 2510a. Since the operation buttons 330 are arranged at predetermined intervals and the operation of the operation button 330 can be received for a predetermined time (for example, between 1 second and 30 seconds), any option image P2 is selected from the options based on the contents of the three option images P2. By selecting (option), it is possible to entertain and enjoy the player's thoughts, and at the same time, it is possible to make it hard to get bored. Further, when the player selects any of the option images P2 displayed on the three main body frames 2510a and presses the corresponding operation button 330 within a predetermined time, the fortune-telling image corresponding to the contents of the selected option image P2 Since P3 is displayed, the fortune-telling image P3 makes it possible to recognize whether or not the lottery special lottery result is highly likely to be a “hit”, and the special lottery result suggested thereafter It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. Therefore, in the middle of the lottery result effect image indicating the special lottery result, the option image P2 is displayed on the main body frame 2510a of the traversing body 2510 corresponding to each of the three operation buttons 330, and any of the operation buttons 330 (option images) is displayed. P2) is selected, so that the player can experience the notice effect that is clearly different from the past, and the entertainer can be enjoyed, and various option images P2 can be displayed. Thus, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can make the types of the notice effects more diverse and can prevent the player from getting bored and the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  In addition, in the lottery result special notice effect, compared to the case where the special lottery result is notified in advance using only the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 640, the three lottery buttons corresponding to the three operation buttons 330 in the viewable area A1 are used. An option image P2 is displayed on the main body frame 2510a of the traversing body 2510, and it is possible to actively experience an effect of selecting one of the operation buttons 330, which is a novel that has never been experienced in a conventional pachinko machine. It can be used as a notice effect, can entertain the player and can be hard to get bored, can increase the appeal to the player, and play a game that is greatly differentiated from other pachinko machines This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine.

  Furthermore, in the lottery result special notice effect, different fortune-telling images P3 are displayed according to the selected option image P2 (operation button 330). For example, even if the three option images P2 are displayed in the same combination, they are selected. If the choice image P2 (operation button 330) is changed, a different fortune-telling image P3 will be displayed, and the types of lottery result special notice effects can be made more diverse, making it difficult to get tired of notice effects. It can suppress that the interest with respect to falls.

  In the lottery result special notice effect, the lottery results 2510 are moved to positions corresponding to the three operation buttons 330 in the viewable area A1, respectively, so that the lottery result special notice effect is started. When the three traversing bodies 2510 start moving to positions corresponding to the three operation buttons 330 in the viewable area A1 during the display of the image, some players recognize that the lottery result special notice effect has started. In addition, it is possible to increase the expectation of the lottery result special notice effect by thinking about the contents of the option image P2 displayed on the main body frame 2510a of the traversing body 2510, the operation of the operation button 330, and the like.

  Further, in the lottery result special notice effect, the operation button 330 is accepted only for a predetermined time after the option image P2 is displayed on the main body frame 2510a of the traversing body 2510, and when the predetermined time elapses, the operation button 330 is operated. Is not accepted, and the traversing body 2510 displaying the option image P2 is moved into the invisible region A2, and the time limit for selecting the option image P2 (operating the operation button 330) is delimited. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of purpose, allow players to actively participate in the lottery result special notice effect, entertain the lottery result special notice effect, and make it hard to get bored. Thus, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  Furthermore, in the lottery result special notice effect, when one of the option images P2 displayed on the main body frame 2510a of the three traversing bodies 2510 is selected and the corresponding operation button 330 is operated, all traversals in the viewable area A1 are displayed. Since the fortune-telling image P3 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 as a post-production image after the body 2510 has moved into the invisible area A2, the fortune-telling image P3 is not obstructed by the traversing body 2510. The image P3 can be easily viewed, and the fortune-telling image P3 can be displayed using substantially the entire liquid crystal display device 640. Therefore, the fortune-telling image P3 can be displayed on a large screen as much as possible. It is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating.

  In the lottery result special notice effect, the operation button 330 that can accept the operation by the player for a predetermined time is used as a push button, so that a touch sensor for detecting capacitance or the like, infrared light or visible light is used. Compared to the case where a photo sensor or the like to be detected is used, the player can surely feel the operation feeling of the operation button 330 and can increase the willingness to participate in the lottery result special notice effect, The fortune-telling image P3 displayed after operation of the operation button 330 can be enjoyed more, and it can suppress that the interest with respect to a player's game falls.

  Further, in the special lottery result, if no operation button 330 is operated until a predetermined time elapses after the option image P2 is displayed on the traversing body 2510, all traversing bodies 2510 are in the invisible area A2. Since the fortune-telling image P3 related to the predetermined option image P2 is displayed after moving to, even if the operation button 330 is not operated within the predetermined time, it is related to any of the displayed option images P2. By displaying the fortune-telling image P3, it can be avoided that some players feel unfortunate, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, even if none of the operation buttons 330 is operated before the predetermined time elapses, the fortune-telling image P3 is displayed, so that the lottery result special notice effect is prevented from appearing halfway and appearing like a dragonfly. Thus, the lottery result special notice effect can be advanced without a sense of incongruity, and the fortune-telling image P3 can be enjoyed to prevent the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  Furthermore, the fortune-telling image P3 is displayed without operating the operation button 330. In one lottery result special notice effect, the lottery is selected regardless of whether or not the operation button 330 is operated within a predetermined time. The time (variation time) from the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result to the suggestion of the special lottery result can be set to substantially the same time in any case, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

  In addition, the lottery result effect image is displayed again so as to overlap (overlapping) while the fortune telling image P3 is displayed, and the fortune telling image P3 and the lottery result effect image appear to be continuous without interruption. Therefore, the interest enhanced by the fortune-telling image P3 can be transferred to the lottery result effect image as it is, and the interest can be suppressed from being lowered. In addition, since the lottery result effect image, that is, the fluctuating symbol sequence can be viewed simultaneously with the fortune-telling image P3, the contents of the fortune-telling image P3 and the symbols ZL, ZC, ZR of the symbol sequence to be stopped can be enjoyed simultaneously. it can.

  Furthermore, when the variation time of the lottery result effect image is changed only to a time shorter than usual (so-called “time reduction” state or “probability change / time reduction” state), the lottery result special is selected according to the special lottery result. Since the announcement effect is implemented, the lottery result special notice effect is given when the game is in an advantageous gaming state where there is a high possibility that a “big hit” will be drawn than usual, that is, when the player's interest is enhanced. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player by implementing the lottery result special notice effect, and to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained. In addition, since the lottery result special notice effect cannot be experienced in the normal gaming state, the premium feeling for the lottery result special notice effect can be increased, and the player's expectation can be expected by the fact that the lottery result special notice effect is implemented. In addition to being able to enhance the feeling, it is possible to entertain the lottery result special notice effect itself and to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, since the variation pattern table changing means 3086 (effect time changing means) capable of changing the fluctuation time of the lottery result effect image to only a shorter time than usual according to the special lottery result is provided, a predetermined special lottery result is provided. In this state, the number of lotteries per unit time is likely to be short. Therefore, if it is within the same time, there is a high possibility that “big hit” will be drawn as a special lottery result, which is advantageous for the player and can enhance the interest in the game. In addition, the special lottery result is suggested in a short time, and the variation display of the lottery result effect image is executed crisply, so that the operation of driving the game ball can be advanced with good tempo, and the player's interest is enhanced and tired. Can be difficult.

  Furthermore, as a combination of symbols ZL, ZC, ZR in which an advantageous gaming state occurs, a combination of a special symbol and a combination of only a general symbol is less advantageous in the advantageous gaming state in which only the general symbol is generated. There is a possibility that even if an advantageous gaming state occurs, it may feel lost and it may not be possible to enhance the interest of the game, but if the advantageous gaming state occurs only with a combination of general symbols, a lottery result special notice effect will be implemented Therefore, it is possible to suppress the feeling of being lost due to the implementation of the lottery result special notice effect. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state occurs only with a combination of general symbols, the variation time of the lottery result effect image is changed to a time shorter than usual, so that the value of the advantageous gaming state seems to be low. Even if an advantageous gaming state occurs due to a combination of symbols only, the fluctuation time will be shortened thereafter, and there is a high possibility that the “big hit” as the advantageous gaming state will be drawn, so the player will feel lost. In addition, it is possible to recognize that when the advantageous gaming state occurs only by the combination of the general symbols, the fluctuation time is shortened, so that the gaming state with the short fluctuation time ("short time" state, "probability change / short time") It is possible to increase a sense of expectation with respect to (state), and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, when the variation time of the lottery result effect image is changed only to a time shorter than usual, the main body frame of the traversing bodies 2510 is covered with the four traversing bodies 2510 covering the entire front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640. In 2510a, a lottery result effect image, that is, a combination of symbols ZL, ZC, and ZR suggesting a special lottery result is displayed in sequence after a lottery result effect image, that is, a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed. The game state clearly different from the normal time (for example, “short time” game state, “probability / short time” game state, etc.) is clearly indicated to the player by the symbol row variably displayed on the four traversing bodies 2510. At first glance, it can be recognized, and this pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  Further, when the variation time of the lottery result effect image is changed to only a time shorter than usual, the lottery result effect is displayed on these traversing bodies 2510 with the four traversing bodies 2510 covering the entire front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640. Since the image is displayed, the player can recognize that the change time is changed only to a time shorter than usual ("short time" state, "probable change / short time" state). In addition, the probability per unit time that “big hit” (advantageous game state) is drawn is high, and the expectation for “big hit” can be increased, and the interest in games can be prevented from decreasing.

  In addition, when the variation time of the lottery result effect image is only in a short time state, the lottery result special notice effect is performed according to the special lottery result, and when the lottery result special notice effect is started, Of the four traversing bodies 2510 that cover the entire front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640, three traversing bodies 2510 move to positions corresponding to the three operation buttons 330, and one traversing body 2510 enters the invisible area A2. When the selection image P2 is displayed instead of the symbol row being variably displayed on the main body frame 2510a of the three traversing bodies 2510 in the viewable area A1, and any one of the operation buttons 330 is operated within a predetermined time. All the traversing bodies 2510 move into the invisible area A2, and the fortune-telling image P3 associated with the operated operation button 330 (selected option image P2) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 64. The four traversing bodies 2510 move from the invisible region A2 so as to cover the entire front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640, and a plurality of symbol columns displayed in a variable manner on the main body frame 2510a are displayed. In this state, a series of effects are performed such that each symbol row is sequentially stopped and displayed, and a combination of symbols ZL, ZC, ZR indicating a special lottery result is displayed. That is, before and after the lottery result special notice effect, a movable effect that covers the entire front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is performed by the four traversing bodies 2510. Therefore, not only the lottery result special notice effect but also the movement of the traversing body 2510 before and after the lottery result 2510 It can be entertained and it can suppress that a player's interest in a game falls.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, at least one traversing body 2510 is placed in the invisible area A2 before the special lottery result is suggested to the player according to the special lottery result. The two traversing bodies 2510 are moved from the invisible area A2 to a position that is substantially in contact with the invisible area A2 in the visible area A1 with the predetermined characters C1, C2, C3 displayed on the main body frame 2510a. A lottery result announcement effect is performed, and before the special lottery result is suggested, the traversing body 2510 displaying the characters C1, C2, and C3 appears in the viewable area A1 to surprise the player. It is possible to think that there is a high possibility that an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game) will occur, and to increase the expectation for the suggestion of the special lottery result Against interest can be suppressed. Further, the characters C1, C2, and C3 are displayed on the main body frame 2510a of the traversing body 2510, and the appearance of the traversing body 2510 can be variously changed only by changing the displayed characters C1, C2, and C3. Therefore, there are provided pachinko machines 1 that can make the types of lottery result notice effects for the special lottery results more diverse, and can prevent the player from getting bored and less interested in the game of the player. be able to.

  Also, in the lottery result notice effect, characters C1, C2, and C3 (previous effect image) are compared to the case where a predetermined pattern is displayed as a notice effect for the special lottery result only by the effect image of the liquid crystal display device as in the past. Is displayed on the main body frame 2510a of the three-dimensional traversing body 2510, and the traversing body 2510 is moved from the invisible area A2 to the visible area A1 in that state. It is possible to show the player a lottery result notice effect for a fresh special lottery result that has never been seen, and it can be hard to get tired and suppress the player's interest in the game from being reduced, and to the player The appeal power can be increased, and this pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play with greatly differentiating from other pachinko machines. It can be.

  Further, in the lottery result notice effect, the traversing body 2510 on which the predetermined characters C1, C2, and C3 are projected and displayed is moved at least from the invisible area A2 to a position that is substantially in contact with the invisible area A2 in the visible area A1. Therefore, for example, the traversing body 2510 appears and moves to a position in the visible area A1 that is substantially in contact with the initially invisible area A2, or the invisible area that was initially arranged. It can appear and move to a position in the visible area A1 that is substantially in contact with the invisible area A2 on the opposite side of A2, and various movements can be made only by the movement of the traversing body 2510. In addition to notifying the results, the player will also enjoy the movements of the characters C1, C2, and C3 projected and displayed on the traversing body 2510 and the main body frame 2510a. It can, at least until a special lottery result is suggested can be suppressed to decrease player's interest.

  Also, in the lottery result notice effect, the traversing body 2510 that appears and moves from within the invisible area A2 moves across the visible area A1 to a position that is substantially in contact with the invisible area A2 on the opposite side, so that the traversing body 2510 moves. It is possible to give the player a dynamic feeling as a large movement, and to increase the player's expectation by assuming that there is a high possibility that an advantageous gaming state will occur, and in the body frame 2510a, the character C1, It is possible to entertain the movement of the traversing body 2510 on which C2 and C3 are projected and displayed, and to suppress the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, in the lottery result notice effect, after the traversing body 2510 projecting and displaying the predetermined character C1 appears and moves from the invisible area A2 to a position in the visible area A1 substantially in contact with the invisible area A2, Since the traversing body 2510 that projects and displays a different character C2 from the invisible area A2 that the traversing body 2510 substantially touches, appears and moves so as to push the preceding traversing body 2510 to the center of the visible area A1, the traversing body 2510 The movement of the traversing body 2510 can be enjoyed by the pushing operation, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted.

  Further, in the lottery result notice effect, the traversing body 2510 appears sequentially at the left and right ends of the viewable area A1, or the traversing body 2510 appears at one end of the viewable area A1, and then the visible area from the opposite side. After appearing and moving so as to contact the first traversing body 2510 across A1, or after the first traversing body 2510 appears and moves across the viewable area A1, the next traversing body 2510 starts first. The traversing body 2510 moves over the first traversing body 2510 and moves across the viewable area A1 to the end of the opposite side (the invisible area A2 side where the first traversing body 2510 is disposed). Furthermore, after the first traversing body 2510 appears and moves to the opposite end across the viewable area A1, the next traversing body 2510 is the side on which the first traversing body 2510 has moved. Since it appears and moves beyond the first traversing body 2510 to a position substantially in contact with the first traversing body 2510, the player's line of sight can be moved to the left and right as the traversing body 2510 appears. It is possible to dispel the monotonous feeling and make it hard to get tired, and the traversing body 2510 can show a dynamic movement that alternately crosses the viewable area A1, and the lottery result notice effect It is possible to entertain and prevent the interest in games from decreasing.

  Further, in the lottery result notice effect, the more important characters C1, C2, and C3 are displayed on the main body frame 2510a of the traversing body 2510 as the special lottery result that is likely to cause the advantageous gaming state is drawn. Since the traversing body 2510 can appear and move into the viewable area A1, the characters C1, C2, and C3 displayed on the appearing traversing body 2510 can easily generate an advantageous gaming state for the player. It is possible to recognize the sex, and it is possible to obtain a sense of expectation according to the displayed characters C1, C2, and C3, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In the lottery result announcement effect, after moving a plurality of traversing bodies 2510 from within the invisible area A2 so that the traversing bodies 2510 extend over the entire visible area A1, all the traversing bodies 2510 are moved. If the special lottery result is a special lottery result for executing the lottery result notice effect after the lottery result notice start effect for moving into the invisible area A2 is executed, the lottery result notice effect as described above is started. Therefore, before the predetermined special lottery result is drawn and the special lottery result is suggested, the entire visible area A1 is once covered by the plurality of traversing bodies 2510, and then the traversing body 2510 is invisible area A2. There is a possibility that the lottery result notice effect as described above may be started, that is, an advantageous gaming state may occur due to the start of the lottery result notice effect. Since apparent from sex there, it is possible to increase the player's expectation, interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, in the lottery result notice effect, the player knows that the lottery result notice effect has ended because all the traversing bodies 2510 that have appeared and moved in the viewable area A1 in the lottery result notice effect have moved into the invisible area A2. It is possible to recognize the effect of the lottery results and the effect that suggests the special lottery results, so you can entertain each of them separately and get bored with the sharpness of the game. Can be difficult. In addition, since all the traversing bodies 2510 are moved to the invisible area A2 at the end of the lottery result notice effect, when suggesting the lottery result, the movable body is used for the effect (suggesting effect) that suggests the lottery result. It is possible to make it easy to use, and it is possible to entertain the suggestion effect and suppress the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, in the lottery result notice effect, when the plurality of traversing bodies 2510 that have appeared and moved are arranged so as to cover the entire visible area A1 (so as to cover the entire front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640), the lottery results that follow thereafter The combination of symbols ZL and ZR in a plurality of symbol sequences that are stopped and displayed in the effect image except for one symbol sequence becomes a combination that can satisfy the combination of symbols ZL, ZC, and ZR in which an advantageous gaming state occurs. Since the combination of the symbols ZL and ZR that are stopped and displayed is “reach”, and there is a high possibility that an advantageous gaming state will occur, a plurality of traversing bodies that appear and move sequentially into the viewable area A1 in the lottery result notice effect. Depending on whether or not 2510 covers the entire visible area A1, the player can be excited, and the player's expectation can be increased and the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing. Can.

  In addition, when the lottery result notice effect as described above is performed and all the traversing bodies 2510 appearing in the viewable area A1 move into the invisible area A2 and the lottery result notice effect ends, the lottery result effect image changes. Since the plurality of displayed symbol sequences are sequentially stopped and displayed, when the symbol sequence is stopped and displayed in the lottery result effect image, the traversing body 2510 is arranged in the viewable area A1, that is, in front of the liquid crystal display device 640. The symbol row and the symbols ZL, ZC, ZR are prevented from being blocked by the traversing body 2510, and the symbols ZL, ZC, ZR of the symbol row that is stopped and displayed can be easily seen. It is possible to make it easy to see the result effect image and to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. In addition, when the traversing body 2510 that has appeared in the viewable area A1 in the lottery result notice effect moves into the invisible area A2, the symbol sequence that is variably displayed in the lottery result effect image is stopped to indicate the lottery result. Since the combination of ZL, ZC, and ZR is displayed, the player can recognize that the special lottery result is finally suggested by moving the traversing body 2510 in the viewable area A1 into the invisible area A2. It is possible to increase the expectation for the suggestion of the result of the special lottery that has been drawn, and to prevent the interest in the game from being reduced.

  Further, in the lottery result notice effect, the two traversing bodies 2510 guided by the one upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b appear and move so as to be in contact with each other in the viewable area A1, and in the front-rear direction. The two traversing bodies 2510 guided by the upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b, which are arranged at different positions, appear and move over substantially the entire visible area A1, and at the end of the lottery result notice effect, Since the two traversing bodies 2510 guided by the two upper front rails 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b are moved to the left and right invisible areas, the four traversing bodies 2510 cannot be viewed at the end of the lottery result notice effect. When moving to the area A2, the movement of the traversing body 2510 moves dynamically so as to cross the viewable area A1, or the traversing body 25 0 each other becomes a movement or cross, it is possible to a strong motion impact to the player, entertained simultaneously surprise player interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the combination of the left and right symbols ZL and ZR that are stopped and displayed except for one symbol row can satisfy the combination of symbols ZL, ZC, and ZR in which an advantageous gaming state occurs. Depending on the special lottery result to be combined, that is, the special lottery result to be “reach”, the left and right symbols are stopped and displayed except for one symbol row (middle symbol row) in the lottery result effect image as the post-effect image When the combination of ZL and ZR is “reach”, the traversing bodies 2510 arranged in the left and right invisible areas A2 start to move into the visible areas A1 so as to approach each other, and the respective traversing bodies 2510 The middle symbol ZC, which is variably displayed as a pre-production image so as to become one image, is displayed on the main body frame 2510a, and these two traversing bodies 2510 are substantially in contact with each other at the approximate center in the left-right direction. On purpose made possible by each of the main frame 2510a to the displayed image one of symbols ZC establishing the condition such that the symbol ZC While being variably displayed and possessed a body frame 2510a of the transverse member 2510. In this state, the two traversing bodies 2510 reciprocate in the left-right direction together and then stop at a substantially central position, and are displayed on the main body frame 2510a on the rear liquid crystal display device 640 so as to be hidden by the two traversing bodies 2510. After the next middle symbol ZC is displayed as a rear effect image with respect to the middle symbol ZC, the two traversing bodies 2510 are moved away from each other to visually recognize the middle symbol ZC displayed on the rear side. When the rear middle symbol ZC is made visible, the rear middle symbol ZC is recognized after synthesizing at least an effect that makes the rear middle symbol ZC difficult to see. Thus, a “reach development effect” can be performed as a special result for the lottery result that suggests the result of the special lottery to the player.

  In other words, when a game ball is received at the first start port 1504, the second start port 1506, and the stage start port 2220 and a special lottery result that is “reach” as a special lottery result is lottery, according to the special lottery result. In addition, since the display of the lottery result effect image is started, each variably displayed symbol sequence is sequentially stopped and displayed, and first, it is in the “reach” state, so that an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” or “small hit” ) Can be increased, and the player's expectation can be increased and the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing. When the lottery result effect image is in the “reach” state, the traversing body 2510 starts moving from the left and right invisible areas A2 to the visible area A1 so as to approach each other. The appearance of the traversing body 2510 allows the player to recognize that the “reach development effect” (the special effect of the lottery result) has been started, and the appearance of the traversing body 2510 strongly attracts the player's interest. It is possible to increase the player's expectation and prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. In the main body frame 2510a of the two traversing bodies 2510 that are close to each other, the changing middle symbol ZC is divided and displayed so as to form one image in the two main body frames 2510a. By being in a state of being substantially in contact with each other at substantially the center in the left-right direction, the changing middle symbol ZC displayed on the rear side is gradually hidden by the traversing body 2510 and displayed on the main body frame 2510a of the traversing body 2510. Since the middle symbol ZC is in a completed state, it is possible to make the illusion that the middle symbol ZC on the rear side has moved to the main body frame 2510a of the traversing body 2510. The side effect image can be shifted to the front traversing body 2510, and a large middle symbol ZC can be displayed on the main body frame 2510a of the two traversing bodies 2510. The interest of the person it is possible to attract strongly on the symbol ZC in the movement and the main body frame 2510a of the rampant body 2510. Further, since the middle symbol ZC has been moved to the traversing body 2510, the three-dimensional traversing body 2510 is compared with the case where the symbol is variably displayed only by the effect image as in the conventional pachinko machine. By displaying the medium symbol ZC being changed, the impression of the traversing body 2510 can be greatly changed. Thereafter, the two traversing bodies 2510 reciprocate in the left-right direction together in a state of being substantially in contact with each other and then stop at a substantially central position, so that the player's interest can be attracted to the middle symbol ZC of the traversing body 2510. The movement of the traversing body 2510 can be enjoyed. Then, when the two traversing bodies 2510 having the middle symbol ZC displayed on the main body frame 2510a are substantially in contact with each other and stop at the approximate center, the next middle symbol is hidden on the rear liquid crystal display device 640 so as to be hidden by the traversing body 2510. ZC is displayed, and then, after the two traversing bodies 2510 start moving in directions away from each other, the light effect that makes it difficult to see at least the rear middle symbol ZC for a predetermined time is applied. The middle symbol ZC concealed by the two traversing bodies 2510 can be visually recognized. Depending on whether or not the middle symbol ZC is a desired symbol, the player can be thrilled and thrilled, and can be recognized. Expectation for the design ZC can be enhanced. Accordingly, as described above, the medium symbol ZC being variably displayed is displayed on the main body frame 2510a of the traversing body 2510, so that the appearance of the three-dimensional traversing body 2510 can be greatly changed. It is possible to increase the types of collaboration effects by combining with the after-effect images displayed on the display device 640, and to realize the collaboration effects of the more diverse traversing bodies 2510 and the effect images. The pachinko machine 1 which can suppress that interest falls is provided.

  In addition, as compared with the change display of the middle symbol ZC only by the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 640 as in the past ("reach development effect"), the middle symbol ZC of the after-effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640, Since it is displayed on the main body frame 2510a of the three-dimensional traversing body 2510 and the traversing body 2510 is moved in the left-right direction in that state, it is possible to show the player a variation effect with a fresh taste that has never been seen before. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced, and to increase the appeal to the player by collaborating with the traversing body 2510 and the production image. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine that is greatly differentiated from the machine and plays.

  In addition, the two traversing bodies 2510 are moved together while being in contact with the left and right direction, and the two main body frames 2510a are used as one screen to display one middle symbol ZC. The middle symbol ZC of the rear effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 on the rear side is made visible to the player by moving in the direction away from the main body frame 2510a of the two traversing bodies 2510. By composing one screen, the middle symbol ZC can be displayed larger, and the middle symbol ZC transferred to the traversing body 2510 can be easily seen, attracting the player's interest strongly, and with the traversing body 2510 The pachinko machine 1 that can stand out by moving and gives a different impression from other pachinko machines at first glance and has a higher appeal than other pachinko machines Door can be. In addition, since the two traversing bodies 2510 are separated, the middle symbol ZC on the rear side can be visually recognized, so the middle symbol ZC on the traversing body 2510 side (front side) is broken into two and the next middle symbol ZC (rear) It is possible to produce an effect such that the middle symbol ZC) on the side appears, and it is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  Further, in the lottery result effect image, when the combination of the left and right symbols ZL and ZR that are stopped and displayed except for one symbol row becomes “reach”, “reach development effect” (lottery result special effect) is started. Therefore, the opportunity to start the lottery result special effect is limited, the premium feeling for the lottery result special effect can be enhanced, and the lottery result special effect as described above is prevented from being bored easily. It is possible to increase the player's expectation due to the premium feeling by starting the lottery result special effect, and to suppress the interest in the game from being reduced.

  Furthermore, when the traversing body 2510 moves and the rear middle symbol ZC becomes visible, an effect that makes it difficult to see the front and rear middle symbols ZC is applied for a predetermined time. A part of the rear middle symbol ZC can be seen in the middle of the movement, and it can be recognized what symbol ZC it is, so that it is possible to prevent the sense of expectation from being lowered and the interest in the game from being lowered. In addition, since the effect is applied to the front and rear middle symbols ZC, the timing at which the rear middle symbol ZC can be visually recognized even when the traversing body 2510 moves for the first time is noticed. It is possible to suppress missing, to sufficiently enjoy the appearance effect of the middle symbol ZC on the rear side due to the movement of the traversing body 2510, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. it can.

  In addition, since the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 is synthesized by arranging the effect image on the front layer of the effect image by the image synthesizing unit 3158d, the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 is synthesized. The rear effect image appears to be arranged at the same time, and the outer periphery of the previous effect image is partitioned by the main body frame 2510a of the traversing body 2510, so that the illusion is as if the front effect image is displayed in the main body frame 2510a. The pachinko machine 1 which can be made and can produce the effect mentioned above reliably with a simple structure can be embodied. Further, the previous effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 causes the previous effect image to be displayed on the main body frame 2510a of the traversing body 2510 without providing the traversing body 2510 with a display device or a separate projection device. The configuration of the traversing body 2510 can be simplified and easily moved, and a sufficient space for the traversing body 2510 and the like can be secured. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having a higher impact can be obtained. Furthermore, since a display device or a projection device for displaying the previous effect image on the main body frame 2510a of the traversing body 2510 is not required, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost related to the pachinko machine 1.

  Furthermore, since the effect can be synthesized with the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 by the image synthesizing means 3158d, the effect can be easily obtained by simply synthesizing the effect with the effect image to which the effect is not applied. Can be obtained, and by combining various types of effect images and multiple types of effects as appropriate, more types of effects can be easily obtained, making it difficult to get tired of the player It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls. In addition, compared to the case where there are those without effects and those with effects, even if the capacity of the image ROM 3122 (storage means) is the same, more types of effects can be realized by combining effects images and effects. And increase in cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the plurality of traversing bodies 2510 can be moved independently in the left-right direction, the plurality of traversing bodies 2510 are more complicated than the conventional movable bodies that only approach or separate from each other. It can be moved and fused with various pre-production images projected and displayed on the body frame 2510a of the traversing body 2510, making the traversing body 2510 more noticeable and enabling various effects. It can be difficult to suppress the player's interest from decreasing.

  Furthermore, each traversing body 2510 may move in the left-right direction between the viewable area A1 on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 640 and the invisible area A2 disposed on the left and right sides of the viewable area A1. Since the traversing body 2510 is moved from the invisible area A2 to the visible area A1, or the traversing body 2510 is moved from the visible area A1 to the invisible area A2, the traversing body 2510 is played. Pachinko that can be seen from the player's side or can be made invisible, making the movement of the traversing body 2510 more versatile and less likely to get tired and reduce the interest of the player Machine 1 can be used.

  Further, since the traversing body 2510 can be moved from the left or right invisible area A2 to the opposite side beyond the center of the visible area A1, the traversing body 2510 has a moving range. It becomes larger, and it is possible to perform an overtaking operation between the traversing bodies 2510 using substantially the entire visible area A1, or to perform a crossing operation between the traversing bodies 2510, thereby performing a moving effect of a more dynamic movement. It is possible to suppress the excitement to the game by surprise or entertaining the player and to display the pre-effect image on the main body frame 2510a of the traversing body 2510 that moves dynamically. Thus, the traversing body 2510 can be made more conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  Further, the traversing body 2510 is disposed in the rear side of the gaming panel 600 and is guided in the left-right direction by the upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b having substantially the same length as the width of the gaming panel 600. Can be made as wide as possible, and the traversing body 2510 that has emerged from the invisible region A2 can appear in a wider range, and the traversing body 2510 can be guided in a wide range. It becomes possible to make the movement more dynamic, and it is possible to make the player enjoy the movement of the traversing body 2510 and to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. In addition, the traversing body 2510 that moves greatly can make the inside of the traversing body 2510 and the gaming area 605 where the traversing body 2510 is arranged stand out and give the player an impression that is different from other pachinko machines at first glance. Can be a pachinko machine 1 that is strongly attracted.

  Further, since the upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b are arranged on the rear side of the game panel 600, it is possible to make it difficult to see the upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b from the player side, and the upper front rail 2520a. In addition, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being deteriorated by the visibility of the upper rear rail 2520b, and the traversing body 2510 is arranged on the rear side of the gaming panel 600. The visible area A1 and the invisible area A2 of the traversing body 2510 can be easily formed, and more various movable effects by the traversing bodies 2510 can be realized.

  Further, since the two traversing bodies 2510 are guided with respect to one upper front rail 2520a and upper rear rail 2520b, the traversing bodies 2510 are actually in contact with each other, and the movable body 2510 can move. It is possible to suppress the interest in the game from deteriorating. In addition, since a greater number of traversing bodies 2510 than the number of upper front rails 2520a and upper rear rails 2520b can be guided, a movable effect that more attracts the player's interest is realized by the number of traversing bodies 2510. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered by making it hard to get bored or entertaining. Further, since it is possible to guide a greater number of traversing bodies 2510 than the number of upper front rails 2520a and upper rear rails 2520b, it is possible to suppress an increase in the depth in the front-rear direction of the mechanism related to guiding the traversing bodies 2510. It is possible to increase the size of the actors and the like that are relatively placed in the traversing body 2510, the game area 605, etc., and to attract the player's interest by making the traversing body 2510 etc. stand out. Can do.

  Further, by setting the horizontal width of the traversing body 2510 to a width within a range of 1/2 to 1/10 of the lateral width of the liquid crystal display device 640, the traversing body 2510 is set to an optimum size. In addition, since the player can clearly see the entire traversing body 2510 on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640, the symbols ZL, ZC, ZR displayed on the traversing body 2510 and the main body frame 2510a (pre-effect image) It is possible to make it easy to see, and to make the movement of the traversing body 2510 etc. entertain and to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. Moreover, since the size of the traversing body 2510 can be set to an appropriate size with respect to the size of the liquid crystal display device 640 (viewable area A1), various movable effects by the traversing body 2510 described above can be surely realized. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the movable performance and to reduce the interest of the player.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a side view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a top view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko game machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main part frame, game board, and door frame which constitute a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is BB sectional drawing (A) of FIG. 11, CC sectional drawing (B) of FIG. 13 (A), DD sectional drawing (C), and EE sectional drawing (D). It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is AA sectional drawing displayed on FIG. It is BB sectional drawing displayed on FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and the hit ball | bowl launching apparatus provided in a main body frame. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivotally supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame which attached components. It is the cross-sectional top view of the pachinko gaming machine cut | disconnected by the horizontal line of the middle (main control board box part) of the pachinko gaming machine. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a top view of a game board. It is an expansion perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part formed in a game board. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the main body frame which shows the structure by the side of the main body frame with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of a game board. It is the perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball | bowl launcher, and the perspective view (B) of the state which removed the firing motor part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a hit ball launching device. It is the front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hit ball | bowl launcher and a firing rail, and a perspective view (B) of a launching motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is not operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is operating the operation handle part, and a launch rail. They are a top view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), and a front view (B) AA sectional view (D) of the slide member provided in the ball striking device. FIG. 4 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball | bowl in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball path unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the channel | path and drive relationship of a prize ball unit. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is the cross-sectional view cut | disconnected by the bottom rocking | fluctuation board part provided in a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the vertical direction center of the pachinko game machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the side wall of a main body frame. It is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. The perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, the perspective view (B) of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the locking device, (C). It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. (A) is a front view of a game board, (a) is a front view which expands and shows the status indicator in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally behind. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. FIG. 76 is an enlarged perspective view showing the vicinity of a stage in FIG. 75. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory, the attacker unit, and the side member from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory, the attacker unit, and the side member from the back. It is a side view of the center accessory seen from the direction of arrow A in FIG. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front in the state which assembled the front structural member and the game panel, (b) is the perspective view seen from the back in the state which assembled the front structural member and the game panel. It is a front view of a back unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the exploded view of FIG. 87 from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled each member attached to the back unit base in a back unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the exploded perspective view of FIG. 89 viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rocking body unit from the front, (b) is the front view of the rocking body unit, (c) is the perspective view which expands and shows the rocking mechanism in the rocking body unit. . It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the traversing body unit of the back unit into the front traversing body drive unit, the back traversing body drive unit, and the lower rail unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the disassembled perspective view of FIG. 92 from the back. It is a front view of a traversing body unit. It is a rear view of a traversing body unit. It is a perspective view which abbreviate | omits and shows a part of front traverse body drive unit in a traversing body unit. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front which abbreviate | omitted a part of front lower drive unit in a front traversing body drive unit, (b) abbreviate | omits a part of front lower drive unit in a front traversing body drive unit FIG. It is the perspective view which abbreviate | omitted some front upper drive units in a front traversing body drive unit, and was seen from the front. It is a front view of a back traversing body drive unit. It is a rear view which abbreviate | omits and shows a part of back traversing body drive unit. It is the perspective view which abbreviate | omitted a part of back lower drive unit in a back traversing body drive unit, and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which abbreviate | omitted a part of rear upper drive unit in a back traversing body drive unit, and was seen from the front. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure around the main board | substrate in a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the periphery control board periphery in a pachinko machine. (A) is a front view which expands and shows the sub decoration body vicinity in a center accessory, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display part in a sub decoration body. It is a front view of the game board which made the traversing body fully open. It is a front view of the game board showing a state where the traversing body is fully opened and the swinging body is exposed and swung. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a motion of the traversing body from the state which the several traversing body covered the front surface of the liquid crystal display device to the exposed state (full open). FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a movement of covering the front surface of the liquid crystal display device with a plurality of traversing bodies different from FIG. 108. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable range of a traversing body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the movement which any one traversing body of the front-back direction overtakes the other traversing body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a motion which the traversing bodies arrange | positioned in the position which differs in the front-back direction cross. FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a movement of covering the front surface of the liquid crystal display device with a plurality of traversing bodies different from those in FIGS. 108 and 109. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the further different motion which coat | covers the front surface of a liquid crystal display device with a some traversing body. FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the movement of the traversing body from the state illustrated in FIG. 114 until the liquid crystal display device is fully opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a movement of the traversing body in the state which coat | covered the front surface of a liquid crystal display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a motion in the state which two traversing bodies contact | connected. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a motion in which three traversing bodies are located in a line at the front surface of a liquid crystal display device. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a periphery control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the normal lottery result effect image which suggests the lottery result by a start winning prize. (B1)-(B4) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production in which only one traversing body appears in the lottery result notice production, and (C) shows an example of production different from (B1)-(B4). It is explanatory drawing and (D1)-(D3) is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the further different production. (E1) to (E2) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effects in which two adjacent traversing bodies appear in the lottery result notice effect and one large previous effect image is displayed. (F1) to (F2) It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation in which two traversing bodies appear sequentially in the lottery result notice production, (G1)-(G4) are explanatory drawings showing an example of production different from (F1)-(F2). . (H1) to (H4) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effects different from (F1) to (F2) in FIG. 123, and (I1) to (I4) are different from (H1) to (H4). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of production. (J1) to (J4) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effects further different from (F1) to (F2) in FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect which appears sequentially. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of effects different from (K1) to (K4) in FIG. 125. (M1) to (M4) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect in which four traversing bodies appear sequentially to cover the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, and (N1) to (N4) are (M1) to (M4). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect different from. FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect further different from the example of FIG. 127. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect further different from the example of FIG.127 and FIG.128. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a lottery result special notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the lottery result special notice effect different from FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production using the rampant body in the reach development production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reach development effect following FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of reach development effect different from the example of FIG.132 and FIG.133. FIG. 135 is an explanatory diagram showing reach development effects following FIG. 134. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the reach development notice effect which notifies a development effect following a reach.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 300 Dish unit 330 Operation button 330a Left button 330b Middle button 330c Right button 460 Handle device 461 Operation handle part 599 Game panel 599e Opening part 600 Panel holder 600a Holding step part 600b Through port 601 Front component 602 Outer rail 603 Inner rail 605 Game area 606 Out port 610 Foul port 621 Back box 621a Front back box 621b Rear back box 640 Liquid crystal display device (effect display means)
800 prize ball units (payout units)
1350 Main control board 1424 Rotating decoration body 1424a Petal decoration body 1426 Sub decoration body 1428 Object detection sensor 1428a Light emitting section 1428b Light receiving section 1502 General prize opening (accepting entrance)
1504 First start port (start port)
1506 Second start port (start port)
2000 Back unit 2220 Stage start port (start port)
2310 Oscillator 2500 Traversing body unit 2510 Traversing body (movable body)
2510a Body (window frame)
2512 Front traversing body (movable body)
2512R front traversing body right 2512L front traversing body left 2514 rear traversing body (movable body)
2514R Rear traversing body right 2514L Rear traversing body left 2520a Upper front rail (guide member)
2520b Upper rear rail (guide member)
2600 Front traverse body drive unit 2610 Front lower drive unit 2650 Front upper drive unit 2700 Rear traverse body drive unit 2710 Rear lower drive unit 2750 Back upper drive unit)
2800 Lower rail unit (guide member)
3000 Main board 3062 First special random number generation means (lottery means)
3066 First special symbol variation pattern selection means 3072 Second special random number generation means (lottery means)
3074 Second special symbol hold storage means 3076 Second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection means 3082 Advantageous game state generation means 3084 Big winning opening opening / closing control means 3086 Fluctuation pattern table changing means (effect time changing means)
3100 Peripheral control board 3152 Effect pattern selection means 3154 Effect control means 3156 Movable effect control means 3158 Effect image control means 3158a Previous effect image control means 3158b Post effect image control means 3158c Effect control means 3158d Image composition means 3164 Object detection acceptance means 3166 Operation Accepting means A1 Viewable area A2 Unviewable area ZL Left design ZC Middle design ZR Right design C0 Special character C1 First character C2 Second character C3 Third character P1 Design pattern P2 Choice image P3 Fortune-telling image H Handprint

Claims (3)

  1. A game panel having a game area into which a game medium is driven by a player's operation;
    And starting opening the game medium is capable accepted that implanted is disposed at a predetermined position in the game area,
    The starting port is a receiving port that is placed at a different position in the gaming area and is capable of receiving a game medium that has been driven in,
    And paying out payout unit a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the acceptance of game media to the receiving port and the start hole,
    Lottery means for drawing a predetermined lottery result in response to the reception of the game medium at the start port;
    And advantageously gaming state generating means for generating a favorable advantageous gaming state to the player depending on the lottery result of the lottery unit,
    And the effect display means having said than gaming panel is disposed on the rear side, the display region in which a plurality of symbol row consisting of a predetermined number of symbols are displayed respectively change,
    At least two windows that have a window frame and are operable in front of the effect display means and rearward of the game panel and are visible through the area in the window frame. With two movable ornaments,
    Movable decorative body driving means for independently driving the two movable decorative bodies;
    The plurality of symbol rows in the display region of the effect display means, the two symbol sequences in the window frame that are visible through the regions in the window frames of the two movable decorative bodies , and the regions outside the window frames A role confusion effect control means capable of executing the control related to the role confusion effect divided into the symbol sequence outside the window frame made visible at
    With
    The role confusion production control means is
    A window frame opportunity machine effect capable of executing control to display both of the two window frame symbol strings in a specific pattern while keeping the symbol pattern outside the window frame in a specific state in the display area. Control means;
    After the control by the window frame opportunity control means is performed, the two movable decorative bodies are visually recognized through the regions within the window frames, both of which are in the two window frame graphic patterns. As a movable movable effect device that is made possible, movable design overlap control means capable of executing control to move from both sides by the movable decorative body drive means to the front of the specific area,
    When the two movable decorative bodies are moved to the front of the specific area by the control by the movable symbol overlap control means, the display area of the effect display means that is visible through the area within the window frame , wherein a plurality of the two executable window frame out symbol control means controls only the window frame in the symbol column are displayed in each of another of the symbol row,
    After control by the window frame and out symbol control means is performed, as symbols of the two same or differ and specific symbols which are visible, respectively as a window frame in symbol rows FIG Pattern the window outside the frame symbol column Lottery result special effect control means capable of executing control to move the two movable decorative bodies from the front of the specific area by the movable decorative body driving means so as to be newly visible ;
    Gaming machine characterized in that it comprises a.
  2.   In the display area of the effect display means, a variable display with a plurality of rows of symbols is performed.
      The gaming machine according to claim 1.
  3.   The effect display means is provided as a liquid crystal display device.
      The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
JP2008310425A 2008-12-05 2008-12-05 Game machine Active JP5234628B2 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2008310425A JP5234628B2 (en) 2008-12-05 2008-12-05 Game machine

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2008310425A JP5234628B2 (en) 2008-12-05 2008-12-05 Game machine

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
JP2010131220A JP2010131220A (en) 2010-06-17
JP5234628B2 true JP5234628B2 (en) 2013-07-10

Family

ID=42343171

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2008310425A Active JP5234628B2 (en) 2008-12-05 2008-12-05 Game machine

Country Status (1)

Country Link
JP (1) JP5234628B2 (en)

Families Citing this family (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6040573B2 (en) * 2012-05-24 2016-12-07 株式会社三洋物産 Game machine
JP2014223204A (en) * 2013-05-16 2014-12-04 株式会社ソフイア Game machine
JP6281104B2 (en) * 2013-09-20 2018-02-21 株式会社ソフイア Game machine
JP6109250B2 (en) * 2015-07-08 2017-04-05 株式会社藤商事 Game machine
JP6109251B2 (en) * 2015-07-08 2017-04-05 株式会社藤商事 Game machine
JP6109249B2 (en) * 2015-07-08 2017-04-05 株式会社藤商事 Game machine
JP6109252B2 (en) * 2015-07-08 2017-04-05 株式会社藤商事 Game machine
JP2015213814A (en) * 2015-07-29 2015-12-03 株式会社ソフイア Game machine
JP6303228B2 (en) * 2015-11-12 2018-04-04 株式会社大都技研 Amusement stand
JP6240852B2 (en) * 2016-02-22 2017-12-06 株式会社ソフイア Game machine
JP2016179219A (en) * 2016-06-15 2016-10-13 株式会社大都技研 Game machine
JP6344697B2 (en) * 2016-07-15 2018-06-20 株式会社サンセイアールアンドディ Game machine
JP2017023823A (en) * 2016-11-07 2017-02-02 株式会社三洋物産 Game machine
JP2018043082A (en) * 2017-12-22 2018-03-22 株式会社ソフイア Game machine

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP4778918B2 (en) * 2007-02-21 2011-09-21 株式会社大都技研 Amusement stand
JP2009125300A (en) * 2007-11-22 2009-06-11 Daito Giken:Kk Game machine

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2010131220A (en) 2010-06-17

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP4704747B2 (en) Game machine
JP4811922B2 (en) Game machine
JP2006230643A (en) Game machine
JP5077650B2 (en) Game machine
JP2006230642A (en) Game machine
JP5266567B2 (en) Game machine
JP2006034733A (en) Game machine
JP5354146B2 (en) Game machine
JP4756502B2 (en) Game machine
JP2006255337A (en) Game machine
JP5153261B2 (en) Game machine
JP2011152163A (en) Game machine
JP2010022710A (en) Game machine
JP5266566B2 (en) Game machine
JP2010268924A (en) Game machine
JP5142190B2 (en) Game machine
JP2011152157A (en) Game machine
JP5142194B2 (en) Game machine
JP2005110822A (en) Game machine
JP5456523B2 (en) Game machine
JP5070419B2 (en) Game machine
JP5114737B2 (en) Game machine
JP5613936B2 (en) Game machine
JP5252178B2 (en) Pachinko machine
JP2010022709A (en) Game machine

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
A621 Written request for application examination

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A621

Effective date: 20111130

RD02 Notification of acceptance of power of attorney

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A7422

Effective date: 20121024

A521 Written amendment

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A821

Effective date: 20121024

A131 Notification of reasons for refusal

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A131

Effective date: 20121127

A521 Written amendment

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20130128

TRDD Decision of grant or rejection written
A01 Written decision to grant a patent or to grant a registration (utility model)

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A01

Effective date: 20130219

A61 First payment of annual fees (during grant procedure)

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A61

Effective date: 20130319

R150 Certificate of patent or registration of utility model

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R150

FPAY Renewal fee payment (event date is renewal date of database)

Free format text: PAYMENT UNTIL: 20160405

Year of fee payment: 3

R250 Receipt of annual fees

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R250

R250 Receipt of annual fees

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R250

R250 Receipt of annual fees

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R250